Home

FP-Sigma User`s Manual, ARCT1F333E11

1. Status Display Untitle If the error is an operation error the error a Program Information ope i Proaram Size O O177512K Ret 11775 Hne address can be confirmed in this dialog Machine Lanquage Of OK i Contig Area Size Of OK Eset box File Reaister Size 20477 20K 1 0 Comment Size yoo000P Rest 100000 P Block Comment 5000L Rest 5000 L 170 Eror Remark Size 5000P Rest 5000 P i i amer After correcting the error click on the m nnection j PLC Type FP SIGMA 12K Station Home Ye Clear Error button to clear the error Version KP20 ScanTime 1 0 msec Operation Eit Condition Normal Min 0 5 msec PLC Mode REMOTE PROG Max 15 msec r PLE Eror Flag r PLO Mode Flag PE link Self gt Qg KOYeii O0 RUN Mode gt 0 OUT Refresh gt 0 Ww Volt Dip o BattewEr 0 TEST Mode 0 STEPRUN 0 Wik 170 Error 0 Hold 0 Break Mode O Message 0 Advance Unit g OpeEn 0 Break Enable 0 Remote l Force flag 0 External El 0 ue Self Diagnosis Error Message EnorCode 0 pa Key Point To display the status display dialog box select Status Display under Online on the menu bar Procedure 2 lt For error code is 1 to 9 gt e Condition There is a syntax error in the program e Operation 1 Change to PROG mode and clear the error e Operation 2 Execute a total check function using FPWIN GR to determine the location of the syntax error 10 3
2. 150 ms 150 ms Nearhome sensor Home sensor XA ON xo ON xX ON 2000 Hz 6 46 6 4 10 Pulse Output Instruction F175 Linear Interpolation Only for C32T2 C28P2 C32T2H and C28P2H e The linear interpolation controls positioning with two axes according to the specified data table Rit DF Fi DMV H1000 DTS00 F1 DMV K500 DT502 Fi DMV K5000 DT504 Fi DMV K300 DT506 Fi DMV K5000 DT508 Fi DMV K2000 DT510 F175 SPSH DT500 KO Pulses are output from the axis CHO and the Y axis CH2 so that the composite speed is an initial speed of 500 Hz the maximum speed is 5000 Hz and the acceleration deceleration time is 300 ms The two axes are controlled so that a linear path is followed to the target position When the program runs the data table and positioning eI Ld td ted tI tJ Ld Positioning data table Positioning path J1 CH2 Composite sp DT503 Initial speed Seats area 2000 DT504 Composite speed 2 OT505 Max speed 5000 Hz i Designated with DTS06 user program DT507 DT510 Target value 5000 X axis CHO DT511 Y axis CH2 DT512 X axis CHO DT513 Initial spee rsin msm DT515 Max speed result O Fixed L DT516 Y axis CH2 component speed storage area DT517 Initial spee Parameters for Duty on width DT518 Y axis CH2 component speed each axis 0 Duty 1 2 50 Max l peec p P
3. KA X DXL Download is not possible z y a Ap agi ae 4 r j m A r dE a OF gi SO i Fand 01234567 Password abcdefgh E Password None Me F _ La acy Note This function cannot be used when the setting to disable the download to the FP older than V3 2 has not been made 8 4 3 Upload Protection Setting Function Set that PLC cannot be uploaded If this function is valid the PLC will be in the upload protection state by downloading a program to the PLC from the FP memory loader FP memory loader Program A Password 01234567 E Upload protection function ON i e l Downloading programs aos Upload is prohibited FP memory loader ACS a Note This function cannot be used when the setting to disable the download to the FP older than V3 2 has not been made 8 12 8 4 4 Version Check List Version check list State of target PLC to be written PLC Password 4 digits 8 digits eee Mi Not set Protected Protected Download prohibition to old ver tae sees Nl oe ee a i x Download protection to old ver and V3 20 e m Download permission only for or later l Note1 models with same password x x x x Ver3 20 or later and or older Upload protection or later Note1 Note1 ote1 ote2 8 digit password V3 11 Download protection to old ver and Download permission only for V 3 20 x x amp m with same password or later
4. O 5 Q te i 2 10 2 3 Terminal Layout Diagram 2 3 1 Control Unit for C32 Input by ET ne Connector front view Note The four COM terminals of input circuit are connected internally Output Yo Y1 Ye Y Connector front view Note The two terminals of output circuit are connected internally The two terminals of output circuit are connected internally 2 3 2 Control Unit for C28 Input Fe Ey HR liy Connector front view Note The four COM terminals of input circuit are connected internally Output Connector front view Note The two terminals of output circuit are connected internally The two terminals of output circuit are connected internally 2 3 3 Control Unit for C24 XO X8 EE a a YO Connector front view 2 4 Analog Potentiometer 2 4 1 Overview of Analog Potentiometer The FP is equipped with two analog potentiometers as a standard feature Turning the potentiometers changes the values of the special data registers DT90040 and DT90041 within a range of KO to K1000 Using this function makes it possible to change the internal set values in the PLC without using the programming tool so this can be used for example with analog clocks to change the set value externally by turning the potentiometer ete Pata 00000000 00000000 bi o n _ o oopoo000 0000000
5. 4mAoress FPO E32T P____ 40mA or less 68 8mAorless 48mAorless FPo A21 20mAorless 100mAorless T FPO A80 20mAorless 60mAorless FPO FPO A04V_ 20mAorless 100mAorless intelligent FPO A04I 20mAorless 180mA orles unit COCE E a a E E FPO IOL 30mAorless 40mAorless_ FPO CCLS 40mAorless 40mAorles l o FPG COM1 cer a FPG Coma GT01 GTO1R 80mA or less 5 V DC RS232C type C NET Melese omms 12 4 6 Input circuit current E consumpition This is the current consumed form the control unit z i Output circuit current HJ i consumpition power supply connector If Expansion unit current expansion units or COnSuUMmp ition Control unit current high pe rlormance consumpition units are added the current is increased by the value indicated below FP x intelligent unit 12 1 2 Performance Specifications FP 12k type Descriptions C32T C32T2 C24R2 C28P2 C32TTM C32T2TM C24R2TM C28P2TM 32 points 32 points 24 points 28 points Control unit DC input 16 DC input 16 DC input 16 DC input 16 NPN output 16 NPN output 16 Relay output 8 NPN output 12 Max 120 units up to 3 units Max 128 points Max 128 points When using Max 124 points up to 3 units up to 3 units transistor output up to 4 units type expansion units MAX 2B pomis Max 284 points up to 4 un
6. 7 1 Communication cassette LED indication The indication of the control unit is for 2 channel RS232C type For the other types refer to the following Indication of AFPG801 AFPG802 AFPG803 AFPG806 control unit RS232C Not used SD RS232C Not used RD LED Communicating Flashes No communication Lights out SD Sent data output RD Received data input Difference of dimensions AFPG801 AFPG806 AFPG802 Note This is longer by 5mm AFPG803 7 8 7 1 3 Names and Principle Applications of the Ports Port type Communication function Standard feature Cimpina COMO port Mini DIN 5 pin p ae General purpose serial communication in RUN mode only connector Computer link a oot MEWTOCOL master Communication Sane COM1 port Baneeite General purpose serial communication PC PLC link MODBUS RTU Computer link COM port 2 Communication MEWTOCOL master E cassette General purpose serial communication MODBUS RTU 7 1 4 Setting of AFPG806 Switch Only when using RS485 port COM1 It is necessary to set the built in switch and the system register both to set the baud rate OW SW1 1 7 General i 1 mO terminal 1 Station m Terminal resistance OFF ON intial value OFF ON station 2 E N l a swi 2 m 19200 bps C 115200 bps initial value OFF gt ON OFF ON Baud rate OFF RS232C communication is only specified by system registers When using
7. DIN rail Installing groove 35 mm FPG C32TTM FPG C32T2TM FPG C28P2TM FPG C32THTM FPG C32T2HTM FPG C28P2HTM 18 60 0 ott 5 0 30 0 100 The dimension with the communication cassette mounted is 105mm 13 2 13 1 2 Control Unit Relay Output Type FPG C24R2 FPG C24R2H a W 300 10 60 0 50 E 60 0 i O BywHYYyH Spagegar 1 Max dimension for mounting Approx 90 0 _DIN rail Installing groove 35 mm 0 0 Approx 130 0 FPG C24R2TM FPG C24R2HTM af H l arog r P The dimension with the communication cassette mounted is the same as the transistor output type 90 0 SSSS9Ssssg fS 13 3 13 1 3 Expansion Unit FPG XY64D2T FPG XY64D2P Va hd al hd w e e ooo0o0000 oo000000 7 FPG EM1 13 4 13 2 Connection Diagram with Motor Driver 13 2 1 Panasonic MINAS A series Alll series Controller R1 2k O ZW Amplifier R2 2k IZW to 4700 2W FPG C32T FP2 MINAS A series MINAS Alll series CW pulse command output CAN pulse command input CCW pulsa COV pulsi command output j d command input Homa input Z phase output Counter clear input Servo Of inpul Gain switch input Deviatan counter reset output Alann cear impul COW driva prohibition input Home naar input W driv
8. However the contents of operation memory not stored with the hold type data will also be cleared The error can also be cleared depending on the self diagnostic error set instruction F148 ERR Steps to take for self diagnostic error The steps to be taken will differ depending on the error contents For more details use the error code obtained above and consult the table of a self diagnostic error codes MEWTOCOL COM Transmission Errors These are error codes from a PC or other computer device that occur during an abnormal response when communicating with a PLC using MEWTOCOL COM 14 62 Table of Syntax Check Error Opera tion Description and steps to take status A program with a syntax error has been written Change to PROG mode and correct the error Two or more OT Out instructions and KP Keep instructions are programmed using the same relay Also occurs when using the same timer counter number Duplicated Change to PROG mode and correct the output program so that one relay error is not used for two or more OT instructions Or set the duplicated output to enable in system register 20 A timer counter instruction double definition error will be detected even if double output permission has been selected For instructions which must be used in a pair such as jump JP and LBL one instruction is Not paired either missing or in an incorrect position error Change to PROG mode and enter the two instructions wh
9. Note1 The contacts noted above cannot be allocated for more than one function Also contacts that are not assigned to the various functions can be used as general inputs outputs Inputs functions can be used as general inputs outputs Inputs XO to X5 are pulse catch inputs and can also be used for interrupt input Note2 The pulse output PWM output and high speed counter of the same channel cannot be used at the same time 12 9 Communication Specifications Computer link 1 1 communi cation 1 N communi cation General purpose serial communication 1 1 communi cation Note1 9 1 N communi cation PC PLC link MODBUS RTU 1 1 communi cation RS232C RS485 RS232C RS485 ae RS232C Target AFPG 801 oe AFPG 802 AFPG 806 Half duplex communi cation it Commu nication method AFPG 803 AFPG 806 Two wire half duplex communi cation AFPG 801 AFPG 802 AFPG 806 Half duplex communi cation AFPG 803 AFPG 806 Two wire half duplex communi cation AFPG 801 AFPG 802 AFPG 803 AFPG 806 Token bus Floating master AFPG 801 AFPG 802 AFPG 806 Half duplex communi cation 1 N communi cation RS485 AFPG 803 AFPG 806 Two wire half duplex communi cation Note1 Although it has adequate tolerance to noise it is recommendable to make the user program to execute retransmission in order to improve reliability of the communi
10. c ccsscsecescssssseeeseceenseeeseoeesseeeseoeenseeesees 9 3 10 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting ccsssceeseseeeseneeeeneeeeeneeeeaes 10 1 10 1 Sef Diagnostic TUNCTION aiii a Ea aa a aE A e aA EAE 10 2 10 2 TROUDIESHOOUING siaaa aa aaa aaa AASE aaa LGA 10 3 11 Precautions During PrograMMiINng cccssccseseeeseeeeeeeeseenseeeeeeeneeenees 11 1 111 Use ot Duplicated OUIDUT iiinn tainted eure eaten anes 11 2 WELZ Handing BCD Data isisa aa a a N ae aa aaaea 11 4 11 3 Handling Index Registers sssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn mnnn 11 5 114 Operation Errors sein a coc ueateeewaniaes auaeteceamien tee 11 7 11 5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method ccccccsssseeeseesseeseesseeeeeeneessoees 11 9 11 6 Precautions for Programming cccscscccseesseeesesseeeeenseeseenseeeeeeaeeeeeenseesoenseeseonseessonas 11 13 11 7 Rewrite Function During RUN cc ccccessesseeseesseeseenseeeeesseeseenseeseenseesoenseeeoenseeesoess 11 14 11 8 Processing During Forced Input and Output 0 cceeeteeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseeeeeneees 11 19 12 SHECHICALIONS 2cccscecsces testes aaaea Sa 12 1 12 1 Table Of Specifications wacichicecenteiexeccntesesecctetescccdeesteattsneesanavaeweastssdscctuuedssfeteaiwacdewetsachs 12 2 122 VO NO ANOANO Micia a aai 12 12 12 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants cccceseceseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseeeseeeneeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeas 12 14 13 DIMENSION
11. ee Read rit Descriptions ing When the state of installation of an FP expansion I O unit has changed since the power was turned on the bit corresponding to the unit No will turn on Monitor using binary display 15 11 f 3 2 1 0 Bit No 3 2 1 0 Unit No on 1 error off 0 normal A N A One shift out hexadecimal digit is stored in bit positions 0 to 3 when the data shift instruction F105 BSR or F106 BSL is executed The value can be read and written by executing FO MV instruction i ing N A N A The divided remainder 16 bit is stored in DT90015 when the division instruction F32 or F52 B instruction is executed The A A divided remainder 32 bit is stored in DT90015 and DT90016 when the division instruction F33 D or F53 DB is executed The value can be read and written by A A executing FO MV instruction After commencing operation the address where the first operation error occurred is stored Monitor the address using decimal display The address where an operation error occurred is stored Each time an error occurs the new address overwrites the previous A JA address At the beginning of a scan the address is 0 Monitor the address using decimal display The data stored here is increased by one every 2 5 ms HO to HFFFF Difference between the values of the two A N A points absolute value x 2 5 ms Elapsed time between the two points The data stored here is increased by one ev
12. sena data commanicatoni mode No 410 for COM1 port No 411 for COM2 port unit number settings Click on M _ and select a unit number from 1 to 99 Note With a C NET adapter a maximum of 32 units stations can be specified 7 30 Connection with external devices AFPG803 Connection diagram Wiring should extend from one unit to the next Never run two wires from a single unit to two other units Correct wiring OU NN Incorrect wiring X FP gt side 5 pin terminal Pinname Signalname Abbre Tansmissionine1o Transmission ine 2 E Terminai station setting E To external device with RS485 port To extemal device with RS485 port With 1 N communication the various RS485 devices are connected using twisted pair cables The and signals of transmission line 1 and transmission line 2 are connected inside the communication cassette and either port may be used as COM1 port Setting of terminal station In the PLC that serves as the final unit terminal station the transmission line and the E terminal should be shorted FPX FPX FPX FPX I l I l i l ll Il J A BBE B B BE JE ete aaa DIODOS ooga a iil n i JL n KE i i ransmission tine ransmission line ransmission tine To convertion adapter mi aa gt Ga ln a ja of computer connection Short the transmission line and the E terminal in the final unit te
13. DT90086 a nae calli Indicates the startup condition of the step ladder process When the process starts up DT90087 Step ladder process the bit corresponding to the process number 432 to 447 i Step ladder process D pea 448 to 463 2 Monitor using binary display DT90089 Step ladder process 464 to 479 A A Step ladder process Ple gt DT90090 1 F 3 0 Bit No 11 Seu To AaS oroo o o 1 Step ladder process 5 7 3 0 Process No DT90091 D78091 496 to 511 1 Executing 0 Not executing DT90092 ed ae ccc A programming tool software can be used to DT90093 Step ladder process itedat 528 to 543 E a Step ladder process aie 544 to 559 Step ladder process shi 560 to 575 Step ladder process ii 576 to 591 Step ladder process ROSS 592 to 607 14 26 A Available N A Not available Register _ Read Writ Descriptions i No ing ing Step ladder process ee 608 to 623 Step ladder process DT90099 624 to 639 Step ladder process DT90100 640 to 655 Step ladder process A 656 to 671 Step ladder process eta 672 to 687 Step ladder process DT90103 688 to 703 Step ladder process DT90104 704 to 719 Step ladder process DT90105 720 to 735 Step ladder process Indicates the startup condition of the step DT90106 736 to 751 ladder process When the process starts up DT90107 Step ladder process eh di h b 752 to 767 tne bit oo Ing to the process numbe
14. Direct sunlight Sudden temperature changes causing condensation Inflammable or corrosive gas Excessive airborne dust metal particles or saline matter Benzine paint thinner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda Direct vibration shock or direct drop of water Influence from power transmission lines high voltage equipment power cables power equipment radio transmitters or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges 100mm or more Static electricity Do not touch connector pins directly to prevent static electricity from causing damage Always rid yourself of any static electricity before handling this product Power supplies Twist the wires of the power supply The unit has sufficient noise immunity against the noise generated on the power line However it is recommended to take measures for reducing noise such as using a isolating transformer before supplying the power Allocate an independent wiring for each power supplying line input output device and operating device If using a power supply without a protective circuit power should be supplied through a protective element such as a fuse Be sure to supply power to a control and an expansion units from a single power supply Turning on off of the power of all the units must be conducted simultaneously Power supply sequence In order to protect the power supply sequence make sure to
15. Do not set input XO as high speed High speed counter onei operation mode settings X0 to X2 CH1 Do not set input X1 as high speed counter Do not set input X1 as high speed counter Incremental input X1 Incremental input X1 Reset input X2 Decremental input X1 Decremental input X1 Reset input X2 Do not set input X3 as high speed counter Two phase input X3 X4 Two phase input X3 X4 Reset input X5 Incremental input X3 Incremental input X3 Reset input X5 Decremental input X5 CH2 Decremental input X5 Reset input X5 Incremental decremental input X3 X4 Incremental decremental input X3 X4 Reset input X5 Incremental decremental control X3 X4 Incremental decremental control X3 X4 Reset input X5 CH2 Do not set input X3 as high speed High speed counter counter operation mode settings X3 to X5 HC3 Does not set input X4 as high speed counter Does not set input X4 as high speed counter Incremental input X4 Incremental input X4 Reset input X5 Decremental input X4 Decremental input X4 Reset input X5 14 6 No Name eerie Descriptions value l XO X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 Pulse catch input Not set settings Specify the input contacts used as pulse catch input XO X1 X2 X3 X4 XS X6 XI Specify the input contacts used as interrupt input Interrupt input Not set settings XO X1 X2 X3 X4 XS X6 XI Speci
16. F1 Pulse output control instruction FO e This instruction is used for resetting the built in high speed counter stopping the pulse output and setting and resetting the near home input e Specify this FO MV instruction together with special data register DT90052 e Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Example 1 Enable the near home input during home return operations and begin deceleration In case of CHO x3 HDF FO MV H 10 DT90052 T Fo Mv H o DT90052 In these programs the near home input is enabled in step 1 and 0 is entered just after In case of CH2 that in step 2 to perform the preset operations FO MV H2000 oT90052 j HDF Fo mv H2010 DT90052 Example 2 Performing a forced stop of the pulse output In case of CHO area may be different from the input counting value of the motor side if the forced stop is executed by these programs HDF HH Fo MV H8 DT900532 The output counting value of the elapsed value Fo MV HO DT90053 In case of CH2 FO MV H2000 DT90052 J DF Fo MV H2008 DT90052 6 22 yg Key Point High speed counter pulse output control flag area of FP 15 12 11 8 7 4 3 DT90052 Channel specification HO H2 CHO CH2 Near home input 0 OFF 1 ON Pulse output 0 Continue 1 Stop Note Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Software reset 0 No 1 Yes Elapsed
17. F373 16 bit data DTR S D If the data in the 16 bit area P373 revision PDTR specified by S has changed detection since the previous execution internal relay R9009 carry flag will turn on D is used to store the data of the previous execution F374 32 bit data DDTR S D If the data in the 32 bit area P374 revision PDDTR specified by S 1 S has changed detection since the previous execution internal relay R9009 carry flag will turn on D 1 D is used to store the data of the previous execution Index register bank processing instructions Setting the SETB index register PSETB bank number Changing the CHGB n Index register 10 to ID bank index register PCHGB number change over with bank number remembering preceding bank Index register 10 to ID bank number change over number Changes index register 10 to ID bank number back to the bank before F411 CHGB P411 PCHGB instruction Restoring the POPB index register PPOPB bank number File register bank processing instructions F414 Setting the file n P414 register bank number Changing the n File register bank number change file register over with remembering preceding File register bank number change over bank number bank number Restoring the Changes file register bank number file register back to the bank before F415 bank number CBFL P415 PCBEFL instruction Available X Not available Not available partially 1
18. FPG XY64D2T FPG XY64D2P Input 32 points Transistor output 32 points Front view GE DIN rail attachment LED display selection switch Switches between the input 32 points and output 32 points of the LED display Input connector 40 pins Output connector 40 pins Input and Output indicator LEDs FP expansion connector This expansion connector is used to connect the dedicated unit for FP Expansion hook This hook is used to secure expansion unit DIN hook This lever enables the expansion unit to attach to a DIN rail at a touch The lever is also used for installation on the mounting plate slim 30 type Product No AFP0811 3 5 Input specifications po tem i esecription Input points per common 32 points common Either the positive or negative of input power supply can be connected to common terminal Transistor output specifications 24 V CD External power Voltage 21 6 to 26 4 V DC aera ip 21810264VDC Surge absorber Zener diode Operating mode indicator LED display Short circuit protection Short circuit prevention Thermal protection 3 6 Limitations on number of simultaneous on points Keep the number of points which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature Input at 24 VDC Output at 24 VDC and 26 4 V DC and 26 4 Y DC 32 32 29 agaaa Number of Number of points per points per co
19. Note9 The MEWTOCOL master function MODBUS RTU master function and general purpose serial communication function at the TOOL port is available only for the FP 32k type 12 11 12 2 I O No Allocation FP control unit Unit type Allocation points I O No Input 16 points XO to XF FPG C32 Output 16 points YO to YF l Input 16 points XO to XF PNP FPG C2 Input 16 points XO to XF Rel FPG C24 dais a Output 8 points YO to Y7 I O No of FP expansion unit for left side expansion e O Numbers do not need to be set as I O allocation is performed automatically by the PLC when an expansion I O unit is added e The I O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location Alloca Expansio Expansio tion n unit 1 n unit 2 points Slot 0 Slot 1 Control unit NPN Expansio n unit 3 Slot 2 Expansion unit 4 Slot 3 Unit type FP x expan sion unit FPG XY64D2T FPG XY64D2P Input 32 points Output 32 points X100 to X11F X180 to X260 to X19F X27F X340 to X35F Input 1 axis type 16 points 1st axis X10F X18F X26F X34F ere a 16 points Y10F Y18F Y26F Y34F positioning Input X10F X18F X26F X34F FPG PP24 X11F X19F X27F X35F Y10F Y18F Y26F Y34F Y11F Y19F Y27F Y35F FPG PP22 FP expan ded data FPG EM1 Input Battery X100 to X180 to X260 to X340 to memory 16 points error X10F X18F X26F X34F unit FP FPG SL X17F X25F X33F X41F Y17F Y25
20. Offline l4 s Setting s Scale Monitor a Run Pro u lt gt hie gt lt C NM Z Ready 1 Sampling at regular time intervals 1 Register the bit word device to be monitored by the time chart monitor function of FPWIN GR 2 Specify the sampling configurations Set the mode of the sampling configurations to Trace Set the sampling rate time Sampling Configurations Cancel Sampling Times fi OOO Times 100 1000 Ta Help Sampling Rate Even SMPL instruction fi On mec 10 30000 Delay Times i 00 Times 1 999 3 Start monitoring Start with the Fiil button 2 Sampling by instruction 1 Register the bit word device to be monitored by the time chart monitor function of FPWIN GR 2 Specify the sampling configurations Set the mode of the sampling configurations to Trace Set the sampling rate time to 0 Cancel Sampling Times 1000 Times 100 1000 pling Help m Sampling Rate gocccscsececeececesccsosocecesecocsesoscseecesessoseseeg o Co x Delay Times 100 Times 1 999 3 Read data by trigger 1 Stop sampling by stopping monitoring the trace that has been started in the above procedure 1 or 2 on the time chart display of FPWIN GR The data will be indicated in the time chart Stop monitoring Stop with the weil button stop by the Trigger Break in the menu or stop by the
21. Panasonic PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER FPE User s Manual ARCT1F333E 11 2013 7 panasonic net id pidsx global Safety Precautions Observe the following notices to ensure personal safety or to prevent accidents To ensure that you use this product correctly read this User s Manual thoroughly before use Make sure that you fully understand the product and information on safety This manual uses two safety flags to indicate different levels of danger WARNING If critical situations that could lead to user s death or serious injury is assumed by mishandling of the product Always take precautions to ensure the overall safety of your system so that the whole system remains safe in the event of failure of this product or other external factor Do not use this product in areas with inflammable gas It could lead to an explosion Exposing this product to excessive heat or open flames could cause damage to the lithium battery or other electronic parts Battery may explode if mistreated Do not recharge disassemble or dispose of fire CAUTION If critical situations that could lead to user s injury or only property damage is assumed by mishandling of the product To prevent excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation use this product at the values less than the maximum of the characteristics and performance that are assured in these specifications Do not dismantle or remodel the product It could cause excessive ex
22. Parity da Computer Link Chan Bit Roo Help JPL Link Terminator ER HMOODBUS ATU i Header st not exist F dd Hodila Baudrate s200 bps z Hattie Starting address tor data recerved ot oO u serial data communication made H ees Hoti Butter capacity setting tor date received of 20a 0 2048 senal data communication mode fa Reference lt MODBUS RTU Specifications gt It can be downloaded from our website http industrial panasonic com ac e dl_center manual 1 14 Sample program for MODBUS master Use the F145 SEND Data send or F146 RECV Data receive instruction to use the MODBUS master function Sets the communication port to COM1 the remote unit No to 01 and No of processing words to 2 in the DT100 and DT101 Clear the WRO to send the write command first Clear the write data DT50 and DT51 Set the read data DT60 and DT61 R9013 H Fo mv H2 DT100 J Fo MV H1001 DT101 e J i Note 1 Fo MV HO wRo F1DMV HO DT50 J F1 DMV _ HFFFFFFFF DT60 J R1 is the transmission condition of write command transmission condition and 31 R2 is the transmission condition of read command T R9044 RO R1 Note 2 ag RO R2 Compares the write data DT50 and DT51 with the read data DT60 and DT61 before 39 sending the write command and updates the write data if they are matched R1 _ F61DCMP DT50 DT60 R1 R900B sH H BROS
23. a 5 q 17 5 30 30 30 30 25 25 25 12 5 When using the flat type mounting plate AFP0804 Use M4 size pan head screws for attachment of the slim type mounting plate and install according to the dimensions shown below Raise the expansion hooks on the top and bottom of the unit Align the expansion hooks with the mounting plate and press the hooks on the top and bottom Installation 1 3 mad Note The flat type mounting plate AFP0804 should be used only with the control unit as a stand alone unit It should not be used when the control unit is being used in combination with an FPO expansion unit or FP expansion unit 5 7 5 2 Wiring of Power Supply 5 2 1 Wiring of Power Supply Use the power supply cable provided as an accessory to supply power to the unit Power supply cable AFPG805 Green Function earth Blue 0 V Power supply cable Power supply wiring for the unit Use the power supply cable Product No AFPG805 that comes with the unit to connect the power supply Brown 24V DC Blue OV Green Function earth Power supply wire To minimize adverse effects from noise twist the brown and blue wires of the power supply cable Power supply type e To protect the system against erroneous voltage from the power supply line use an insulated power supply with an internal protective circuit e The regulator on the unit is a non insulated type e If using a power supp
24. interval INT24 p KO periodical interrupt is not used A NA K1 to K3000 0 5ms to 1 5s or 10ms to 30s DT90028 Notused CNA NAA DT90029 Notused CNA NAA DT90030 DT90031 The contents of the specified message Data DT90032 length are stored in these special data A N A DT90033 registers when F149 MSG instruction is DT90025 15 11 7 3 O BitNo DT90034 executed DT90035 DT90036 Notused CNA NAA Note Scan time display is only possible in RUN mode and shows the operation cycle time In PROG mode the scan time for the operation is not displayed The maximum and minimum values are cleared each time the mode is switched from RUN to PROG DT90028 DT90029 DT90030_ DT90031 DT90032 DT90033 DT90034 DT90035_ DT90036_ 14 21 A Available N A Not available No escriptions Fiona Operation auxiliary The number of data that match the searched DT90037 register for search data is stored here when F96 SRC instruction F96 SRC instruction is executed Operation auxiliary The position of the first matching data is DT90038 register for search stored here when an F96 SRC instruction is A N A instruction F96 SRC executed DT90039 Notused sSNA NAA Potentiometer The potentiometer value KO to K1000 is volume input VO stored here This value can be used in analog timers and other applications by using the DT90041 Potentiometer program to read this value to a dat
25. irae Goes out when no data is being received In case of 1 channel RS232C1 type lights when the RS signal is ON data monitor Goes out when no data is being received Flashes while data is being received Received In case of 1 channel RS232C1 type lights when the CS signal data monitor Goes out when no data is being received Tool port RS232C This port is used to connect a programming tool A commercial mini DIN 5 pin connector is used for the Tool port on the control unit Abbreviation Signal direction Signal Ground ee Transmitted Data Unit gt External device Not used ee 5V 5V____ Unit gt External device SG SD 5V SG sD I 3 Received Data RD Unit e External device _ ed I e The followings are the default settings set when the unit is shipped from the factory The system register should be used to change these Baud rate 9600 bps Character bit 8 bit Parity check Odd parity Stop bit length 1 bit Input connector Input indicator LEDs Output connector 2 3 Output indicator LEDs Q Analog potentiometer analog dial excluding the type of which part No and product No ends in TM Turning this dial changes the values of special data register DT90040 and DT90041 within the range of KO to K1000 It can be used for analog timers and other applications Power supply connector 24V DC Supply 24V DC It is connected using the pow
26. lo s3 and the result is stored in DT9037 and DT9038 F97 32 bit table data DSRC S1 The data of S1 1 S1 is searched 11 f Data shift instructions P99 data between D1 and D2 that are and compress PCMP 0 are compressed and shifted in order toward D2 D n Shifts the n bits of D to the right Data table shift out CMPR D1 Transfer D2 to D3 Any parts of and compress D2 the data between D1 and D2 that 7 D3 are 0 are compressed and shifted in order toward D2 F99 Data table shift in CMPW S D1 Transfer S to D1 Any parts of the Ea F100 Right shift of P100 multiple bits n bits in a 16 bit data Left shift of multiple SHL bits n bits in a 16 PSHL bit data Right shift of n bits DSHR in a 32 bit data PDSHR Left shift of n bits in DSHL a 32 bit data PDSHL D n Shifts the n bits of D to the left D n Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data area specified by D 1 D to the right D n Shifts the n bits of the 32 bit data area specified by D 1 D to the left L L L L L L BES key key S OQ i i ol E ka i i i l a E j j J F k NO Right shift of one BSR Shifts the one digit of data of D to hexadecimal digit 4 PBSR the right bit F106 Left shift of one BSL Shifts the one digit of data of D to P106 hexadecimal digit PBSL the left 4 bit F108 R
27. lt For error code is 20 or higher gt e Condition A self diagnostic error other than a syntax error has occurred e Operation 1 Use the programming tool in PROG mode to clear the error Using FPWIN GR Click on the Clear Error button in the Status display dialog box Error code 43 and higher can be cleared e In the PROG mode the power supply can be turned off and then on again to clear the error but all of the contents of the operation memory except hold type data are cleared e An error can also be cleared by executing a self diagnostic error set instruction F148 ERR Key Point When an operation error error code 45 occurs the address at which the error occurred is stored in special data registers DT90017 and DT90018 If this happens click on the Operation Err button in the Status display dialog box and confirm the address at which the error occurred before cancelling the error 10 2 2 If ERROR ALARM LED is ON Condition The system watchdog timer has been activated and the operation of PLC has been activated Procedure 1 Set the mode selector of PLC from RUN to PROG mode and turn the power off and then on e f the ERROR ALARM LED is turned on again there is probably an abnormality in the FP control unit Please contact your dealer e f the ERROR ALARM LED is flashed go to chapter 8 2 1 Procedure 2 Set the mode selector from PROG to RUN mode e f the ERROR ALARM LED is turned on the
28. 1 5Hzto9 8kHz K1 to K9800 unit Hz Max error near 9 8 KHZ approx 0 9 kHz Set K1 to specify 1 5 Hz 1 48Hzto100kHz K48 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 KHz approx 3 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz K191 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 KHz approx 0 8 kHz Initial speed Set 30 kHz or less 3 Aceleration deceleration time ms lt K constant gt With 30 steps K30 to K32760 Specify by 30 steps With 60 steps K60 to K32760 Specify by 60 steps 4 Target value lt K constant gt K 2147483648 to K2147483647 5 When the time is not specified in 30 ms units nor 60 ms units it will be automatically corrected to the multiple value larger value of 30 ms or 60 ms 6 When the frequency is set to 50Hz or higher the duty must be set to 1 4 25 6 26 Sample program Incremental Position Control Operation Plus Direction When X8 turns on the pulse is output from CW output YO of the specified channel CHO O V 24 V DC FPE f Start input Pulse output CW m mo Motor driver side 10000 pulses side WAAAY AAAS Program xB R903A R12 R10 e ets eet eae DF Positioning operation running R10 Rid R11 POES E E E DF Hr Positioning operation start R11 Positioning data table Fi DMV H1100 DT100 Control code H1100 Fi omv kso ori DT104 Fi omv Ks5000 oT 104 DT106 a
29. 6 53 XB ROSA RSOSC ROME R2F RH orie Sta Control Control Control T Positioning fram P41 to P2 Incase of RSO3A RS03C and R9OO4E are OFF if XB turns ON positioning is started Fram P1 to P2 start a a 1 heigo fag ag fag From P1 to P2 start 1 gt F1 DMV K 10000 DT 8 P2 axis Target position chO L F1 DMV KO DT 10 P2 axis Target position ch2 LFi75SPSH DT O KO J ata table faa inear interpolation REOSA R20 R2F R21 Positioning from P2 to P3 DF Qontrol flag From P1 to P2 start Pasitioning From F2 to P3 RaQ done start When R903A and R9030 turns OFF circular inter CH Outputting pulse polation positioning is R21 started From F2 to PS start R21 H F176SPCH DT60 KO J ROO4E Positioning from P3 to P4 Control flag alt When RAHME turns OFF positioning is started From P3 to P4 start 1 F1 DWV KO DT8 P4 X axis Target position cho Fi DMV K 10000 _ DT 10 P4 Y axis Target position ch2 F175SPSH DTO KO J R903 R22 R2F R23 oe oe D H Positioning from P4 to F1 oe From P3 to Pa Positioning From P4 to P1 R903C start start When R903A and R903C tums OFF circular interpolation positioning is Contral flag CH2 R23 started R23 K LFi76SPCH DT40 KO Positioning done R904E R23 R2F R2F is controlled by R904E eor which are able to confirm Control flag From P4 to P1 Positioning whether t
30. Adjust timing by ladder program e When computer link mode Adjust timing by SYS1 instruction 2 With other PLC e When PC PLC link mode Not used e When general communication mode Adjust timing by ladder program 3 With computer e Adjust timing by wait instruction system 4 With other equipment s e Confirm the time after receiving data until a transmission starts with makers e KT temperature controller and inverters VF 7E and VF 8X can be used without any adjustment as the time taken up to a response is more than 1 ms e With GT series or GV series programmable display set the transmission delay time communication parameter to 1 ms or more 7 13 7 3 Installation and Wiring 7 3 1 Installation of Communication Cassette 1 Turn off the power supply to the control unit before installing the communication cassette 2 Remove cover using screwdriver 3 Install communication cassette Communication cassette 4 Plug in communication connector 7 14 7 3 2 Wiring Accessory communication connector Suitable wire The communication cassette is supplied with a communication connector which has a screw type terminal block Use the following items for wiring Accessory communication connector If additional connectors are needed use the communication connector manufactured by Phoenix Contact Phoenix Contact product ID mumper ct Bs Model No Product No MC1 5 5 ST 3 5 1840395 Suitable
31. DT70 to DT71 Center position Specify the Y coordinate of the center position when Y axis executing the circular interpolation of P2 to P3 Operation result Parameters calculated due to instruction execution are P2 to P3 Work area for circular DT72 to DT73 interpolation storage area stored Key Point e With this program because the next action that follows circular interpolation control is linear interpolation the control code is designated with the stop mode e The rotation direction during circular interpolation is the same direction for both P2 to P3 and P4 to P1 Designate the control code rotation direction with from CHO CW direction to CH2 CW direction e Use the circular interpolation control flag R904E to verify completion of the circular interpolation action 6 52 Program R9010 F1 Always ON F1 F1 F1 R9010 m F1 Always ON F1 F1 L F1 F4 F1 R9010 L F1 Always ON F1 F1 F1 F1 L F1 DMV DMV DMV DMV DMV DMV DMV DMV DMV DMV DMV DMV DMV DMV DMV DMV H 1010 Control code K 2000 DT 2 Composite speed KO H 1010 Control code _DT2 Co ite speed KO Pi x axis KO F1 axis _K 5000 5 axis _K 5000 3 Y axis H 1110 Control code DT2 Composite speed K 10000 P3 X axis _K 10000 PS Y axis K 10000 Q X axis _K 5000 OQ Y axis DTO
32. F238 32 bit gray code DGBIN S D Converts the gray codes of S 1 S P238 gt binary data PDGBIN to binary data and the converted conversion result is stored in the D 1 D F240 Bit line to bit COLM S The values of bits 0 to 15 of S are P240 column PCOLM D stored in bit n of D to DC 15 conversion ae S D Converts the 32 bit binary data of PDGRY S 1 S to gray code and the ef Be ae ao elx Dx pp x Po ee i 2 ee J ASCII gt binary ATOB data conversion Bit column to bit LINE S Nn The values of bit n of S to S 15 ol line conversion PLINE D are stored in bits O to 15 of D En Binary data gt BTOA S1 Converts multiple binary data to ASCII S2 n multiple ASCII data 12 X X conversion D ES k S1 Converts multiple ASCII data to S2 n multiple binary data 12 x X D S1 Checks the ASCII data strings to be 10 gt S2 n used in F251 ATOB instruction ASCII data ACHK check Character strings instructions Comparing character EJ F257 P257 SCMP S1 These instructions compare two S2 specified character strings and output the judgment results to a special internal relay S1 These instructions couple one S2 D character string with another S D These instructions determine the number of characters in a character string S1 The specified character is searched S2 D in a character string S1 These instructions retrieve a
33. In the unit on the slave station an abnormality such as missing unit abnormal intelligent unit was detected FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the slave condition FP3 Check the contents of special data registers DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the slave condition Selection of operation status using system register28 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 The power supply for the expansion unit was turned on after the control unit Turn on the power supply for the expansion unit at the same time or before the control unit is turned on The voltage of the backup battery lowered or the backup battery of control unit is not installed Check the installation of the backup battery and then replace battery if necessary By setting the system register 4 you can disregard this self diagnostic error FPS I V lt O ai A LL LL A A A A A A A A A A A E57 Opera tion status MEWNET F terminal station error MEWNET F I O update synchro nous error Multi CPU I O regis tration error CPU2 only IC memory card back up battery error IC memory card back up battery error Incompat ible IC memory card error No unit for the Conti configu nues ration Self diagnostic Stop error set by F14
34. O O bcon acon acontact b contact tact tact Stepping motor side side BB nnn i mmm Moving table Stepping motor driver Output terminal Common CW input Pulse output CW Common u CCW input Pulse output CCW Ee Power RIR2R1R2 supply Note DC Note When the stepping motor input is a 5 V optical coupler type connect a resister of 2 kQ 1 2 W to R1 and connect a resistor of 2 kQ 1 2 W 470 Q 2 W to R2 Table of I O allocation Positioning in progress X9 _ Positioning start signal R10 _ Positioning in progress XA _ Home retur start signal R11 _ Positioning operation start XB JOG start signal R12 _ Positioning done pulse _ 6 24 6 4 5 Positioning Control Instruction F171 Trapezoidal Control Common to Transistor type e This instruction automatically performs trapezoidal control according to the specified data table x8 DF F1 DMV H1100 DT100 F1 DMV K500 DT102 F1 DMV K5000 DT104 Pulses are generated from output YO at an initial speed of 500 Hz a maximum speed of 5000 Hz an acceleration deceleration time of 300 ms and a movement amount of 10000 pulses When this program runs the positioning data table and Fi DMV K10000 DT108 l the pulse output diagram will be as shown below F1 DMV KO DT110 Fi DMV K300 DTi06 F171 SPDH DT100 KO Positioning data table 3 4 DT106
35. PWM output is output from the specified output in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S 14 50 FP2SH FP10SH F174 Pulse output Selectable data table control peration S n Outputs the pulses from the specified channel according to the data table specified by S Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated data table so that the path to the target position forms an arc Performs the home return F176 Pulse output Circular interpolation according to the specified data F177 Pulse output Home return table F178 Input pulse 1 2 D Measures the number of pulses measurement and cycle of pulses to be input No of pulses to the high speed counter of the cycle for input specified channel pulses F175 Pulse output S n Pulses are output from channel Linear in accordance with the interpolation designated data table so that the path to the target position forms a straight line 14 51 see Operand Description a lean p p TE High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FPX FP X F167 F171 F172 F173 F174 High speed counter and Pulse output controls Change and read of the elapsed value of high speed counter and Pulse output Target value much on with channel specification Target value much off with channel specification Pulse output with channel specification Trapezoidal control and home return Pu
36. Procedure 2 Check if the transmission cables are within the specifications range At this point make sure all of the cables in the link are of the same type and that multiple types of cables are not being used e Do not designate any unit other than those at both ends of the network as a terminal station gt fa Reference For the specifications range of the transmission cables refer to lt 7 3 3 Selection of Transmission Cables gt Procedure 3 Check that link areas do not overlap 10 2 8 No Communication is Available through RS232C Condition No communication with 1 channel type RS232C cassette Procedure 1 Check if the CS signal is on When the COM 2 R of the communication cassette LED does not light the CS signal is not on If the three wire type is used connect the RS signal and the CS signal of the communication cassette and turn the CS signal on A Reference lt 7 1 2 Types of Communication Cassette gt 10 8 Chapter 11 Precautions During Programming 11 1 Use of Duplicated Output 11 1 1 Duplicated Output What is duplicated output e Duplicated output refers to repeatedly specifying the same output in a sequence program e f the same output is specified for the OT and KP instructions it is considered to be duplicated output Even if the same output is used for multiple instructions such as the SET RST instruction or high level instruction such as data transfer it is not r
37. RTD unit CH1 3 5 X30 to X3F X50 to X5F X70 to X7F Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F converter unit FPO A04 chO 2 Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F ch1 3 Y30 to Y3F Y50 to YSF Y70 to Y7F unit e The data of each channel for FPO A D converter unit FPO A80 FPO thermocouple unit FPO TC4 FP0 TC8 FPO RTD unit FPO RTD6 FPO D A converter unit FPO A04V P0 A041l is switched and read write using a program that includes the flag for switching converted data e Regarding FPO CC Link slave unit please refer to the exclusive manual 12 13 FP x 12k type Number of points and range of memory area 12 3 Relays Memory Areas and Constants available for use C32T C32TTM External input X ne Po F a ee Turns on or off based on external input External output SRRY o aie F We Hive Externally outputs on or off state Internal relay 2 R 1568 points RO to R97F on UN OMON Link relay L 1024 points LO to R97F This relay is a shared relay used for PLC link Note2 This goes on when the timer reaches the H ote nee 1 1024 points TO to T1007 C1008 to 1023 o specified time It corresponds to the timer Counter C number Special internal relay 32 words External input WX WXO to WX31 Note1 32 words External output WYO to WY WY31 This goes on when the timer i
38. S r Set the inverter operation signal YO RI034 R100 TO R102 SS ee Positioning done pulse 0 5 s i o lM l i l jot s type timer me e e e e e e e o e e e Positioning operations with a double speed inverter Wiring example FP 2 Input termial Encoder input Conveyor Operation start Ouput terminal Inverter operation Inverter high speed ag yor O d Encoder Ly Inverter Operation Stop Operation chart Speed 0 4500 5000 Number of pulse 1 e Fast Slow I O allocation R100 _ Positioning operation running RO Positioning operation start R102 Arrival at deceleration point RO Positioning done pulse R900C Comparison instruction lt flag gt R903A High speed counter CHO control flag Program When X5 is turned on YO and Y1 turn on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT90044 and DT90045 reaches K4500 Y1 turns off and the conveyor begins decelerating When the elapsed value reaches K5000 YO turns off and the conveyor stops AO R3034 A103 R100 H Fi omv Ko F167 HC1R KO K 5000 i Sets Sets high speed counter CHO counter CHO s 5000 YO goes YO goes off When When elapsed value reaches 5000 value reache R101 R100 F61 DCMP K 4500 R100 Rg00C R102 DT90044 J i ee f Positioning operations start J fz Resets elapsed value of
39. S2 Converts the ASCII code specified by F78 ASCII code DABI P78 32 bit binary PDABI D S1 and S2 to 32 bits of binary data 11 data and stores it in D 1 D 16 bit binary BCD S D Converts the 16 bits of binary data data 4 digit PBCD BCD data specified by S to four digits of BCD data and stores it in D Example K100 gt H100 BIN S D Converts the four digits of BCD data F81 4 digit BCD P81 data 16 bit PBIN specified by S to 16 bits of binary data binary data and stores it in D Example H100 K100 F82 32 bit binary DBCD S D Converts the 32 bits of binary data P82 data gt 8 digit PDBCD specified by S 1 S to eight digits of BCD data BCD data and stores it in D 1 D F83 8 digit BCD DBIN S D Converts the eight digits of BCD data P83 data 32 bit PDBIN specified by S 1 S to 32 bits of binary 7 binary data data and stores it in D 1 D F84 16 bit data INV Inverts each bit of data of D P84 invert com PINV plement of 1 F85 16 bit data P85 complement of 2 F86 32 bit data P86 complement of 2 P87 absolute PABS P88 absolute PDABS F89 16 bit data EXT Inverts each bit of data of D and adds 1 inverts the sign Inverts each bit of data of D 1 D and adds 1 inverts the sign 3 8 6 8 Gives the absolute value of the data of D Gives the absolute value of the data of D 1 D Extends the 16 bits of data i
40. S2 D specified number of characters from the right side of the character string strings P258 coupling Number of LEN characters in a character string F260 Search for SSRC P260 character string Retrieving data from character strings right side Retrieving data from character strings left side Retrieving a character string from a character string RIGHT LEFT These instructions retrieve a specified number of characters from the left side of the character string S1 S2 D These instructions retrieve a character string consisting of a specified number of characters from the specified position in the character string These instructions write a specified number of characters from a character string to a specified position in the character string A specified number of characters in a character string are rewritten starting from a specified position in the character string O Available Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FPX 32k type 2 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 3 This instruction is available for FP Ver 3 10 or later F264 P264 Writing a character string to a character string Replacing character strings 14 54 Ope T W Boolean P Description Ta rand FP2SH FP10SH Integer type data processing instructions S1 S2 D S1 S2 D Maximum value word data 16 bit F270 P
41. This instruction is not available for FP10SH 2 This instruction is available for FP X V 1 20 or later and FP2 32k type 3 This instruction is available for FPO V2 1 or later 14 60 14 4 Table of Error codes Difference in ERROR display There are differences in the way errors are displayed depending on the model Model Display Display method FP FPO FPOR FP X ERROR ALARM Flashes continually lit Screen display Continually lit Error Confirmation When ERROR Turns ON When the ERROR on the control unit CPU unit turns on or flashes a self diagnostic error or syntax check error has occurred Confirm the contents of the error and take the appropriate steps Error Confirmation Method Procedure 1 Use the programming tool software to call up the error code By executing the STATUS DISPLAY the error code and content of error are displayed 2 Check the error contents in the table of error codes using the error code ascertained above Syntax check error This is an error detected by the total check function when there is a syntax error or incorrect setting written in the program When the mode selector is switched to the RUN mode the total check function automatically activates and eliminates the possibility of incorrect operation from syntax errors in the program When a syntax check error is detected ERROR turns on or flashes Operation will not begin even after switching to the RUN mode Remote
42. Tso master station scan time With the SYS1 instruction the link addition waiting time Twt in the above formula can be reduced Thus SYS1 can be used to minimize the increase in the transmission cycle time lt Programming example of SYS1 instruction gt SYS1 M PCLK1TO 100 Function Setting SYS1 to change the waiting time for a link to be added to the PC PLC link from the default value of 400 ms to 100 ms Keywords Setting for key word no 1 PCLK1TO Permissible range for key word no 2 10 to 400 10 ms to 400 ms Note Enter one space after M and then enter 12 characters to be aligned to the right If the second keyword is 2 digits put 2 spaces and if it is 3 digits put one space Note If there are any stations that have not been added to the link the setting should not be changed as long as a longer link transmission cycle time does not cause any problem e The SYS1 instruction should be executed at the beginning of the program at the rise of R9014 The same waiting time should be set for all linked PLCs e The waiting time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum scan time for any of the PLCs connected to the link e If a short waiting time has been set there may be PLCs that cannot be added to the link even if their power supply is on The shortest time that can be set is 10 ms 7 69 Error detection time for transmission assurance relays The power supply of any given PLC fails
43. however the contents of the operation memory except the hold type data will be cleared e An error can also be cleared by executing a self diagnostic error set instruction F148 e f the mode selector is set to RUN RUN will resume as soon as the error is cleared So if the cause of the error is not removed the error may seem not to be cleared 11 7 11 4 4 Points to Check in Program 1 Check if an extraordinarily large value or negative value was stored in the index register lt Example gt When a data register is modified using an index register RO H FO MV DTO 1oDTO In this case index register modifies the address of data register DTO If data in I0 is too large it will exceed the addressable range of the data register The last address of the data register is DT32764 so if the contents of I0 exceeds 32764 an operation error will occur The same is true when the contents of lO are a negative value 2 Is there any data which cannot be converted using BCD lt BIN data conversion lt Example gt When BCD to BIN conversion is attempted RO H F81 BIN DTO DT100 In this case if DTO contains a hexadecimal number with one of the digits A through F such as 12A4 conversion will be impossible and an operation error will result lt Example gt When BIN to BCD conversion is attempted RO H F80 BCD DT1 DT101 In this case if DT1 contains a negative value or a value greater than K9999 an operation erro
44. lt 191 Hz range 1 is selected If initial speed 2 191 Hz range 2 is selected 7 Number of acceleration deceleration steps 8 6 48 The system automatically calculates the number of acceleration decelaration steps in the range 0 to 60 steps If the oepration result is 0 pulses are output for the initial speed composite speed as is with no acceleration deceleration The number of acceleration deceleration steps is found using the formula acceleration deceleration time ms x component initial speed Hz Example With incremental initial speed 300 Hz max speed 5 kHz acceleration deceleration time 0 5 s CHO target value 1000 CH2 target value 50 CHO componet _300 1000_ _ 299 626 Hz initial speed 10002 502 l CH2 componet __300 x 50 initial speed 10 14901 hz CHO number of acceleration deceleration steps 500 x 10 x 299 626 147 8 amp gt 60 steps CH2 number of acceleration deceleration steps 500 x 10 x 14 981 7 4 7 steps Note Precaution for the specification of composite speed initial speed If each component speed initial speed of CHO and CH2 which is calculated using the following formula is not 1 5 kHz or higher the path may not be linear p gt 15V Ax2 Ay2 7 Ax X CH of which distance betwen the target value and the current value is short y CH of which distance betwen the target value and the current value is long When the frequency is set to 40H
45. memory area and constants modifier points MCR JP and LOOP Number of step ladders 1000 stages Number of subroutines 100 subroutines Number of interrupt 9 programs 8 external input points XO to X7 1 periodical interrupt point 0 5 programs ms to 30s 2A S i gt im E Instruction point 12 14 Number of points and range of memory area available for use C32T2 C23T2TM C32T C24R2 C32TTM C24R2TM C28P2 C28P2TM Decimal constants K 32 768 to K32 767 for 16 bit operation Integer type K K 2 147 483 648 to K2 147 483 647 for 32 bit operation Hexadecimal constants HO to HFFFF for 16 bit operation H HO to HFFFFFFFF for 32 bit operation F 1 175494 x 10 to F 3 402823 x 10 F 1 175494 x 10 to F 3 402823 x 10 Note1 The number of points noted above is the number reserved as the calculation memory The actual number of points available for use is determined by the hardware configuration Note2 If no battery is used only the fixed area is backed up counters 16 points C1008 to C1023 internal relays 128 points R900 to R97F data registers 55 words DT32710 to DT32764 Writing is available up to 10000 times Then the optional battery is used all area can be backed up Areas to be held and not held can be specified using the system registers If an area is held when the battery is not installed the value of data may be indefinite as it is not clea
46. the internal circuit may be damaged or destroyed If using a power supply without a protective circuit power should be supplied through a protective element such as a fuse Protection of output If current exceeding the rated control capacity is being supplied in the form of a motor lock current or a coil shorting in an electromagnetic device a protective element such as a fuse should be attached externally 9 20 5 7 Handling of Backup Battery 5 7 1 What Backup Battery Does Install an optional backup battery when the hold area is insufficient in the initial state or for using the clock calender function Areas backed up with the battery oe Hold area when battery Hold area when battery Classification ae is not installed is installed C1008 C1023 Elapsed value area menon 32k type R2480 R255F Step ladder Link relay Link register Bde Pate a acondecor for FP High capacity battery folder for FP Battery folder with a connector Purchase a commercial battery CR123A separately Hold areas or non hold areas can be specified arbitrarily by setting the system registers No 6 to No 13 using a programming tool All points can be also held AFPG804 AFPG807 Folder only 5 21 5 7 2 Settings of Battery Error Alarm and Hold Area Setting of the battery error alarm Setting the battery error alarm enables you to monitor the remaining backup battery level By default the battery err
47. using system register no 57 for PC PLC link 1 for FP 32k type only Sample setting No of units linked Setting contents 1st unit Unit no 1 is set 2nd unit Unit no 2 is set A largest unit no of 2 is set for each 1st unit Unit no 1 is set 2nd unit Unit no 2 is set 3rd unit Unit no 3 is set Ath unit Unit no 4 is set A largest unit no of 4 is set for each Nth unit Unit no n is set A largest unit no of n is set for each Note e Unit numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively starting from 1 with no breaks between them If there is a missing unit number the transmission time will be longer e For all PLCs which are linked the same value should be set for the largest unit number e f there are fewer than 16 units linked and the largest unit number has not been set default 16 or the largest unit number has been set but the unit number settings are not consecutive or the unit number settings are consecutive but there is a unit for which the power supply has not been turned on the response time for the PC PLC link the link transmission cycle will be longer P Reference lt 7 6 5 PC PLC Link Response Time gt Setting PC PLC link switching flag For FPE 32k type only PC PLC link switching flag can be set using system register no 46 If it is set to O default value the first half of the link relays and registers are used If it is set to 1 the second half of the link re
48. 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 15 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 16 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode 14 15 WR907 Relay No Description Turns on when Unit No 1 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 1 is in the PROG mode R9070 R9071 Turns on when Unit No 2 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 2 is in the PROG mode Names a Turns on when Unit No 3 Is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 3 is in the PROG mode oe Turns on when Unit No 4 Is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 4 is in the PROG mode oi Turns on when Unit No 5 Is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 5 is in the PROG mode PI Turns on when Unit No 6 Is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 6 is in the PROG mode Unit Turns on when Unit No 7 Is in the RUN mode No 7 Turns off when Unit No 7 is in the PROG mode MEWNET WO Turns on when Unit No 8 Is in the RUN mode PC PLC link 0 Turns off when Unit No 8 is in the PROG mode operation Turns on when Unit No 9 is in the RUN mode mode relay Turns off when Unit No 9 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 10 Is in the RUN
49. 2 Leading XY RTCLRE Connects a Form A normally open contact Al edge OR itl in parallel only for one scan when the 2 x x ol a olo leading edge of the trigger is detected 2 Trailing E Connects a Form A normally open contact Al edge OR l in parallel only for one scan when the 2 xixi ol i olo trailing edge of the trigger is detected 2 Leading P Outputs the operated result to the specified edge out Ka output only for one scan when leading edge ol E of the trigger is detected for pulse relay Trailing a Outputs the operated result to the specified edge out OTL i output only for one scan when trailing edge x ox of the trigger is detected for pulse relay Aeris YRLE Inverts the output condition on off each tve ul A time the leading edge of the trigger is x x detected Connects the multiple instruction blocks oo EET E e BHS Connects the multiple instruction blocks in Ho H parallel Available X Not available Not available partially The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models 2 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later and FP Ver 3 10 or later 3 In the FP2 FP2SH 10SH when using X1280 Y1280 R1120 special internal relay included L1280 T256 C256 or anything beyond for the ST ST OT AN AN OR and OR instructions the number of steps is shown in parentheses Also in the FR2 FP2SH FP10SH when a relay number has an index mo
50. 222 130 822 0 270 140 853 0 323 150 878 0 400 Note Total precision of AD converter in which microcomputer is built 5LSB Precision of thermister is not included in the above digital values Conversion program using scaling instruction F282 e Appropriate data which interpolated from nonlinear data can be obtained by creating converted digital values and temperature data as a data table and executing the scaling instruction F282 DT90040 Special data register Digital value after thermister input conversion H F282 DT90040 DTO DT100 DTO Beginning of data table DT100 Converted data temperature Example of data table creation Input data Output data Y Temp Converted digital value Temperature DTO DT 1 332 DT12 DT2 409 DT13 DT3 487 DT14 DT11 878 DT22 150 X AD value Note Specify the number of data to be paired 1 for DTO 2 16 2 6 Clock Calendar Function If a backup battery is installed in the FP the clock calendar function can be used This function cannot be used without a backup battery 2 6 1 Area for Clock Calendar Function With the clock calendar function data indicating the hour minute second day year and other information stored in the special data registers DT90053 to DT90057 can be read using the transmission instruction and used in sequence programs Special data Register No Upper byte Lower byte Reading Writing Hour data Minute data l DT90053 HOO
51. 3 Restrictions on Unit Combinations 1 3 1 Restrictions on FPO Expansion Unit ia oa oo oa ma mie eemi ka n grp oa pop m r _ H 11 Sy Maximum possible expnasion is with a total of three untis Contorol unit Expansion Expansion Expansion unit 1 unit 2 unit 3 Up to three expansion units can be added on the right of the FP these expansion units being either expansion units or intelligent units from the earlier FPO series or a combination of the two A combination of relay output types and transistor output types is also possible Controllable I O points Number of I O points when Number of I O points when Type of control unit i i using control unit using FPO expansion unit FPG C32 32 points Max 128 points FPG C28 28 points Max 124 points FPG C24 24 points Max 120 points Note1 This is the number of points when combining with the transistor type FPO expansion unit Note e Install the FPO thermocouple unit on the right side of all other expansion units If it is installed on the left side the total precision will deteriorate e Install the FPO CC Link slave unit on the right side of the other expansion units There is no expansion connector on the right side e Install the FPO RTD unit on the right side of the other expansion units 1 3 2 Restrictions on FP2 Expansion Unit Expansion Expansion Expansion Expansion unit 4 unit 3
52. 30 A 0 p or less Cold start Leakage current 0 75 mA or less Holding time 10 ms or more Output Rated output 24 V 5 DC Rated current 0 7A 0 0 7A Output ripple 500 mV 0 735 A or more feature Possible 20000h at 55 C 13 6 13 4 Cable Adapter Specifications 13 4 1 AFC8503 AFC8503S PC m Tar 3000 12 2 T asl CN2 PC side Finke Signal name J 5 ae ali prs _i_I S oobos MERLE 24 992015 32 0 rg 4 Socket Inch screw thread 4 40 AFC8503S O Oh fei 5 m co AS oo CHI HM Unit mm 13 4 2 AFC85305 AFC8531 AFC8532 For extending for the tool port T ee RX D to gt y Q OU oT Ip iji _ es rm alili l 500 190 FA 1000 8 f i 2000 0 a pe a8 FN telez Q H EAE 2 Unit mm 13 7 13 8 Chapter 14 Appendix 14 1 System Registers Special Internal Relays Special Data Registers Precaution for System Registers What is the system register area e System registers are used to set values parameters which determine operation ranges and functions used Set values based on the use and specifications of your program e There is no need to set system registers for functions which will not be used Type of system registers The registers to be used depend on each PLC 1 Allocation of timers and counters System register 5 The number of timers and
53. 30s Decimal constants K 32 768 to K32 767 for 16 bit operation Integer type K Hexadecimal constants H F 1 175494 x 10 to F 3 402823 x 10 F 1 175494 x 10 to F 3 402823 x 10 Note1 The number of points noted above is the number reserved as the calculation memory The actual number of points available for use is determined by the hardware configuration 500 subroutines ad S rom c O 2 O 5 i ad a Constant Floating point type F 12 16 Note2 If no battery is used only the fixed area is backed up counters 16 points C1008 to C1023 internal relays 128 points R2480 to R255F data registers 55 words DT32710 to DT32764 Writing is available up to 10000 times Then the optional battery is used all area can be backed up Areas to be held and not held can be specified using the system registers If an area is held when the battery is not installed the value of data may be indefinite as it is not cleared to 0 when the power is turned on When the battery ran out of the power the data at the hold area will be indefinite Note3 The points for the timer and counter can be changed by the setting of system register 5 The number given in the table are the numbers when system register 5 is at its default setting 12 17 12 18 Chapter 13 Dimensions 13 1 Dimensions 13 1 1 Control Unit Transistor Output Type FPG C32T FPG C32T2 FPG C28P2 FPG C32TH FPG C32T2H FPG C28P2H
54. 5 Hzto 9 8 kHz K1 to K9800 unit Hz Max error near 9 8 KHZ approx 0 9 KHz Set K1 to specify 1 5 Hz 1 48Hzto 100 kHz K48 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 KHZ approx 3 kHz Duty 1 4 is recommended for this range 2 191 Hzto 100 kHz K191 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 KHZ approx 0 8 kHz Duty 1 4 is recommended for this range Initial speed Set 30 kHz or less Acceleration deceleration time ms lt K constant gt With 30 steps K30 to K32760 Specify in 30 steps 5 With 60 steps K60 to K32760 Specify in 60 steps 5 Deviation counter clear signal ms lt K constant gt Output time of deviation counter clear signal is specified 0 5 ms to 100 ms KO to K100 Set value and error 0 5 ms or less Specify KO when not using or when specifying 0 5 ms Deviation counter clear signal is allocated in Y2 for CHO and In 5 for CH2 When the time is not specified in 30 ms units nor 60 ms units it will be automatically corrected to the multiple value larger value of 30 ms or 60 ms 6 When the frequency is set to 50Hz or higher the duty must be set to 1 4 25 6 31 Home return operation modes There are two operation modes for a home return with the FP Type and Type Il Type home return The home input is effective regardless of whether or not here is a near home input whether deceleration is taking place or whether deceleration ha
55. 66 0 0 elapsed value in D Left right shift LRSR D1 Shifts one bit to the left or right with register D2 the area between D1 and D2 as 5 OO GO OO 0 0 0 0 the register Data rotate instructions le eee Pod Rotates the n bits in data of D to rotate PROR the right eee lees Rotates the n bits in data of D to rotate PROL the left 16 bit data right RCR D n Rotates the n bits in 17 bit area consisting of D plus the carry flag R9009 data to the right D n Rotates the n bits in 17 bit area consisting of D plus the carry flag R9009 data to the left D n Rotates the number of bits specified by n of the double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the right Rotates the number of bits specified by n of the double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the left Rotates the number of bits specified by n of the double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the right together with carry flag R9009 data Rotates the number of bits specified by n of the double words data 32 bits specified by D 1 D to the left together with carry flag R9009 data rotate with carry PRCR flag R9009 data 16 bit data left RCL rotate with carry PRCL flag R9009 data 32 bit data right rotate PDROR 32 bit data left DROL PDROL rotate DRCR PDRCR U 5 F127 32 bit data r
56. A N A A A DT9000 N A A DT9000 N A A A A A A DT9000 O1 amp N N N N N When an error condition is detected in an intelligent unit the bit corresponding to the unit aaeiionetabnonnal No will turn on Monitor using binary display DT90006 intelligent unit for FP left side expansion 11 3 2 1 0 Bit No Looi s 3 2 1 0 Unit No on 1 error off 0 normal DT90007 Notused DT90008 Notused DT90009 Communication error Stores the error contents when using COM2 A WA flag for COM2 port A When the state of installation of FPO expansion I O unit has changed since the power was turned on the bit corresponding to Position of I O verify ne mn No will turn on Monitor using binary DT90010 error unit for FPO right A N side expansion 15 11 3 2 1 0 Bit No Loo s 2 1 0 Unit No on 1 error off 0 normal 14 19 DT90003 DT90004 DT90007 a A Available N A Not available Register No DT90011 DT90014 DT90015 DT90016 DT90017 DT90018 DT90019 DT90020 14 20 Position of I O verify error unit for FP left side expansion Notused CN Operation auxiliary register for data shift instruction Operation auxiliary register for division instruction Operation error address hold type Operation error address non hold type 2 5 ms ring counter Note1 10 us ring counter Note1 Note2
57. Acceleration deceleration time 909 ms Bae Target value 10000 pulse ara Pulse stop KO Pulse output diagram 5000 Hz 10000 pulses 1 E a 1 300 ms With 30 steps Af 5000 500 30 steps 150 Hz At 300 ms 30 steps 10 ms With 60 steps At Af 5000 500 60 steps 75 Hz At 300 ms 60 steps 5 ms Regarding the specification of acceleration deceleration time For specifying acceleration deceleration time No of steps and initial speed set the value to be calculated by the formula below Specify acceleration deceleration time in the 30 ms unit with 30 steps and in the 60 ms unit with 60 steps 5 Acceleration deceleration time t ms No of steps x 1000 Initial speed fO Hz 6 25 1 Control code lt H constant gt H DOOOOOOO 0 Fixed Number of acceleration deceleration steps 0 30 steps 1 60 steps Can be used with Ver 1 4 or later Duty on width 6 0 Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 25 M Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz Operation mode and output method 00 Incremental CW CCW 02 Incremental pulse and direction forward off reverse on 03 Incremental pulse and direction forward on reverse off 10 Absolute CW CCW 12 Absolute pulse and direction forward off reverse on 13 Absolute pulse and direction forward on reverse off 2 Frequency Hz lt K constant gt Frequency range O
58. COM2 port 7 176 Chapter 8 Security Functions 8 1 Type of Security Functions There are mainly two functions as the security function of the FPx It is possible to rewrite data during any of these functions is being used 1 Password protect function It is used to restrict the access to the programs in the FP from the programming tool by setting a password Writing and reading ladder programs or system registers will be unperformable by setting a password and setting to the protect mode There are two types of passwords as below e 4 digit password 4 characters of 16 characters that are 0 to 9 and A to F can be used e 8 digit password A maximum of 8 English one byte characters case sensitive and symbols can be used Note 8 digit password is available for FP gt 32k type only 2 Upload protection Available for FPE 32k type only Ladder programs or system registers cannot be uploaded from the FP by setting that the program is not uploaded As transferring programs to the master memory cassette as well as the programming tool will be unperformable it ensures higher security 3 Password protect function and upload protection for FP memory loader Those functions are available only when using the 32k type FP V3 2 or later FP memory loader V2 0 or later and FPWIN GR V2 8 or later and when setting a 8 digit password sar Reference lt 8 4 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader gt The state of the
59. E 40 to 81900 ms commands ting Constant value settings for scan Normal Ooo mals cal 0 to 350 ms Scans once each time scan ne specified time interval k link relays used for i link data registers E used for PC PLC link Eo me Meee Starting word number for link 0 to 63 relay transmission PLC 43 Link relay transmission size O O to 64 words Starting number for link data 0 to 127 register transmission Link data register transmission oo T T size pane C PLC link h fl N reren 1S Seri link relays used for Maximum unit number setting 110 16 for MEWNET WO PC PLC link a i link data registers 5 used for PC PLC link PO TAGNO Starting word number for link 64 to 127 relay transmission 53 Link relay transmission size 0 to 64 words Starting number for link data 128 128 to 255 register transmission only Link data register transmission Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET WO PC PLC link pet 14 5 Name peng Descriptions value Do not set input XO as high speed counter Two phase input XO X1 Two phase input X0 X1 Reset input X2 Incremental input X0 Incremental input X0 Reset input X2 Decremental input X0 Decremental input X0 Reset input X2 incremental decremental input XO X1 incremental decremental input XO X1 Reset input X2 Incremental decremental control input XO X1 Incremental decremental control input XO X1 Reset input X2 CHO
60. Enter in alphanumeric ik Setting for FP memory loader option IV Allow the download to older than Version 3 2 r r Set PLC Password Untitlel x Enter the password in alphanumeric foc Do not forget this password Ti i aN PLC became disabled to write read As the dialog box is shown select as below Digit number Select 4 digits or 8 digits Operation Mode Select Protect 4 digits or 8 digits password Input a password to be set Click Settings Input the password for confirmation again and click OK The setting has completed Setting to allow the access to the program by inputting a password Set PLC Password Untitlel Current status 8 digits Protect Close Available retry counts 3 counts e digit number D Help 4 digits Hex 8 digits alphanumeric Match case Operation Mode Protect Unprotect 8 digits password Enter in alphanumeric AEK Setting for FP memory loader option V Allow the download to older than Version 3 2 cr r FPWIN GR x A PLC is not protected state Note If the power supply of the PLC is turned on off with the setting that the access is allowed the setting will be that the PLC is protected again As the dialog box is shown select as below Digit number Select 4 digits or 8 digits Operation Mode Select Access 4 digits or 8 digits password Input a passw
61. FPOR E8 Expansion Unit FPOR E16 Expansion unit FPOR E32 Expansion unit 1 8 8 points Input 4 points Output 4 points 8 points Output 8 points 8 points Output 8 points J 16 points Input 8 points Output 8 points 16 points Input 8 points Output 8 points 16 points Input 8 points Output 8 points 16 points Output 16 points 16 points Output 16 points 32 points Input 16 points Output 16 points 32 points Input 16 points Output 16 points 24V 24V DC DC common 24V DC common 24V DC common 24V DC common 24V DC common 24V DC common Relay output 2A Transistor output NPN 0 3A Transistor output PNP 0 3A Relay output 2A Transistor output NPN 0 3A Transistor output PNP 0 3A Transistor output NPN 0 3A Transistor output PNP 0 3A Transistor output NPN 0 3A Transistor output PNP 0 3A Terminal block Terminal block Molex connector MIL connector MIL connector MIL connector MIL connector MIL connector MIL connector AFPORE8RS ued AFPORE8RM connector 8 points 24V Relay output Terminal AFPOREBYRS Output 8 points C ie block ears ee connector aie connector 6 points 24V DC MIL AFPORE16X Input 16 points common connector AFPORE16RS AFPORE16RM 1 2 4 FPO Intelligent Units lt Input specifications gt No of channels 8 channels FPO A D Inpu
62. Horizontal the input and output connectors on top installation of the unit connectors face down e Do not install the unit above devices which generate heat such heaters transformers or large scale resistors 5 2 Installation space e Leave at least 50mm 1 97 in of space between the wiring ducts of the unit and other devices to allow heat radiation and unit replacement 50 mm 1 97 in or more Y i 50 mm 1 97 in or more e Maintain at least 100mm 3 937 in of space between devices to avoid adverse affects from noise and heat when installing a device or panel door to the front of the PLC unit 100 mm 3 937 in or more Pane door PLC unit Other device e Leave at least 100mm 3 937 in of space open from the front surface of the control unit in order to allow room for programming tool connections and wiring 5 3 5 1 2 Installation and Removal Attachment to DIN rail and removal from DIN rail FP unit can be simply attached to DIN rail Procedure of installation method 1 Fit the upper hook of the unit onto the DIN rail 2 Without moving the upper hook press on the lower hook to fit the unit into position Procedure of removal method 1 Insert a slotted screwdriver into the DIN rail attachment lever 2 Pull the attachment lever downwards 3 Lift up the unit and remove it from the rail 5 4 5 1 3 Installation Using the Optional Mounting Plate When using the slim 30 type m
63. MEWNET TR communication error FP3 and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers FP3 DT9002 DT9003 FP10SH DT9 0002 DT90003 and the erroneous master unit and abnormal I O unit Then check the unit Selection of operation status using system register21 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function A Available 14 67 14 68 Intelligent unit error I O unit verify error Opera tion status Description and steps to take An abnormality in an intelligent unit FP x FP X Check the contents of special data register DT90006 and locate the abnormal FP intelligent unit application cassette for FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90006 DT90007 and locate the abnormal intelligent unit Then check the unit referring to its manual Selection of operation status using system register22 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 FP3 Check the contents of special data registers DT9006 DT9007 and locate the abnormal intelligent unit Then check the unit referring to its manual Selection of operation status using system register22 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function I O unit Expansion unit wiring condition has changed compared to that
64. Note5 Note5 Note1 an Upload protection or 4 digit Download possible Download possible only for models with same password x Download impossible No target model Note1 Program downloading is not possible for FP memory loader Ver 1 Note2 Upload protection cannot be set for FP memory loader Ver 1 Note3 When downloading programs with 8 digit password FP memory loader Ver 1 will not enter protection state after downloading finishes To enter protection state turn off the power and then turn it on again Note4 The state that the setting has been made not to disable downloading to the old version on the FP Ver 3 20 or later Note5 When transferring data from FP memory loader to PLC program data cannot be transferred by Ver 2 or later however only the Upload protection setting is effective Status of PLC that program has been downloaded downloading a program to the PLC from the FP memory loader the password that has been already set on the unit may be changed Note the followings Password setting for PLC after download The password will be cleared The password will be overwritten with a new 4 digit password The password will be overwritten with a new 8 digit password 8 digit password setting l A Limited distribution setting Off The password will be overwritten with a new 8 digit password 8 digit password setting The password will not change Limited distribution setting On The progr
65. PLC inter link address DT90171 Counts how many times a token is lost DT90172 Counts how many times two or more tokens are detected DT90173 Counts how many times a signal is lost DT90174 A iei undefined commands have been MEWNET WO DT90175 PLC link status No of times sum check errors have occurred A N A during reception DT90176 No of times format errors have occurred in received data DT90177 No of times transmission errors have occurred DT90178 No of times procedural errors have occurred DT90179 No of times overlapping parent units have occurred DT90180 to High speed counter This monitors the data specified in DT90052 DT90190 control flag monitor for CHO High speed counter DT90191 control flag monitor yy LEP Ey tor cni Home near input 0 Invalid 1 Valid A N A High speed counter DT90192 control flag monitor SOtSPee8 counter instruction leashes for CH2 Hardware reset 0 Enable 1 Disable High speed counter count 0 Enable 1 Disable DT90193 control flag monitor Software reset 0 No t Yes for CH3 14 29 A Available N A Not available int ae ing ing DT90194 to DT90199 High speed The elapsed value 32 bit data for the high speed counter is stored here The value can counter DT90201 elapsed value be read and written by executing the F1 DMV Instruction The target value 32 bit data of the high DT90202 speed counter specified by the high speed counter instruction is stored here
66. Read contact area Write contact area 14 74 14 6 Hexadecimal Binary BCD i BCD data OIN OOA WON O 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 00000110 00000111 00001000 00001001 00001010 00001011 00001100 00001101 00001110 00001111 00010000 00010001 00010010 00010011 00010100 00010101 00010110 00010111 00011000 00011001 00011010 00011011 00000000 00011100 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100111 00011101 00011110 00011111 00111111 11111111 00001111 0000 0010 1001 1001 14 75 14 7 ASCII Codes mi eteaietedatriaiy CCC Ett Kd a Kad EN i 6 a a 1 a ee a eee RRA RRSSA lo Se a mbes epspepafofS0 p gt fs pets pe pt 14 76 Record of changes ARCT1F333E ARCT1F333E 1 ARCT1F333E 2 ARCT1F333E 3 ARCT1F333E 4 ARCT1F333E 5 ARCT1F333E 6 ARCT1F333E 7 ARCT1F333E 8 ARCT1F333E 9 ARCT1F333E 10 ARCT1F333E 11 Sep 2001 Feb 2002 Nov 2002 May 2004 Apr 2006 Jan 2007 Jun 2007 Jun 2008 Feb 2009 Feb 2010 Sep 2011 Sep 2012 First edition 2 edition Addisions Control units FPG C32T2 FPG C24
67. S3 gt R900B on S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 R900C on QO Available Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or later FPO V2 1 or later 14 58 FP2SH FP10SH _ rand Floating point FLIMT S1 S2 When S141 S1 gt S3 1 S3 type data PFLIMT 3 D S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D upper and When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 lower limit S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D control When 141 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 lt or S2 1 S2 S3 1 3 D 1 D Floating point FBAND S1 S2 When S141 S1 gt S3 1 S3 type data PFBAND S3 D S3 1 S3 S14 1 S 1 gt D 1 D dead band When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 control S3 1 S3 S2 1 S2 D 1 D When S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 lt or S2 1 S2 0 0 gt D 1 D Floating point S1 S2 When S3 1 S3 lt 0 0 type data S3 D S3 1 S3 S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D zone control When S3 1 S3 0 0 0 0 D 1 D When S3 1 S3 gt 0 0 S3 1 3 S2 1 S2 D 1 D Floating point FMAX S1 S2 Searches the maximum value in the type data PFMAX D real number data table between the maxi mum area selected with S1 and S2 value and stores it in the D 1 D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 D Floating point S1 S2 Searches the minimum value in the type data real number data table between the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D 1 D The address relativ
68. Send area Range of link registers used for PC PLC link No 44 Start address of link register send area PO 4 Size of link register send area 40 Setting the largest unit number No Largest unit number setting for PC PLC link Connection diagram lt AFPG803 gt TI U ie p i i U M i TO a i t ILE NE iI aa aT e Cfo ee a a naa i i 4 mi N oe i t J Transmission line Transmission line Pr gt ca j The final unit terminal station should be shorted between the transmission line and the E terminal The final unit terminal station should be shorted between the transmission line and the E terminal lt AFPG806 gt In case of using the AFPG806 connect two cables each to the terminal and terminal Use the wires of the same cross sectional area which should be 0 5 to 0 75 mm The terminal station is specified with the dip switch located in the communication cassette FPX FPE FP gt 2 posed a poced led 1 Hi iL IE EL 1 ES poceo To C NET adapter 7 64 N Transmission line W Transmission line N Transmission line Sample program Unit no 1 When X1 is input LO of the link relay goes on and when X2 is input L1 of the link relay goes on X1 LO PAABe_ FP 2 control unit no 2 begins operation J X2 L1 E Unit no 2 When LO of the link relay go
69. Target High speed values have been preset for the various an Arger instructions to be used when the high speed A counter related instruction F166 F167 F171 DT90203 F175 or F176 is executed The value can be read by executing F1 DMV instruction DT90204 High speed The elapsed value 32 bit data for the high speed counter is stored here The value can counter i DT90205 elapsed value be read and written by executing F1 DMV instruction The target value 32 bit data of the high DT90206 speed counter specified by the high speed High speed counter instruction is stored here Target values have been preset for the various nter tar oN target instructions to be used when the high speed counter related instruction F166 or F167 is DT90207 executed The value can be read by executing the F1 DMV instruction DT90208 to DT90218 14 30 A Available N A Not available Register ome Read Writ N Descriptions O ing ing Unit No Station No ee DT90219 selection for DT90220 to n a moe i iP A NA DT90251 l l l System regis PLC link System regis DT90222 station System regis No 1or9 ter 44 and 45 System regis ter 40 and 41 PLC link System regis DT9022 DT90226 station The contents of the system register settings No 2 or 10 ter 44 and 45 pertaining to the PLC inter link function for DT90227 System regis the various unit numbers are stored as ter 46 and 47 shown be
70. User s Manual Programming Manual Exclusive manual ARCT1F333E ARCT1F353E FP Control unit Yes FP Expansion I O unit Yes FP Positioning unit Yes FP Expansion Yes data memory unit FP CC Link slave unit Yes FP S LINK unit Yes FP Communication Yes cassette 3 Key Point Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes ARCT1F365E No ARCT1F380E ARCT1F403E No e As for requesting for manuals please contact your dealer or download the PDF data from our web site e http industrial panasonic com ac e dl_center manual User registration is required Free of charge XV XVI Chapter 1 Functions and Restrictions of the Unit 1 1 Features and Functions of the Unit Powerful control capabilities All of the functions of a mid scale PLC are packed into the compact body size of the 32 pont type FPO A program capacity of 12k steps or 32k steps is provided as a standard feature so you never have to worry about how much memory is left as you re programming In addition 32k words are reserved for data registers so large volumes of data can be compiled and multiple operations can be processed without running out of memory A full range of communication functions Using the Tool port RS232C provided as a standard feature on the main unit communication can be carried out with a display panel or computer Additionally communication cassettes with RS232C and RS485 interfaces are available as an option Installing a 2 channel RS2
71. When the PLC receives a command it processes the command regardless of the sequence program and sends a response back to the computer MEWTOCOL COM sketch e Communication is carried out in a conversational format based on the MEWTOCOL COM communication procedures e Data is sent in ASCII format e The computer has the first right of transmission The right of transmission shifts back and forth between the computer and the PLC each time a message is sent Computer Transmission program Reception processing program The unit number of the PLC that sent the response Command message Confirmation of whether or not the processing was carried out successfully The type of command DThe unit number of the PLC processed to which the command is being sent Df the command was used to read data the data The type of command that was read Any settings and data required in order to execute the command Vv The command and data are sent to the PLC with the specified unit number lf an error occurred and the command could not be processed success fully the content of the erro hA A response is returned and processed by the computer e g the computer retrieves the data that was sent Response message Header Source 7 20 Format of command and response Command message All command related items should be noted in the text segment The unit number must be specified before se
72. When the program runs the data table and the pulse output diagram will be as shown below F1 DMV K300 DT302 F172 PLSH DT300 KO Data table DT300 1 DT301 Control code H1110 DT302 2 DT303 Frequency 300 Hz Pulse output diagram XB JOG ON command OFF 300Hz OHz 1 Control code lt H constant gt HOOOOOOOO 0 Fixed I Target value setting 0 Mode with no target value 1 Target value match stop mode can be used with Ver 1 4 or later W Duty on width 4 0 Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 25 M Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz E Output method 00 No counting CW 01 No counting CCW 10 Incremental counting CW 12 Incremental counting Direction output OFF 13 Incremental counting Direction output ON 21 Decremental counting CCW 22 Decremental counting Direction output OFF 23 Decremental counting Direction output ON 6 35 2 Frequency Hz lt K constant gt Frequency range 0 1 5Hzto9 8kHz K1 to K9800 unit Hz Max error near 9 8 KHz approx 0 9 KHz Set K1 to specify 1 5 Hz 1 48Hzto100kHz K48 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 KHz approx 3 KHz 2 191 Hz to 100 KHz K191 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 KHz approx 0 8 KHz In case of count mode set the frequency to 30 kHz or less for executing instructions at the first time 3 Target value Abs
73. X1 becomes on whether XO is on or off lt Example 3 gt PSHS AQ x1 wo e qe ot DF ao fr fons e When X2 was on prior to X0 Y1 will not be on even if XO becomes on When a combination of contacts are set as the trigger execution condition of a differential instruction DF or timer instruction do not use an AND stack ANS instruction read stack RDS instruction or pop stack POPS instruction Examples in which the above programs are rewritten lt Program in which the example 1 is rewritten gt XO x1 YO k HoF p xO K2 m lt Program in which the example 2 is rewritten gt x0 X1 TMX 5 K 30 YO I H xO x2 s lt Program in which the example 3 is rewritten gt x0 x1 YO meae x0 x2 Y1 H HoF i x0 x3 11 13 11 7 Rewrite Function During RUN 11 7 1 Operation of Rewrite During RUN How operation of rewrite during RUN Rewriting programs can be executed even in RUN mode When a rewrite is attempted during RUN the tool service time is temporarily extended program rewriting is performed and operation is resumed without the need to change the mode For this reason the time of the scan during the RUN rewrite extends from several ms to several hundreds of ms Operation during rewrite External output Y is held External input X is ignored The timer T stops the clock Rise and fall changes in the inputs of differential instructions DF counter instructions CT and left rig
74. YO to Y7 as desired as desired 6 3 5 Instructions used with High speed Counter Function High speed counter control instruction FO e This instruction is used for counter operations such as software reset and count disable e Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90052 e Once this instruction is executed the settings will remain until this instruction is executed again Operations that can be performed with this instruction e Counter software reset bit0 e Counting operation enable disable bit1 e Hardware reset enable disable bit2 e Clear high speed counter instructions F166 to F176 e Clear target value match interrupt Example Performing a software reset In case of CHO In the above program the reset is performed in step X7 LDF FO MV H 1 DT90052 T 1 and 0 is entered just after that in step 2 The count is now ready for operation If it is only reset FO MV HO DT90052 counting will not be performed In case of CH1 X7 DF FO MV H 1001 DT90052 Fo MV H 1000 DT90052 6 12 High speed counter pulse output control flag area of FP 15 12 11 8 7 43 0 e The area DT90052 for writing channels and control codes is allocated as shown in the left figure e Control codes written with an FO MV instruction are stored by channel in special data registers DT90190 to DT90193 DT90052 C Channel specification HO to H3 CHO to CH3 C
75. _Abbre RD ReceivedData RD RS _ Requestto Send RS _ LER 4 m CS teatsen CS lt Using AFPG802 2channel RS232C type communication cassette gt Computer side FP side D SUB 9 pin 5 pin terminal 1 ar oie baat RD S2 P2 Recsivea Oata2 RD Signal Ground To other device Computer side D SUB 9 pin Einname Signal neme Abra C ranemiesion ine _ Received Data 7 27 7 4 3 1 N Communication Computer Link Overview For a 1 N computer link the computer and the FP are connected through a commercially available RS232C RS485 conversion adapter and the respective PLCs are wired using an RS485 cable The computer and the PLC communicate via commands and responses The computer sends a command specifying the unit number and the PLC with that unit number sends a response back to the computer FPE FPE FPE FPE Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 Computer available conversion adapter L a o 3 T g w The unit number for the PLC to which the command is being sent is included in the command message The unit number of the PLC sending a response is included in the response message When data is transmitted from FP via the RS485 communication of AFPG806 COM4 start the transmission of the data to FP2 after the time mentioned blow passes at a receiver In case of 19200 bps 1 ms In ca
76. and counting will not take place during control e The on off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result Operation during operation For small sized PLCs FPO FP1 FP gt and FP X The internal relay R or output Y specified by OT or KP instruction is rewritten according to the results of operation However as the R or Y is set reset again right before the peripheral service as the above procedure C the monitoring value with the tooling software or the output to external devices is forcibly rewritten to a specified value For medium sized PLCs FP2 and FP2SH For the internal relay R and output Y specified by OT or KP instruction the value of the forced processing has a priority When rewritten by a high level instruction the result of the instruction has a priority 11 19 11 20 Chapter 12 Specifications 12 1 Table of Specifications 12 1 1 General Specifications po tem Description y O Rated operating voltage Operating voltage range Allowed momentary cas power off time C24 0 to 55 C 20 to 70 C 30 to 85 RH at25 C non condensing 30 to 85 RH at25 C non condensing Between input output terminals and power supply Between input terminal and output terminal Between input terminals XO to X7 input terminals X8 to XF and power supply terminal function earth terminal function earth Between input terminals X0 to X7 and input terminals X8 to XF Between input term
77. as one word 16 bits of data Internal relay Code for specifying 16 internal relay points as WR ZOO WOIGS WO TOVA one word 16 bits of data Code for specifying 16 link relay points as one Link relay WL 128 words WLO to WL127 word 16 bits of data Note2 32765 words DTO to Data memory used in program Data is Data register DT DT32764 handled in 16 bit units one word This is a shared data memory which is used Link register LD 256 words LDO to LD255 within the PLC link Data is handled in 16 bit units one word gt Data memory for storing a target value of a Timer Counter set value area te2 SV 1024 words SVO to SV1023 timer and setting value of a counter Stores by Relay Memory area timer counter number Data memory for storing the elapsed value Sng OUI elapsed 1024 words EVO to EV1023 during operation of a timer counter Stores by value area EV timer counter number Special data register 260 words DT90000 to Data memory for storing specific data Various DT DT90259 settings and error codes are stored Register can be used as an address of Index rEgIStEr E words U01049 memory area and constants modifier Master control relay 256 points MCR JP and LOOP Number of step ladders 1000 stages Number of subroutines Number of interrupt 9 programs 8 external input points XO to X7 1 periodical interrupt point 0 5 programs ms to
78. at 24V DC at 26 4V DC at24V DC 16 12 NG 26 4V DC Number of 12 Number of i points per points per o Sy common common D e which are which are o simulta simulta od neous on neous on ff 52 55 42 47 55 Ambient Temperature C Ambient Temperature C 2 8 Circuit diagram C32 Y0 Y1 Y3 Y4 Output indicator LED MM terminal External z L power supply power supply 24V DC Z g Q Y2 Y5 to YF Output indicator LED AA terminal External 5 power 5 supply 5 power supply 24V DC F termina C28 Y0 Y1 Y3 Y4 Output indicator LED M Internal circuit Output circuit Y2 Y5 to YB External power supply Load power Supply 24V DC Output indicator LED M Internal circuit Output circuit Phase fault protection circuit External power supply Load power supply 24V DC Relay output specifications C24 Output type Rated control capacity 2A 250V AC 2A 30V DC 4 5A per common or less Note1 Resistance load Limitations on number of simultaneous output on points Keep the number of output points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature C24 8 Number of points per it at 26 4V DC common Se See which are simulta neous on 4648 55 Ambient temperature C Circuit diagram C24
79. at time of power up Check the contents of special data register FPO DT9010 FP FP X DT90010 DT90011 and locate the erroneous expansion unit It checks whether an expansion connector is in agreement gt Check the contents of special data register FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH DT90010 DT90011 FP3 DT9010 DT9011 Selection of operation status using system register23 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function A Available Opera tion status System watching dog timer error Slave station connecung Selec time error for MEWNET F system Operation error Description and steps to take Scan time required for program execution exceeds the setting of the system watching dog timer Check the program and modify it so that the program can execute a scan within the specified time Selection of operation status using system register24 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 The time required for slave station connection exceeds the setting of the system register 35 Selection of operation status using system register25 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 Operation became impossible when a high level instruction was executed Selection of operation status using system register26 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO The address
80. be used in an area for either PC PLC link 0 or PC PLC link 1 is maximum 1024 points 64 words and the link register is maximum 128 words Note The PC link 1 can be used to connect with the second PC link WO of the FP2 Multi Communication Unit MCU At that time the link relay number and link register number for the PC link can be the same values as the FP2 from WL64 from LD128 Reference For the information on FP2 MCU lt Chapter 5 Communication Function PC PLC Link in FP2 Multi Communication Unit Technical Manual ARCT1F396E gt y 127 7 99 Example The PC PLC link areas are divided into send and receive areas The link relays and link registers are transmitted from the send area to the receive area of a different FPx The link relays and registers in the receive area on the receiving side must be within the same area as on the sending side For PC PLC link 0 Link relay allocation FP FPE FPE FPE Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 Sondarea mle Receive area Receive area Range of link relays used for PC PLC link Start address of link relay send area Size of link relay send area Note No 40 range of link relays must be set to the same range for all the units System register allocation FP FP FP 2 FP Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 System registers ps Name A ee ee Ne Range of link registers used for PC PLC link po 4
81. cassette may be damaged Remove the master memory and check whether the ERROR turns off When the ERROR turned off rewrite the master memory as its contents are damaged and use it again When the ERROR does not turn off please fa a Stops contact your dealer aAlalaAlalalalala FP1 C24 C40 C56 C72 and FP M Probably an abnormality in the memory unit Program the memory unit again and try to operate If the same error is detected try to operate with another memory unit FP2 FP2SH FP10SH and FP3 There may be a problem with the installed ROM ROM is not installed ROM contents are damaged Program size stored on the ROM is larger than the capacity of the ROM Check the contents of the ROM Unit Units installed exceed the limitations i e 4 or E27 installation Stops more ini units AIAJ A IA AIA error gt Turn off the power and re configure units referring to the hardware manual Probably an abnormality in the system hal Stops register A a a p Check the system register setting or initialize the system registers 1 This error occurs on FP X Ver2 0 or later A Available 14 65 Opera tion Description and steps to take status Configu ration A parameter error was detected in the Stops MEWNET W2 configuration area Set a paramere correct parameter FPS FP X Interrupt Probably a hardware abnormality error 0 Please contact your dealer An interrupt occurred withou
82. condition X1 for the DF instruction has not changed since the time of the previous execution thus derivative output is not obtained Time chart 2 xO X1 YO x1 was off when 4 XO became off The input condition 41 for the DF instruction has changed from off to on since the time of the previous execution thus derivative output Is obtained 11 11 lt Example 2 gt Using the CT instruction between JP and LBL instructions RO h JP 1 XO CT 100 X1 LBL 1 Time chart 1 RO XO Counting operation Final timing at which the J The count is not incremented because the final timing at which the previous JP instruction previous JP instruction was not executed has not been change and was not executed the execution condition XO for the counter input has not changed Time chart 2 RO XO Counting operation Final timing at which the previous JP instruction was not executed The count is not incremented because the count input changed from off to on after the final timing at which the previous JP instruction was not executed 11 12 11 6 Precautions for Programming Programs which are not executed correctly Do not write the following programs as they will not be executed correctly lt Example 1 gt ANS xo f xt YO T H DF x2 e When X1 was on prior to X0 YO will not be on even if XO becomes on lt Example 2 gt ANS xO IH TMX 5 K 30 YO x e TMX will activate if
83. contact in eae a er parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the Their OR comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 ORF gt Connects a Form A normally open contact in past parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the xl x oO comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 si ed a 141 1 S24 1 S27 ORF lt Connects a Form A normally open contact in prsa 5 prsa 5 s parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the x x comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 ORF lt Connects a Form A normally open contact in _pFe 8t 82 5 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the Available X Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP X V1 10 or later and FP 32k type comparative condition ie 1 lt S2 1 S2 14 40 14 3 Table of High level Instructions The high level instructions are expressed by the prefixes F or P with numbers For most of the high level instructions F and P types are available The differences between the two types are explained as follows Instructions with the prefix F are executed in every scan while its trigger is in the on Instructions with the prefix P are executed only when the leading edge of its trigger is detected For the FPO FPOR FP2 FP X the P type high level instructions are not available lean rand La transfer structions mwv OO tersar mam EE move ae aol aa
84. convenient when handling large amounts of data 11 3 2 Memory Areas Which can be Modified with Index Registers e Index registers can be used to modify other types of memory areas in addition to data registers DT lt Example gt IOWXO IOWY1 IOWRO IOSVO IOEV2 ODT100 e Constants can also be modified lt Example gt I0K10 IOH1001 e An index register cannot modify another index register lt Example gt 1010 1011 e When using index modification with an instruction which handles 32 bit data specify with 10 In this case l0 and I1 are handled together as 32 bit data Higher 16 bit area Lower 16 bit area ad Contents of 1 Contents of 10 In 1 In 11 3 3 Example of Using an Index Register Repeatedly reading in external data lt Example gt Writing the contents of input WX3 to a sequence of data registers beginning from DTO RO DH WH Fo mv ko 10 Ri H HDFHLFO MV WX3 I0DTO 3 F35 1 10 1 When RO turns on 0 is written to index register IO 2 When the R1 turns on the contents of input WX3 is transferred to the data register specified by lODTO 3 Add 1 to 10 In this case the contents of 10 will change successively and the destination data register will be as follows Input times of R1 Contents of 10 Destination data register 1st 0 DTO 2nd 1 DT1 3rd 2 DT2 Inputting and outputting data based on a number specified by an input lt Example 1 gt Setting a timer number specified by a digita
85. counted value drops below the minimum value it goes back to the maximum value and continues counting from there Vax value Min value Note When the linear interpolation instruction F175 or the circular interpolation instruction F176 is used the value for the target value or the amount of travel should be set so that it is within the range indicated below 8 388 608 to 8 388 607 Coded 24 bit binary The F175 and F176 instructions can be used only with the C32T2 C28P2 C32T2H and C28P2H control units 6 3 6 2 Function Specifications and Restricted Items 6 2 1 Specifications High speed counter function Input output contact No Memory area being used Performance specifications being used High speed counter ee channel No Single phase Incremental Decremental 2 phase 2 phase input One input Direction distinction Related instructions parenthesis FO MV High speed counter control F1 DMV Read write of elapsed value of high speed counter F166 HC1S Target value match on Specify the desired output from YO to Y7 using instruction F167 CH1R Target value match off Specify the desired output from YO to Y7 using instruction Note1 Note2 see lt 6 3 3 Minimum Input Pulse Width gt 6 4 Input contact number value in Control flag is reset input Note1 R903A R903B R903C R903D R903A R903C Elapsed value area DT90044 to DT90045 DT90048 to DT90049 DT9
86. counters is set by specifying the starting counter number 2 Hold non hold type setting System registers 6 to 13 When these registers are set to hold type the values in the relays and data memory will be retained even if the system is switched to PROG mode or the power is turned off If set to non hold type the values will be cleared to 0 3 Operation mode setting on error System registers 4 20 to 26 Set the operation mode when errors such as battery error duplicated use of output I O verification error and operation error occur 4 Time settings System registers 31 to 34 Set time out error detection time and the constant scan time 5 MEWNET W0 PLC link settings System registers 40 to 47 50 to 57 These settings are for using link relays and link registers for MEWNET W0 PC PLC link communication Note The default value setting is no PC PLC link communication 6 Input settings System registers 400 to 403 When using the high speed counter function pulse catch function or interrupt function set the operation mode and the input number to be used for the function 7 Tool and COM ports communication settings System registers 410 to 421 Set these registers when the Tool port and COM1 and COM2 ports are to be used for computer link general purpose serial communication PC PLC link and modem communication Note that the default setting is computer link mode 14 2 Checking and changing
87. e The MODBUS RTU protocol enables the communication between the FP2 and other devices including our FP e Programmable display GT series and KT temperature control unit e Enables to have conversations if the master unit sends instructions command messages to slave units and the slave units respond response messages according to the instructions e Enables the communication between the devices of max 99 units as the master function and slave function is equipped About MODBUS RTU e The MODBUS RTU communication is a function for the master unit to read and write the data in slave units communicating between them e There are ASCII mode and RTU binary mode in the MODBUS protocol however the FP2 is supported with the RTU binary mode only Master function Writing and reading data for various slaves is available using the F145 SEND and F146 RECV instructions Individual access to each slave and the global transmission is possible Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave KT temperature KT temperature control unit control unit Slave function If the slave units receive a command message from the master unit they send back the response message corresponding to the content Do not execute the F145 SEND or F146 RECV instructions when the unit is used as a slave unit Master ta A Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave ZEEN a N N E SS SF FF SF FS SF SF i MODBUS RTU command mess
88. forget your password you cannot read programs Even if you ask us for your password we cannot crack it 8 3 8 2 1 Password Setting For FP2 32k Type Only Setting using FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select or Set PLC Password under Tool on the menu bar The following display will be shown Security information dialog box G Indicates the current status of the password Set PLC Password Untitlel i PLC Home P Sung ad A Current status Password is not set Close 2 Specify the type of the password to be used Ta Me __Force Cancel_ Specify an operation mode digit number Help r r 2 Adoistien pe Access Accesses programs by inputting a 8 digits alphanumeric Match case passwo r d Operation Mode Puai Protect Sets a password 3 eS Unprotect Releases the password setting c Unprotect rr j 8 digits password YW Input a password Enterin alphanumeric fesem 5 Optional setting for FP memory loader Stinger FP mena adr opion Use the FPS V3 2 or later and FPWIN GR V2 8 V Allow the download to older than Version 3 2 6 E or later and set it to download to the FP memory loader Ver2 0 or later Confirmation the contents of the password setting Confirm the settings indicated in the dialog box Current status Indicates the current status of the
89. gt 1 1 gt F36D 1 DT50 J Sends a command to write the data DT50 and DT51 of the local unit to the DTO and S9F DT1 in the unit number 01 from the COM1 port R1 F145 SEND DT 100 DT50 DTO ko Fo Mv H1 WRO O 70L Sends a command to read the data DTO and DT1 in the unit number 01 from the COM1 _ port and stores the result in the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit 2 F146 RECV DT 100 DTO KO pTeo Fo Mv HO WRO Note It is H2001 for COM2 port Note2 It is R904A for COM2 port Reference For the information on the F145 SEND and F146 RECV instructions lt Programming Manual ARCT1F313E gt 7 19 Flow chart Data initialization R9044 Note ON DT50 and DT50 is equivalent to DT60 and DT61 Increments DT50 and DT51 Execute F145 Sends a data Sends a data Execute F146 SEND instruction write command read command RECV instruction Tums RO off Completion Note It is R904A for COM port The above program executes the operation 1 to 3 repeatedly 1 Updates the write data if the write data DT50 and DT51 and the read data DT60 and DT61 are matched 2 Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data DTO and DT1 in the unit number 1 from the COM1 port 3 Reads the data DTO and dT1 in the unit number 1 into the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit from the COM1 port Note The above COM1 port will be COM2 port for the
90. high speed counter F166 to F176 is executed the control flag special internal relay R903A to R903D corresponding to the channel used turns on 6 e Please be aware that the control flag in progress may change while a scan is being carried out To prevent multiple read access to this special internal relay you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program e When the control flag for a channel turns on another instruction using that same channel cannot be executed e Executing circular interpolation control instruction F176 sets the circular interpolation in progress flag special internal relay R904E and that state is maintained until the target value is achieved During this time other pulse output instructions F171 to F176 cannot be executed 6 8 6 2 3 Booting Time The booting time is the time span from the execution of the instruction to the actual pulse output CW CCW is set Approx 200 us with 30 steps Approx 400 us with 60 steps Pulse direction is set Approx 500 us with 30 steps Approx 700 us with 60 steps CW CCW is set Approx Pulse direction is set Approx Pulse output instruction F171 SPDH Trapezoidal control nome return li ote Pulse output instruction F172 PLSH JOG operation Pulse output instruction F174 SPOH Data table control u PWM output instruction F173 PWMH Approx 30 us Note If pulse direction is set a waiting time appr
91. in the data table Data table Pulse output diagram ON DTSO ie l Control code H 11110 OFF za JOG command pT303 Frequency 300 Hz oneal 300Hz x ulse Se Target value x3 K 1000 l OHz n Target value matching Pulse stopping 6 36 Sample program JOG operation Plus direction While XB is in the ON state a pulse is output from the CW output YO of the specified channel CHO Program Data table XB Horri omv nmo orao J Control code H1i110 Duty 1 4 25 48 Hz to 100 kHz Incremental counting CW XB _ F172 PLSH DT 300 KO 4 Pulse output instruction o JOG operation The data table headed by DT300 is used The data table headed by DT300is used EL and pulses are output from CHO J an XD EE a ee ee ee ee DoF Fo mv H8 DT 90052 L Overrun process l Pulse ouput stop pulse output stop clear Fo mv Ho Dra e Le Pulse output diagram xe ar si i OFF side side ga Motor 7 Ei 300Hz i o i enn vous yg TL Td 6 37 JOG operation Minus direction While XC is in the ON state a pulse is output from the CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CHO Program Data table XC Control code Hii 2i Duty 1 4 25 48 Hz to 100 kHz Decremental counting CCW XC F172 PLSH_ DT 310 KO _ F Pulse output instruction JOG operation The data table headed by DT310is used Pulses are o
92. interpolation instruction F176 starts up continuous circular interpolation overwriting The set time is ON time when the actions use this after circular circular periodical interrupt program is executed interpolation instruction startup when interpolation overwriting the next target value Note e When the target value has not been reached and the execution condition is off circular interpolation control flag R904E turns on and other positioning instructions F171 to F176 cannot be started e The above flags vary during scanning Example If the above flags are used for more than one time as input conditions there may be the different states in the same scan Replace with internal relays at the beginning of the program as a measure R904E Control flag for circular interpolation 6 41 Flag movement when command running Start Input up OFF Target value match Target value match i Continuous data start up Execution condition R2034 _ L i _ R903C _ LU L Lo RSO4E _ E mn R904F aE E z o r a Ea 1 scan 1 scan Action when the execution conditions turn OFF e Differing from other pulse output instructions circular interpolation instruction F176 executes the execution conditions as continually ON e Circular interpolation instruction F176 stops pulse output when the execution conditions turn OFF Note e Right when the execution condition turn off positioning instructions F171 to F176 other than
93. link relay also goes on in each of the other PLCs connected to the network Likewise if the contents of a link register are rewritten in one PLC the change is made in the same link register of each of the other PLCs connected to the network e The status of the link relays and link registers in any one PLC is fed back to all of the other PLCs connected to the network so control of data that needs to be consistent throughout the network such as target production values and type codes can easily be implemented to coordinate the data and the data of all units are updated at the same time Link relay In the figure below when link relay LO of the master station no 1 turns on this signal is converted by the programs of the other stations and YO of the other stations is activated Link register In the figure below if a constant of 100 is written to LDO of the master station no 1 the contents of LDO in the other stations are also changed to a constant of 100 No 2 Link register _ No 3 Link register FO MV K100 LDO LDO 100 No 4 Link register LDO 100 LO 100 No 1 Link register LDO 100 MODBUS RTU 32k type only Function overview e The MODBUS RTU protocol enables the communication between the FP2 and other devices including our FP e Programmable display GT series and KT temperature control unit e Enables to have conversations if the master unit sends instru
94. mode Turns off when Unit No 10 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 11 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 11 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 13 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 13 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 14 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 14 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 15 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 15 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 16 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 16 is in the PROG mode R907B Turns on when Unit No 12 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 12 is in the PROG mode 14 16 WR908 MEWNET W0O PC PLC link 1 transmission assurance relay 32k only me _ on when Unit No 1 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 2 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 3 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 4 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 5 is comm
95. password setting There are following five statuses 1 Password is not set Password is not set 2 4 digits Protect Password is 4 digit password and access is prohibited 3 4 digits Available to access Password is 4 digit password and access is allowed The status that inputting the password completes and that can access programs 4 8 digits Protect Password is 8 digit password and access is prohibited 5 8 digits Available to access Password is 8 digit password and access is allowed The status that inputting the password completes and that can access programs Available retry counts This is the number of times that you can input the password in succession Every time incorrect password is input the number will decrease up to 3 times If you fail to input the correct password for 3 times in succession you cannot access the program Turn the power supply of the FP off and then on again to try to input the password again IEF vo no If the power supply of the PLC is turned on off with the setting that the access is allowed the setting will be that the PLC is protected again 8 4 Setting the Password protect function Set PLC Password Untitlel PLC Home Settings Current status Password is not set Close Available retry counts 3 counts poen digit number ee Help 4diaits Hex 8 digits alphanumeric Match case Operation Mode Access Protect Unprotect 8 digits password
96. security can be checked at two displays of the programming tool FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select Security information or Set PLC Password under Tool on the menu bar The following displays will be shown Security information dialog box Set PLC Password dialog box Security information Untitlel Set PLC Password Untitlel PLC Home E l PLC Home Settings Current status Password is not set Close Upload Available Available retry counts 3 counts Force Cancel Password Password is not set digit number Help C 4 digits Hex FP Memory Loader option status ae Download to versions older than Version 3 2 5 Operation Mode Allow the download in case of same password Invalid 5 Access PLC cannot be uploaded gt Invalid Protect C Unprotect 8 digits password Enter in alphanumeric Setting for FP memory loader option I Allow the download to older than Version 3 2 r r 8 2 Password Protect Function This function is used to prohibit reading and writing programs and system registers by setting a password on the FP There are two ways to set a password as below 1 Sets using the programming tool 2 Sets using an instruction SYS1 instruction ACS er Note Precautions on the password setting Do not forget your password If you
97. subroutine is cleared Indicates the start of the subroutine program n Subroutine RET Te Ends the subroutine program return i Interrupt instructions S imaa a ICTL See Select interrupt enable disable or clear in H Horfion st sH S1 and S2 and execute 5 Available X Not available Not available partially 1 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n of a subroutine program has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses 14 36 oe Special setting instructions Communica tion condi tions setting Password setting Interrupt setting PLC link time setting Hor srs m MEWTOCOL COM response control High speed counter operation mode changing System registers No 40 to No 47 changing L syS2 s DI of Change the communication conditions for the COM port or tool port based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the password specified by the PLC based on the contents specified by the character constant Set the interrupt input based on the contents specified by the character constant Set the system setting time when a PLC link is used based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the communication conditions of the COM port or tool port for MEWTOCOL COM based on the contents specified by the character constant Change the operation mode of the high speed counter ba
98. type e This function performs home return according to the specified data table The elapsed value area CHO DT90044 DT90045 and CH1 DT90200 DT90202 is cleared to zero after the completion of home return XA LDF F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 DMV H1125 DMV DMV DMV DMV K200 K2000 K150 K10 DT200 DT202 DT 204 DT 206 DT208 Pulses are output from Y1 and a return to the home position is carried out at an initial speed of 200 Hz a maximum speed of 2000 Hz and an acceleration deceleration time of 150 ms When this program runs the positioning data table and the pulse output diagram will F171 SPDH DT200 KO be as shown below Positioning data table sth Control code 1 H 1125 Ses Initial speed 2 200 Hz DT204 2 DT205 Max speed 2000 Hz DT206 Acceleration 3 DT207 deceleration time 150 ms DT208 Deviation counter 4 Iams DT209 clear signal output time Pulse output diagram when home position proximity input is not used XA ON Home sensor ON 2000 Hz gt 150 ms Pulse output when home position proximity input is used XA ON Near home Home sensor sensor ON ON 2000 Hz 200 Hz OHZ j gt __ 150 ms 150 ms Regarding the specification of acceleration deceleration time For specifying acceleration deceleration time No of steps and initial speed set the value to be calculated by the formula below Specify
99. unit 2 unit 1 Pd Max possible expansion is with a total of four units Control unit Up to four dedicated FP2 expansion units can be added on the left of the FP The 64 points type expansion unit consists of 32 input points and 32 transistor NPN output points Controllable I O points Number of I O points when Number of I O points when Type of control unit F using control unit using FP expansion unit FPG C32 te 32 points Max 128 points Max 124 points Note1 The FP cannot be used for FPG C32T FPG C32TTM FPG C32TH nor FPG C32THTM Note2 This is the number of points when combining with the 64 point type FP expansion unit gg Key Point If using FPO expansion units and FP expansion units in combination the number of input and output points can be expanded to a maximum of 384 points for FPG C32T2 and FPG C32T2TM 1 4 Programming Tools 1 4 1 Tools Needed for Programming 1 Programming tool software Programming e The tool software can also be used with the FP tool software series a 5 e FPWIN Pro Ver 6 or FPWIN GR Ver 2 Windows software is used with FP2 See Also Programming Tool Restrictions 2 PC connection cable e The connection cable is available 1 4 2 Software Environment and Suitable Cable Standard ladder diagram tool software FPWIN GR Ver 2 Type of software OS Operating FEL AIS Product No system capacit Windows 98 FPWIN CR Ver 2 Full type Wi
100. units When using transistor output type expansion units Max 280 points up to 4 units When using transistor output type expansion units Max 376 points up to FPO 3 units and FPx 4 units When using transistor output type expansion units 28 points DC input 16 NPN output 12 Max 124 points up to 3 units Max 284 points up to 4 units When using NPN output type expansion units Max 380 points up to FPO 3 units and FP 4 units When using NPN output type expansion units method Control method Built in Flash ROM without backup battery 32000 steps o No of B o o ln Hostruction _tighievel _ tevel 216 ttt instruction Operation speed ssid speed 0 32 us step by basic instruction 1024 points for initial setting Timer 1008 points TO to T1007 Counter 16 points C1008 to C1023 Timer can count up to in units of 1ms 10ms 100ms or 1s x 32767 Counter Can count up to 1 to 32767 Link relay L 2048 points ee register 30765 words DTO to DT32764 mom Link register ory g 256 words LD aig Index register i g 14 words l0 to ID Ope ration Timer Counter T C me mory aaea input et output owe owe 1184 points rnal rel Relay 4096 points RO to R255F 12 7 C32T C32T2 C24R2 C28P2 C32TTM c32T2TM C24R2TM C28P2TM Unlimited points 8 points XO X1 X3 X4 5us X2 X5 to X7 100ys 9 programs external inp
101. value write and read instruction F1 e The area DT90052 for writing channels and control codes is allocated as shown in the left figure e Control codes written with an FO MV instruction are stored by channel in special data register DT90190 and DT90192 Note The output counting value of the elapsed value area may be different from the input counting value of the motor side if the pulse output is stopped by the Continue stop of pulse output After the pulse output stops execute the home return Reference lt 6 2 1 Table of specifications gt for information on the special data register e This instruction is used to read the pulse number counted by the built in high speed counter e Specify this F1 DMV instruction together with the special data register DT90044 e The elapsed value is stored as 32 bit data in the combined area of special data register DT90044 and DT90045 e Use only this F1 DMV instruction to set the elapsed value Example 1 Writing the elapsed value X7 HDF F1 DMV K3000 DT90044 Reading the elapsed value X8 HDF HF1 DMV DT90044 DT100 Set the initial value of K3000 in the high speed counter Reads the elapsed value of the high speed counter to DT100 and DT101 6 23 Wiring example FP gt Input terminal Home sensor Near home sensor Positioning start Positioning start Home return start JOG start JOG start Overrun Zz
102. xich for 2 channels Max 30kHz x2ch for 2 channels Max 15kHz x2ch for 3 or 4 channels Max 20kHz x3 to 4ch When using single phase When using 2 phase Input mode Addition input Two phase input One input Subtraction input Direction distinction input When using single phase When using 2 phase X0 count input ch0 XO X1 count input ch0 X1 count input ch1 X2 reset input ch0 ae andl aci X2 reset input ch0 ch1 X3 X4 count input ch2 X3 count input ch2 X5 reset input ch2 X4 count input ch3 X5 reset input ch2 ch3 Max counting speed No of output points chO ch2 CW and CCW mode Pulse and Sign mode When using 1 channel Max When using linear interpolation Max output 100kHZ xich function Max 100kHz frequency When using 2 channels Max When using circular interpolation 60kHz x2ch function Max 20kHz Max 2 channels lt ch0 gt lt ch2 gt input output X2 Home input X5 Home input contact used YO CW output Pulse output Y3 CW output Pulse output KORGI Y1 CCW output Sign output Y4 CCW output Sign output Y2 Deviation counter reset output Y5 Deviation counter reset output No of output points ch0 ch2 Output 1 5 to 12 5kHz at resolution of 1000 15 6 to 41 7kHZ frequency at resolution of 100 0 0 to 99 9 at resolution of 1000 1 to 99 at resolution of 100 Output contact used lt ch0 gt Y0 lt ch2 gt Y3 Note1 Max 2 channels PWM output
103. you want to Also if a password is forcibly bypassed the program is deleted When specifying the password note it in the specifications manual or in another safe location in case it is forgotten at some point Battery Do not install the battery when it is not used There is a possibility of leak if the battery remains discharged yi Differences in Functions Between Versions of Controller Addition of F174 SPOH instruction By SYS1 instruction Detection edge setting for external input interrupt MEW TOCOL COM Response time setting Writing into DT90014 DT90037 DT90038 by FO MV instruction Operand and index modification by F12 ICRD P13 ICWT instruction Shortening of polling cycle by MEWTOCOL COM during 1 N 12k type communication Setting for dealing the previous value of DF instruction in the system register 4th bit D and MC 60 step acceleration deceleration by F171 SPDH instruction Target value match stop mode by F172 PLSH instruction R9005 and R9006 is always announced when the battery error occurs Change in the detection timing of the battery error It is detected 2 seconds after the power is on Left expansion refresh is available Operand and index modification by F12 ICRD P13 ICWT instruction Shortening of polling cycle by MEWTOCOL COM during 1 N communication 12k type Setting for dealing the previous value of DF instruction in the system register 4th bit D and MC R9005 and R9006 is always announced when the batter e
104. 0 7 Analog potentiometer VO Potentiometer 0 Changes the value of DT90040 within a range of KO to K1000 V1 Potentiometer 1 Changes the value of DT90041 within a range of KO to K1000 Applicable special data register Symbol Potentiometer No Special data register Range of change DT90040 DT90041 aaa 2 4 2 Example Showing How to Use Analog Potentiometer The FP is provided with special data registers in which the values in the registers change in response to the analog potentiometers being moved If the values of these registers are sent to the clock setting value area a clock can be created that allows the time to be set using the potentiometer Example Writing of the clock setting value The value of the special data register DT90040 that corresponds to the analog potentiometer VO is sent to the setting value area SVO of TMXO to set the time for the clock R9010 sesame e ope Cee H Fo MV DT 90040 SVO Data transmission instruction The value of special data register DT90040 1 i sent to the setting value area RO TMX 0 K999 0 1 second type timer A E t K999 is set as a dummy value J 2 13 2 5 Thermister Input Only for TM type 2 5 1 Overview of Thermister Input The control units of which part and product numbers end in TM is equipped with the leader lines which enable the thermister input instead of the analog potentiometer The change in the termister s resistanc
105. 0 Parameter error______ Content of specified parameter does not exist or cannot be used There was a mistake in the contact data area data number Data error l i designation size designation range or format designation Registration over Operation was does when number of registrations was exceeded error or when there was no registration PC command that cannot be processed was executed during PC mode error RUN mode 14 72 Description An abnormality occurred when loading RAM to ROM IC memory card There may be a problem with the ROM or IC memory card When loading the specified contents exceeded the capacity Write error occurs ROM or IC memory card is not installed ROM or IC memory card does not conform to specifications ROM or IC memory card board is not installed A program or system register write operation was executed when Protect error the protect mode password setting or DIP switch etc or ROM operation mode was being used There was an error in the code format of the address data Also when exceeded or insufficient of address data there was a mistake in the range designation Cannot be read because there is no program in the program area or the memory contains an error Or reading was attempted of data that was not registered When inputting with programming tool software editing of an Rewrite during RUN instruction ED SUB RET INT IRET SSTP and STPE that error cannot perform a rew
106. 0 DT 90058 Set the time J IEF er n No values have been set in the default settings so the programming tool or another means must be used to specify the values As a day of the week is not automatically set on FPWIN GR fix what day is set to 00 and set each value for 00 to 06 2 6 3 Example Showing the Clock Calendar being Used Sample program for fixed schedule and automatic start In the example shown here the clock calendar function is used to output the YO signal for one second at 8 30 a m every day Here the Hour minute data stored in the special data register DT90053 is used to output the signal at the appointed time R9010 E ENEE Fso CMP DT90053 H amp 830 f Data comparison instruction 1 The value of the special data register DT90053 Hour 1 minute data is compared with the value of H830 8 30 J R900B RO _ oe PA _ A r Comparison match is output o RO TO YO s DF r Appointed time output pulse 1 second YO lt ee TMX 0 K10 The hour data is stored in the upper 8 bits of DI90053 and the minute data in the lower 8 bits in the BCD format This hour and minute data is compared with the appointed time BCD and the R900B flag special internal relay is used to detect whether or not it matches the appointed time 2 18 2 6 4 30 second Compensation Sample Program This is a program to perfo
107. 0200 to DT90201 DT90204 to DT90205 DT90044 to DT90045 DT90200 to DT90201 Target value area DT90046 to DT90047 DT90050 to DT90051 DT90202 to DT90203 DT90206 to DT90207 DT90046 to DT90047 DT90202 to DT90203 Reference For information on minimum input pulse width mum input pulse width Note2 Maximum counting speed Using 1 channel Max 50kHz x1 ch Using 2 channels Max 30kHz x2 ch Using 3 channels Max 20kHz x3 ch Using 4 channels Max 20kHz x4 ch Using 1 channel Max 20kHz x1 ch Using 2 channels Max 15kHz x2 ch Reset input X2 can be set to either CHO or CH1 Reset input X5 can be set to either CH2 or CHS Pulse output function Input output contact number used High speed counter channel No Indepen Li near DT9005 2 lt bit4 gt Elapsed value DT90044 to DT90045 DT90044 to DT90045 DT90200 to DT90201 DT90044 to DT90045 DT90200 to DT90201 Memory area used Target value area DT90046 to DT90047 DT90046 to DT90047 DT90202 to DT90203 DT90046 to DT90047 DT90202 to DT90203 polation Cir YO Y1 Ve cular Y3 Y4 Note3 Max output frequency Using one ch Max 100 kHz x1 ch Using two chs Max 60 kHz o ch Using linear interpolation Max 100 kHz Using circular interpolation Max 20 kHz Related instructions FO MV high speed counter control F1 DMV Read write of elapsed value of high speed
108. 1 S2 OR S2 D 1 D Double word S1 S2 S1 1 S1 AND S3 1 S3 OR a ee Ea unites S3 D 1 D Data conversion instructions Time data gt TMSEC S D The specified time data a date second PTMSEC and time is changed to the second conversion data Second SECTM S D The specified second data is data time PSECTM changed into time data a date and conversion time Available X Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP10SH cannot be used 2 This instruction is available for FP 32k type 3 This instruction is available for FPE C32T2 C28P2 C32T2H and C28P2H 4 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 5 This instruction is available for FP Ver 3 10 or later 6 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 1 13 or later 7 This instruction is available for FP10SH Ver 3 10 or later eee ee M 14 53 Boolean g Q J lt a i rand 16 bit binary GRY S D Converts the 16 bit binary data of data Gray PGRY S to gray codes and the x x code conversion converted result is stored in the D 32 bit binary data gt Gray code conversion converted result is stored in the D 1 D F237 16 bit gray code GBIN S D Converts the gray codes of S to E P237 binary data PGBIN binary data and the converted x conversion result is stored in the D
109. 10F X10E x100k ockt0Bhxt DAIX109 X1 08x107 x1 06x1 osx104 x 03 Battery error relay Battery voltage is normal X100 ON The battery voltage for memory backup decreased Or the memory backup SW is off Lights out Battery voltage is normal BATT LED Red Liahts The battery voltage for memory backup decreased J Or the memory backup SW is off POWER LED BATT LED o 4 O oO nn a G Note e f an error with a battery is detected backup the data within one month and replace the unit with a new one 3 12 Chapter 4 I O Allocation 4 1 I O Allocation FP control unit X0 XF YO YF FPO FPOR expansion unit X20 X3F Y20 Y3F X40 X5F Y40 Y5F X60 X7F Y60 Y7F Expansion unit 1 Expansion unit 2 l Expansion unit 3 FP expansion unit X100 X17F E it 1 Slot No Nee ee xpansion unit 1 Slot No 0 os stage i Expansion unit 2 Slot No 1 ee See Expansion unit 3 Slot No 2 ep peace bi l Expansion unit 4 Slot No 3 Note1 The usable I O numbers are different depending on the units Note2 FPG C32T and FPG C32TTM of the FP control unit are installed on the FPO expansion unit only Note3 Up to 2 units of FP gt positioning unit RTEX can be installed Regarding I O number e Specifying X and Y numbers On the FP and the FPO the same numbers are used for input and output Example lens gt The same numbers are used for input and output _ e Expr
110. 2 14 Usable thermister e Thermisters of which resistance values are within a range of 2000 to 75kQ Thermister type B constant Guide for Measuring range C 3390 K 50 to 100 C Shibaura 3450 K 50 to 150 C Electronics Co Ltd 4300 K 100 to 200 C 5133 K 150 to 300 C IEF ner ote e The length of the wiring between the FP control unit and the thermister should be less than 10m e A thin wire AWG28 length 150 mm is used for the leader line Connect and bundle the wire without any stress e It is recommended to mount parts such as condensers externally if the converted value is unstable 2 15 2 5 2 Loading of Thermister Temperature Data Reading the value of the FP special data register enables to load the analog value data that corresponds to the resistance value of the thermister Applicable special data register Symbol Thermister No Special data register Digital value after conversion Thermister 0 DT90040 Thermister 1 DT90041 KO to K1000 Thermister measuring temperature A D conversion table example 3450K e Work out the temperature and the thermister resistance value from the temperature characteristic table of the used thermister e The converted digital values can be calculated by the formula described in the previous page Temperature C scala so ian ae Resolution C 0 332 0 135 409 0 130 487 0 128 561 0 135 628 0 149 100 688 0 167 110 740 0 192 120 785 0
111. 252 Notused DT90253 Notused DT90254 Notused Unit No Station No DT90256 switch monitor for COM Used by the system port 14 32 14 2 Table of Basic Instructions mia Oo i G instructions Begins a logic operation with a Form A normally open contact ololololololo ais a logic T with a Form B aes roma Sas ora a efola olo olo YR Outputs the operated result to the specified CEE AE w p eee L ee instruction E CE Connects a Form A normally open contact Tolle serially 2 O CO 0 Olo Connects a Form B normally closed 1 ell ell ee _ il ULPE Connects a Form A normally open contact 1 a wae Wes Connects a Form B normally closed 1 el oN tll wee MI cee Mee contact in parallel B FP2SH FP10SH k ka c I I D O oO D D oO h i Y R T C L P anaa Begins a logic operation only for one scan Al edge start when the leading edge of the trigger is 2 X X Ol x detected 2 IE Begins a logic operation only for one scan al o STL H when the trailing edge of the trigger is 2 x x 218 edge start 2 detected 2 Leading Y H Connects a Form A normally open contact Al edge AND serially only for one scan when the leading 2 xl x Ol io olo edge of the trigger is detected 2 Trailing X Y R T C L P E Connects a Form A normally open contact Al edge AND ANI t serially only for one scan when the trailing 2 x io glg edge of the trigger is detected
112. 270 F271 P271 F272 P272 F273 P273 F275 P275 F276 P276 MAX PMAX DMAX PDMAX Maximum value double word data 32 bit K Minimum value word data 16 bit W S1 S2 D 2 Minimum value double word data 32 bit Total and mean values word data 16 bit Total and mean values double word data 32 bit DMEAN PDMEAN z F277 Sort word SORT S1 P277 data 16 bit PSORT S2 S3 Sort double DSORT S1 word data 32 PDSORT S2 bit S3 F278 P278 F282 Scaling of P282 16 bit data F283 Scaling of P283 32 bit data SCAL PSCAL DSCAL PDSCAL 1 S2 D S1 S2 D S1 S2 Searches the maximum value in the word data table between the S1 and S2 and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 1 Searches for the maximum value in the double word data table between the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 Searches for the minimum value in the word data table between the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 1 Searches for the minimum value in the double word data table between the area selected with S1 and S2 and stores it in the D The address relative to S1 is stored in D 2 The tota
113. 32C type communication cassette in the FPZ makes it possible to connect two devices with RS232C port A full lineup of communication functions means you can also work with 1 N communication up to 99 units and PC PLC link function up to 16 units Controlling two devices with RS232C port with one FPX When using the 2 channel RS232C type communication cassette Display panel Two devices with RS232C port can be connected Device with RS232C port The Tool port can be used to connect a display panel or other device Device with RS232C port 1 N communication possible with up to 99 stations units When using the 1 channel RS485 type communication cassette When using the 1 channel RS485 and 1 channel RS232C in combination Computer Communication is possible with up to 99 units FP gt FP gt FP gt No 1 No 2 No 3 Commercial adapter Data can be share among the various PLCs using the PC PLC link function When using the 1 channel RS485 type communication cassette When using the 1 channel RS485 and 1 channel RS232C combination type Data can be shared among up to 16 FP 2 units using the PC PLC link function R5485 PC PLC link function up to 16 units or 1 N communication up to 99 units with RS232C devices When using the 1 channel RS485 and 1 channel RS232C in combination Data can be shared among up to 16 FP 2 units using the PC PLC link function an Devices with Devices with Dev
114. 5ms DT90146 The minimum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90147 The maximum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90148 The number of times the receiving operation is performed DT90149 The current interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90150 The minimum interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 pms STOO EWN A enter eee Pelt ey URS Salus umber of times th T ration DT90152 32k type only esending OpETANON IS performed DT90153 The current interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90154 The minimum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90155 The maximum interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2 5ms 14 28 A Available N A Not available Register eas Read Writ Descriptions No ing ing DT90156 MEWNET Wo phils for measurement of receiving enn Area an for measurement of sendin A we DT90157 status ss g interval DT90158 MEWNET W0 Area used for measurement of receiving PC PLC link 1 interval A N A Status Area used for measurement of sending DT90159 32k type only interval MEWNET WO DT90160 PLC link unit No Stores the unit No of PLC link N A DT90161 E Stores the error contents of PLC link A N A PLC link error flag DT90162 to DT90170 Duplicated destination for
115. 7F X35F Pa XY64D2T Output Y100to Y180to Y260to Y340 to 32 points Y11F Y19F Y27F Y35F Input X100 to X180 to X260 to X340 to 1 axis type FPG PP11 16 points iaie X10F X18F X26F X34F Output Y100 to Y180 to Y260 to Y340 to Y10F Y18F Y26F Y34F FPG PP12 16 points Type of unit Positioning Input X10F X18F X26F X34F X11F X19F X27F X35F ae Output Y10F Y18F Y26F Y34F 32 points dae Y110 to Y190 to Y270 to Y350 to Y11F Y19F Y27F Y35F FPX oo poem Input Battery X100to X180to X260to X340 to 16 points error X10F X18F X26F X34F memory unit X17F X25F X33F X41F Y17F Y25F Y33F Y41F PEE ENEAN X100to X180to X260to X340 to a EPE a2 poni X17F X25F X33F X41 F Positioning FPG PN4AN Y17F Y25F Y33F Y41F 8 axis type Note FPG PN8AN TPI 128 points e Regarding FP CC Link slave unit please refer to the exclusive manual Note There is no restriction on installed positions however the number of installed units is up to 2 units FP S LINK unit 4 4 4 4 Allocation of FPO FPOR Expansion Unit The FPO FPOR expansion unit is installed on the right side of the FP2 control unit The I O numbers start with the lowest number at the expansion unit nearest the control unit and proceed in sequential order 4 4 1 VO Numbers of FP0 FPOR Expansion Unit e O do not need to be set as I O allocation is performed automatically when an expansion unit is added e The I O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the i
116. 8 ERR P148 Conti PERR nues instruction Description and steps to take Terminal station setting was not properly performed Check stations at both ends of the communication path and set them in the terminal station using the dip switches Set the INITIALIZE TEST selecto1inmjvogycfrde892 r to the INITIALIZE position while keeping the mode selector in the RUN position If the same error occurs after this please contact your dealer Abnormality was detected when the multi CPU system was used Please contact your dealer The voltage of the backup battery for the IC memory card lowered The BATT LED does not turn on Charge or replace the backup battery of IC memory card The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed The voltage of the backup battery for IC memory card lowers The BATT LED does not turn on Charge or replace the backup battery of IC memory card The contents of the IC memory card cannot be guaranteed The IC memory card installed is not compatible Replace the IC memory card compatible with FP2SH FP10SH MEWNET W2 MCU The MEWNET W2 link unit or MCU Multi communication unit is not installed in the slot specified using the configuration data Either install a unit in the specified slot or change the parameter The error specified by the F148 ERR P148 PERR instruction is occurred gt Take steps to clear the error condition according to the specification you chose
117. 8digits Protect Close Available retry counts 3 counts digit number C 4 digits Hex 8 digits alphanumeric Match case Operation Mode Access Protect C Unprotect 8 digits password Enter in alphanumeric Setting for FP memory loader option V Allow the download to older than Version 3 2 r r Click Yes If the current status is Password is not set this procedure has completed All programs and security information were Set PLC Password Untitlel PLC Home Settings Current status Password is not set Close Available retry counts 3 counts d e eted p digit number C 4 digits Hex 8 digits alphanumeric Match case Operation Mode Access Protect C Unprotect 8 digits password Enter in alphanumeric Setting for FP memory loader option V Allow the download to older than Version 3 2 r m 8 2 2 Password Setting For FP 12k Type Only The following functions are not available for the FP 16k type 1 8 digit password 2 Function to display the current state of a password Setting the Password protect function Set PLC Pa Ana As the dialog box is shown select as below E EE Operation Mode a on Closs Select Protect Access Force Cancel Protect Unprotect ree Help 4 digits password Input a password to be set Password Enter in hex E Click Settings Input the password for confirmation again and lick OK Ent
118. 900B on S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 gt R900C on 16 bit data band S1 S2 S1 gt S3 gt R900A on compare amw S S2 lt or S1 lt or S3 R9OOB on S1 lt S2 R900C on O Available Not available Not available partially D 1 D 1 D 1 D 14 43 Boo Ope lean rand 32 bit data DWIN S1 S2 band PDWIN S3 compare F64 P64 Logic operation instructions F66 P66 F67 P67 16 bit data exclusive OR 16 bit data exclusive NOR 16 bit data unite XOR 1 S2 D PXOR XNR S1 S2 D PXNR F68 P68 F69 P69 Data conversion instructions compare PBCMP S3 S AND PWAN OR PWOR FPX FP2SH FP10SH S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 gt R900A on S2 1 S2 lt or S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 gt R900B on S141 S1 lt S24 1 S2 R900C on Compares the two blocks beginning with 2 and S3 to see if they are equal S1 AND S2 OR S1 AND S2 D S1 AND S2 OR S1 AND S2 gt D S1 AND S3 OR S2 AND S3 D When S3 is HO S2 gt D When S3 is HFFFF S1 D WUNI 1 S2 PWUNI S3 D F70 Block check BCC S1 S2 P70 code PBCC S3 D calculation F71 Hexadecima HEXA S1 S2 D P71 data gt PHEXA ASCII code F72 ASCII code P72 Hexadeci mal data F73 P73 AHEX 1 S2 D PAHEX BCDA S1 S2 D PBCDA ABCD S1 S2 D PABCD BINA S1 S2 D PBINA 4 digit BCD data gt ASCII code F74 P74
119. AFPG806 COM4 use the wires of the same cross sectional area which is 0 5 to 0 75 mm 7 17 7 4 Communication Function 1 Computer Link 7 4 1 Computer Link Overview Computer Command message Response message Computer link e The computer link function is to communicate between a computer and PLCs or between PLC and external devices connected A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL COM is used for communicating with the computer link MEWTOCOL COM is also used for the communication between the tool software such as FPWIN GR and the PLC e There are a MEWTOCOL master function and a MEWTOCOL slave function for the computer link The side that issues commands is called master and the side that receives the commands executes the process and sends back responses is called slave IES er Note It is necessary to set the system register of the communication port to the computer link for using this function 1 Only the slave function is available for the FP 12k type 2 Both the master and slave functions are available for the FP2 32k type however the master function is not available for the TOOL port 7 18 MEWTOCOL master function 32k type only e This function is to carry out the communication on the master side side Othat issues commands of the computer link It is executed with the PLC s instruction F145 SEND or F146 RECV It is not necessary to write the response process as a ladder
120. ASCII code 4 digit BCD data F75 P75 16 bit binary data gt ASCII code Creates the code for checking the data specified by S2 and S3 and stores it in D The calculation method is specified by S1 ee Converts the hexadecimal data specified by S1 and S2 to ASCII code and stores it in D Example HABCD gt H 42 41 44 43 Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and S2 to hexadecimal data and stores it in D Example H 44 43 42 41 HCDAB DC BA Converts the four digits of BCD data specified by S1 and S2 to ASCII code and stores it in D Example H1234 H 32 31 34 33 Converts the ASCII code specified by S1 and S2 to four digits of BCD data and stores it in D Example H 34 33 32 31 gt H3412 432 1 Converts the 16 bits of binary data specified by S1 to ASCII code and stores it in D area of S2 bytes 001 Available X Not available Not available partially 14 44 Boo lean FPX i Oo rand S1 S2 Converts the ASCII code specified by D S1 and S2 to 16 bits of binary data and stores it in D ASCII code gt 16 bit binary data ABIN P76 PABIN 001 Converts the 32 bits of binary data S1 1 F77 DBIA PDBIA 32 bit binary data gt ASCII code 1 S2 D S1 to ASCII code and stores it in D area of S2 bytes S1
121. AZ2 L Ixo Home sensor Near home sensor Program XA R903A R42 R40 O E 5 DF f Positioning operation running J R40 SO R40 R41 N ee eee HoF f Positioning operation start J R4i Positioning data table H F omv Hna DT200 Control code Fi omv K200 DT 202 Initial speed Fi omv k 2000 0T 206 Maximum speed Acceleration time 150 ms Fi omv K150 0T 206 oa 5 Fi omv Ko 0T 208 z Duty 1 4 25 48 Hz to 100 kHz Home return CW F171 SPDH DT 200 KO F F Pulse outputinstructon table shaped control The data table headed by DT200 is used and pulses are output from CHO ____ Pulses are output from CHO R903A R40 TO R42 e n Weems S bee A ees Hor f Positioning done pulse 1 second R42 TMX 0 K10 0 1 s type timer 7 Setting K10 and using it as a 1 s timer_ xO Ss aes F f Hor Hro mv Hio DT 90052 f Near home deceleration stat J Fo MV HO DT 90052 Pulse output diagram Near home sensor XA ON x0 ON Home sensor x ON 2000 Hz 200 Hz Hz i z 150 ms 150 ms 6 33 Sample program Home return operation using CH2 Plus direction When XB turns on a pulse is output from CW output Y3 of the specified channel CH2 and the return to home begins When X3 turns on deceleration begins and when X5 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value areas DT90200 and DT90201 are cleared to 0 0 V 24 V DC FPE i
122. Absolute Data table DT 2 Composite speed initial DT 4 Composite speed maximum for linear OT 6 Acceleration deceleration time DT 40 Control code DT 42 Composite speed OT 44 Target position ch DT 46 Target position ch2 DT 48 Pass position ch DT 50 Pass position ch2 DT 60 i Control code composite speed setting base Pass position setting Composite speed Target position setting Pass position setting Center setting DT 62 Composite speed Composite speed DT 64 Target speed ch DT 66 Target speed chz DT 66 Cetner position ch0 DT 70 Cetner position ch2 Target position setting Center position setting LJ wW oI bY J LEJ Lg Lo bb Le bd Continued on the next page Composite speed setting Acceleration deceleration time Positioning data table From P1 to P2 and from P3 to P4 Control code Absolute Composite speed 2000 Hz Acceleration deceleration time 0 ms Positioning data table From P4 to Pi Control code stop mode Pass position setting from CHO CVV to CH2 CVV direction Absolute CVW CCW Composite speed 2000 Hz Target position 0 0 Pass position 5000 5000 Positioning data table From P2 to P3 Control code Stop mode Center position setting from CHO CWV to CH2 CWV direction Absolute CW CCW Composite speed 2000 Hz Target position 10000 10000 Center position 10000 5000
123. C NET adapter is connected with the RS485 interface Note4 The start code and end code can be used only in the general purpose serial communication mode Note5 The converter SI 35 manufactured by Lineeye Co Ltd is recommendable for the RS485 at the computer side Adjust the response time for the FP X by the SYS1 instruction if necessary Note6 Regarding the setting of unit numbers When the unit number setting switch is 0 the system register is effective When the unit number setting switch is other than 0 the unit number setting switch is effective and the unit number setting of the system register is ignored Max 31 units can be specified with the unit number setting switch When the setting is specified with the unit number setting switch the COM port 1 and the COM port 2 has the same unit number Note7 Connect the terminal and the terminal with a lead wire to make the termination resistance of the AFPG803 effective The termination resistance of the AFPG806 is specified by the dip switch in the communication cassette There is no termination resistance at the RS232C port Note8 The RS485 port of the AFPG806 is either 19200 bps or 115200 bps only Also the baud rate must be identically set by the system register and the dip switch in the communication cassette The baud rate for the PC PLC link mode is fixed at 115200 bps The baud rate for the RS232C port of the AFPG806 can be set by the system register only
124. CD data when an instruction handling BCD is executed or BCD conversion is attempted on data which is not within the possible conversion range 3 Parameter error In an instruction requiring the specification of control data the specified data is outside the possible range 4 Over area error The data manipulated by a block instruction exceeds the memory range 11 4 2 Operation Mode When an Operation Error Occurs e Normally the operation stops when an operation error occurs e When you set system register 26 to continuation the control unit operates even if an operation error occurs Using programming tool software 1 Set the mode of the CPU to PROG 2 Select the Option in PLC Configuration option from the menu bar 3 On the PLC Configuration menu select Action on error This displays system registers 20 to 26 4 Remove the check of system register 26 5 Press the OK to write the setting to the PLC 11 4 3 Dealing with Operation Errors lt Procedure gt 1 Check the location of the error Check the address where the error occurred which is stored in DT90017 and DT90018 and make sure the high level instruction for that address is correct and appropriate 2 Clear the error Use a programming tool to clear the error e Select Online gt Status Display in the menu bar Execute Clear Error e An error can be cleared by turning the power off and on in PROG mode
125. CR CR LF None Header STX not exist STX exist Communication 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps speed Baud rate 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps setting 115200 bps Starting address for received buffer of general serial data OO garoa communication mode Buffer capacity setting for data received of general 0 to 2048 serial data communication mode 410 Unit No setting 1 1t099 Computer link Communication l General purpose serial communication mode setting Computer link BC PLC link MODBUS RTU Selection of modem l Enter the settings for the various items Data length bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity check none with odd with even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits The following setting is valid only when the communication mode specified by system register 412 has been set to General purpose serial communication Terminator CR CR LF None Header STX not exist STX exist Communication 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps speed Baud rate 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps setting 115200 bps Starting address for received buffer of general serial data 010 38 04 communication mode Buffer capacity setting for data 417 received of general 2048 0 to 2048 serial data communication mode Note The communication format in a PLC link is fixed at the following settings Data length is 8 bits odd parity stop bit is 1 The communication speed baud rate is fixed at 115200 bps The
126. F Y33F Y41F 128 points X17F X25F X33F X41F SS FPG PN8AN Z FP 2 axis type Y100 to Y180 to Y260 to Y340 to Y17F Y25F Y33F Y41F 8 axis type Positioning FPG PN4AN unit RTEX 4 axis type Note There is no restriction on installed positions however the number of installed units is up to 2 units e Regarding FP CC Link slave unit please refer to the exclusive manual Y100 to Y180 to Y260 to Y340 to Y11F Y19F Y27F Y35F Output 32 points Output 128 points 12 12 I O No of FPO expansion unit for right side expansion e O numbers do not need to be set as I O allocation is performed automatically by the PLC when an expansion I O unit is added e The I O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location Expansion Expansion Expansion FPO E8X Input 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67 FPO E8R Input 4 points X20 to X23 X40 to X43 X60 to X63 Output 4 points Y20 to Y23 Y40 to Y43 Y60 to Y63 FPO E8YT P l FPO E8YR Output 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67 eae FPO E16R FPO E16T P chO X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F unit ch1 X30 to X3F X50 to X5F X70 to X7F Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F WX2 WX4 X6 FPO A D Input 16 points W converter unit FP0 A80 chO 2 4 6 X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F FPO FPO TC4 unit ch1 3 5 7 X30 to X3F X50 to X5F X70 to X7F CHO 2 4 X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F
127. F156 instruction FPWIN GR Read Trace data Sure J Read Sample Trace Window Reading sample trace data Please waitfor a while Pef Reference lt FPWIN GR Help gt 9 5 9 6 Chapter 10 Self Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 10 1 Self Diagnostic function 10 1 1 LED Display for Status Condition Status a LEDs on control unit LEDstatus sid status Operation ERROR Description sau ALARM Nena Enon on Normal Nemal ene se _ condition Off Light on PROG mode Forcing on off in Run mode Light on Paie When a self diagnostic error occurs Abnormal Light on Flashes When a self diagnostic error Stop condition occurs System watchdog timer has e The control unit has a self diagnostic function which identifies errors and stops operation if necessary Status e When an error occurs the status of the status indicator i LEDs on the control unit vary as shown in the table above Operation Oo zo ao a 70 o a m Oo o 10 1 2 Operation on Error e Normally when an error occurs the operation stops e The user may select whether operation is to be continued or stopped when a duplicated output error or operation error occurs by setting the system registers You can set the error which operation is to be continued or stopped using the programming tool software as shown below PLC System Register setting menu on programmin
128. FF Control is carried out using one pulse Forwara Reverse output to specify the speed and another to specify the direction of Pulse Pulse vot OOU L FLAELALE LE rotation with onoff signals In this YS mode forward rotation is carried out Rotation y1 ON OFF when the rotation direction signals is direction Sign Y4 ON Incremental counting Decremental counting Operation mode Incremental lt Relative value control gt Outputs the pulses set with the target value Selected Mode Positive Negative Example Cw CCW Pulse output from CW Pulse output from CCW Pulse and direction forward OFF reverse ON Pulse output when direction output is OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Pulse and direction forward ON reverse OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Pulse output when direction output is OFF HSC counting Method Decremental When the current position value of elapsed value area is 5000 the pulse of 1000 is output from CW by executing the pulse output instruction with the target value 1000 and the current position will be 6000 Absolute lt Absolute value control gt Outputs a number of pulses equal to the difference between the set target value and the current value Selected Mode Target value greater than current value Target value less than current value Example Cw CCW Pulse output from CW Pulse output from CCW Pulse and dir
129. FP Ver 3 10 or later 14 55 FPX FP X FP2SH FP10SH i F286 Upper and DLIMT S1 S2 When S1 1 S1 gt 83 1 S3 S1 1 P286 lower limit PDLIMT S3 D S1 gt D 1 D control When S2 1 nN S3 1 S3 S2 1 32 bit data S2 D 1 D When S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 lt or S2 1 S2 S3 1 S3 gt D 1 D F287 Deadband BAND S1 S2 When S1 gt S3 S3 S1 D P287 control PBAND S3 D When S2 lt S3 S3 S2 D 16 bit data When S1 lt or S3 lt or S2 OD F288 Deadband DBAND S1 S2 When S1 1 S1 gt S3 1 S3 S3 1 P288 control PDBAND S3 D S3 S1 1 S 1 gt D 1 D 32 bit data When S2 1 S2 lt S3 1 S3 S3 1 S3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D When S1 1 S1 lt or S3 1 S3 lt or S2 1 S2 0 D 1 D F289 Zone control Prone 33 S2 When S38 lt 0 S3 S1 D When S350 S3 S2 D F290 Zone control baal S1 S2 When S3 1 S3 lt 0 S3 1 P290 32 bit data PDZONE S3 D S3 S1 1 S1 D 1 D When S3 1 S3 0 0 gt D 1 D When S3 1 S3 gt 0 S3 1 S3 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D BCD type real number operation instructions ia P300 operation PBSIN BCD type BCOS S D COS S1 1 S1 D 1 D cosine PBCOS operation BCD type BTAN S D TAN S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D tangent PBTAN operation BCD type BASIN S D SIN S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D arcsine PBASIN operation F304 BCD type BACOS S D COS S1 1 S1 D 1 D P304 arccosine PBACOS operation BCD type BATA
130. Floating point type EXP S D EXP S 1 S D 1 D data exponent PEXP P322 aata iogan o proa o data logarithm PLOG PWR S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 44 data power PPWR S2 D D Samon EC data square root PFSQR V S 1 S gt D 1 D H Eg 16 bit integer data to FLT S D Converts the 16 bit integer data floating point type PFLT with sign specified by S to real OjO data conversion number data and the converted data is stored in D 32 bit integer data to DFLT S D Converts the 32 bit integer data floating point type PDFLT a data conversion ll ea D S D S D Boo Ope ae P Description lean rand S oO oO Z 1 J B Eg Ea 1 aa with sign specified by S 1 S to real number data and the converted data is stored in D 1 F327 Floating point type INT Converts real number data P327 data to 16 bit integer PINT specified by S 1 S to the 16 con version the bit integer data with sign the largest integer not largest integer not exceeding the exceeding the floating point data and the floating point type converted data is stored in D data F328 Floating point type DINT Converts real number data P328 data to 32 bit integer PDINT specified by S 1 S to the 32 con version the bit integer data with sign the largest integer not largest integer not exceeding the exceeding the floating point data and the floating point type converted data is stored in D 1 data D QO A
131. HTM unction points PNP C28P2HTM l FPG Input 16 points Relay output 8 points C24R2HTM AFPG2423HTM Note The FP expansion I O unit cannot be added to FPG C32TH nor FRG C32THTM FP control unit 1 6 1 2 2 FP Expansion Units Name Specifications PartNo ProductNo Manual Input 32 points Transistor FPG XY64D2T AFPG3467 FP Expansion output 32 points NPN I O unit Input 32 points Transistor This manual output 32 points PNP FPG XY64D2P AFPG3567 Transistor output 1 axis type FPG PP11 AFPG430 FPG PP21 AFPG431 FPZ _ ransistor output axis type G G43 ARCTIF365E Positioning unit Line driver output 1 axis type FPG PP12 AFPG432 Line driver output 2 axis type FPG PP22 AFPG433 FPZ 2 axis type FPG PN2AN AFPG43610 Positioning unit 4 axis type FPG PN4AN AFPG43620 ARCT1F421E RTEX 8 axis type FPG PN8AN AFPG43630 FPX S LINK unit a CHEN PO Sew epee AFPG780 ARCT1F403E Number of points of exchanged data with CC Link master station be erik Max 224 points Input 112 FPG CCLS AFPG7943 ARCT1F380E Slave unit points output 112 point Writing max 16 word data 4 word data PE Z ERRANS OR Iie 256koye FPG EM1 AFPG201 data memory unit Note The FP expansion I O unit cannot be added to FPG C32T nor FPG C32TTM FP control unit 1 2 3 FPOR Expansion Units Specifications Connection type 8 points 24V DC MIL AFPORE8X Input 8 points common connector Product name No of I O points Product No
132. LC link 0O Oto 64 words Range of link data registers used for PC PLC link 0 O0Oto128words 0 Starting number for link relay transmission 0 to 63 Link relay transmission size 0 0 to 64 words Starting number for link data register transmission 0 0to 127 Link data register transmission size 0 0 to 128 words 46 PC PLC link switch flag Normal Normal 1st half Reverse 2nd half Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET WO 1 to 16 PC PLC link 46 PC PLC link switch flag Normal Normal 1st half Reverse 2nd half Range of link relays used for PC PLC link 0 0to64words Range of link data registers used for PC PLC link 0 Oto128words 53 Link relay transmission size O Oto64words 55 Link data register transmission size O Oto128 words 57 Maximum unit number setting for MEWNET W0 Oto 16 PC PLC link Note1 The same maximum unit number should be specified for all the PLCs connected in the PC PLC link Link area configuration word word Ao Ao For PC link 0 L for 1024 points 1st half For PC link 0 LD for 128 words 1st half 63 127 I 64 I 128 For PC link 1 L for 1024 points 2nd halt For PC link 1 LD for 128 words 2nd halt 255 For link relay For link register e Link areas consist of link relays and link registers and are divided into areas for PC PLC link 0 and PC PLC link 1 and used with those units e The link relay which can
133. N S D TAN S1 1 S1 gt D 1 D arctangent PBATAN operation Floating point type real number operation a He Pii ee a 2 en svers Ts Tal P309 type data move PFMV P310 Floating point S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D afg type data PF addition Pon Floating point ea S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D Bo type data D 14 a F subtraction Em Floating point S1 1 S1 x S2 1 S2 D 1 D Bo m type data PF D 14 w multiplication ao Floating point S1 1 S1 S2 1 2 D 1 D Bo type data PF D 14 fal division Available X Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 2 or later 2 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or later FPO V2 1 or later oh P i I O O C C amp C 14 56 FPX FP2SH FP10SH Floating point type D SIN S 1 S gt D 1 D data sine operation Floating point type COS S D COS S 1 S gt D 1 D data cosine PCOS operation Floating point type TAN S D TAN S 1 S gt D 1 D a See a p p operation F317 Floating point type S D SIN S 1 S gt D 1 D P317 data arcsine operation F318 Floating point type ACOS S D COS S 1 S gt D 1 D P318 data arccosine PACOS operation Floating point type ATAN S D TAN S 1 S gt D 1 D data arctangent PATAN operation Floating point type LN S D LN S 1 S gt D 1 D data natural PLN logarithm
134. No 415 Baud rate setting for COM2 port 2400 to 115200 bps No 418 Starting address for receive buffer for DTO to DT32764 Initial value DT2048 COM2 port No 419 Receive buffer capacity for COM2 port 0 to 2048 words Initial value 2048 words Settings for TOOL port FP 32k type only No Name Set Value No 412 TOOL port selection of communication General purpose serial communication mode No 413 Communication format for TOOL port Data length 7 bits 8 bits Parity check None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Terminator CR CR LF None ETX Header No STX STX No 420 Starting address for receive buffer for DTO to DT32764 Initial value DTO TOOL port No 421 Receive buffer capacity for TOOL port O to 2048 words Initial value 0 words Note The TOOL port becomes the computer link automatically in the PROG mode even if the general purpose serial communication has been set It is always possible to communicate with the tool software such as FPWIN GR in the PROG mode 7 5 4 1 N Communication General purpose Serial Communication Overview The FP and the external units are connected using an RS485 cable Using the protocol that matches the external units the F159 MTRN instruction is used to send and receive data FPY Data register DT E Transmitted data Data transmission using F159 MTRN Received data a Data is received into receive b
135. OPS MEWNET F I O map error Re configure the I O map correctly A Available 14 66 Opera tion Description and steps to take D status A LL LL I O mapping for remote I O terminal ee ee elas I O terminal units and I O link is not correct terminal Stops Re configure the I O map for slave stations eae mapping l l error according to the I O points of the slave stations When reading in the program from the IC memory card due to automatic reading because of the dip switch setting or program switching due to F14 PGRD instruction IC memory card is not installed There is no program file or it is damaged IC card Writing is disabled read error Stops There is an abnormality in the ais AUTOEXEC SPG file Program size stored on the card is larger than the capacity of the CPU gt lnstall an IC memory card that has the program properly recorded and execute the read once again Abnormal I O unit FP x FP X Check the contents of special data register DT90002 and abnormal FP expansion unit application cassette for FP X Then check the unit FP2 and FP2SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90002 DT90003 and abnormal I O unit Then check the unit Selection of operation status using system register21 to continue operation set 1 to stop operation set 0 I O error Sele Verification is possible in FPWIN GR Pro at AIAILAIAIA ctable O error in the status display function
136. P control unit Status of security set protection password password Upload protection A A A 4 digit password A A __NA Sets Cancels pii A Available N A Not available le Note The following functions are not available for the FP 12k type 8 digit password Upload protection 8 15 8 16 Chapter 9 Other Functions 9 1 P13 ICWT Instruction Data registers of 32765 words can be stored and used in the built in ROM F ROM data area control unit using the P13 ICWT instruction However note the followings for the use 1 Restrictions on the number of writing Writing can be performed within 10000 times If writing continues for more than that the correct operation cannot be guaranteed 2 The power supply turns off when the P13 ICWT instruction is being executed If the power supply turns off during this instruction is being executed the hold type area may not be kept Also when the power is shut off during rewriting in the RUN mode the same event may occur 9 2 9 2 Sampling Trace Function 32k Type Only 9 2 1 Overview The FP control unit Ver3 10 and later versions support the sampling trace function Using this function enables to take samplings and record accumulate the state of arbitrary data of 16 bits 3 data registered in the PLC at an arbitrary timing and to examine the changes in the bit and data in details after stopping sampli
137. PC PLC link always specify the baud rate at 115200 bps Backside of cassette 7 9 7 2 Communication Specifications Communication Specifications Computer link 1 1 communi cation 1 N communi cation General purpose serial communication 1 1 communi cation Note1 9 1 N communi cation Taraet AFPG 801 fe AFPG 802 AFPG 806 Half duplex communi cation Commu nication method AFPG 803 AFPG 806 Two wire half duplex communi cation AFPG 801 AFPG 802 AFPG 806 Half duplex communi cation AFPG 803 AFPG 806 Two wire half duplex communi cation PC PLC link RS232C Note RS485 AFPG 801 AFPG 802 AFPG 803 AFPG 806 Token bus Floating master MODBUS RTU 1 1 communi cation RS232C AFPG 801 AFPG 802 AFPG 806 Half duplex communi cation 1 N communi cation RS485 AFPG 803 AFPG 806 Two wire half duplex communi cation Note1 Although it has adequate tolerance to noise it is recommendable to make the user program to execute retransmission in order to improve reliability of the communication when a communication error occurs due to excessive noises or when a receiver equipment cannot receive data temporarily Note2 The number of units of the PC PLC link with RS232C is two Communication specifications Item Specifications RS232C non isolated RS485 isolated M 1 N communication Ba
138. R2 Expansion unit FPG XY64D2T Tool software FPWIN Pro Ver 4 3 edition Additions Control units FPG C28P2 PNP output Thermistor input function type part nmber ending in TM Expansion units Add information about inteligent units 4 edition Additions Communication cassette AFPG806 Expansion unit FPG XY64D2P PNP type Expansion Data Memory Unit FPG EM1 Change of a chapter Communication cassette Computer Link General purpose Serial communication PLC link Chapter7 Communication cassette 5 edition Additions FP 32k Type 6 edition 7 edition Function addition only of FPE 32k Type Ver 3 10 or more 8 edition 9 edition Change in Corporate name 10 edition 11 edition Change in Corporate name 11 edition Please contact Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd E Overseas Sales Division Head Office 2431 1 Ushiyama cho Kasugai shi Aichi 486 0901 Japan E Telephone 81 568 33 7861 W Facsimile 81 568 33 8591 panasonic net id pidsx global About our sale network please visit our website Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd 2013 July 2013 PRINTED IN JAPAN ARCT1F333E 11
139. R97 to the hold area WR248 to WR255 And prepares for holding data when the power turns off WR90 WR97 WR248 WR255 xiii Compatibility with FPO Program compatibility The following points require attention if using FPO programs on the FP e Pulse output function With the FP please be aware that the following changes have been made to instructions concerning pulse output Instruction For FPO For FPZ Trapezoidal control F168 SPD1 F171 SPDH Jog feed F169 PLS F172 PLSH Linear interpolation control F175 SPSH Circular interpolation control SPCH Se PWM output F170 PWM F173 PWMH Availability of linear and circular interpolation control is limited depending on the types of FP Control Unit C32H C32HTM C32T2H C382T2HTM C28P2H C28P2HTM C24R2H C24R2HTM e Serial data communication function With the FP please be aware that the following changes have been made to instructions concerning serial data communication ForFPOU O For FPS Serial data communication F144 TRNS F159 MTRN Note The F159 MTRN instruction is used only with an FP in which the conventional F144 TRNS instruction has been set up to correspond to multiple communication ports Please be aware that the conventional F144 TRNS instruction cannot be used with the FP XIV Manuals to be Used Necessary manuals vary according to the unit used Check the following table and prepare required manuals Unit type
140. RS232C port Communication FPG COM2 AFPG802 RS232C type with two external devices is possible FP Communication This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit cassette 1 channel with a two wire RS485 port RS485 type FP Communication This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit cassette 1 channel with a two wire RS485 port and a 1 channel unit RS485 type amp 1 channel with a three wire RS232C port ee AEP OES RS232C type 1 9 1 2 6 Link Units Power Product name Specifications supply i voltage This is a link unit designed to l i make the FPO function as a slave FPO I O Link unit unit to MEWNET F remote I O 24V DC FPO IOL AFP0732 This manual system This unit is for making the FPO function as a slave unit of the CC Link Only one unit can be FPO CC Link connected to the furthest right 24V DC FPO CCLS AFP07943 ARCT1F380 Slave unit edge of the FPO expansion bus Note Accuracy will change if an FPO thermocouple unit is used at the same time This is an RS485 adapter 100 to 240V AFP8536 designed to allow use of the AC C NET Adapter computer link function for For computer ide connecting to a network ii connected PLC via C NET froma 24V DC AFP8532 host computer FP Web Server2 This is a unit to conduct Ethernet connection for unit FP series PLCs and RS232C devices It is FP WEB2 AFP0611 ARCT1F446 equipped with web and mail functions 1 2 7 Power Supply Unit Specifications PartNo Pro
141. Restrictions Type of unit FPG C32T2 FPG C32T2H FPG C28P2 FPG C28P2H Type of programming tool FPG C32T FPG C24R2 FPG C32TH FPG C24R2H FPT C32TTM FPG C32T2TM FPG C32THTM FPG C32T2HTM FPG C28P2TM FPG C28P2HTM FPG C24R2TM FPG C24R2HTM Used Used Used Used Ver 2 1 or Ver 2 6 or Ver 2 6 or later later later FPWIN GR Windows Ver 2 software Windows software FPWIN Pro Conforms to Ver 6 IEC61131 3 AFP1113V2 AFP1113 programming M AFP1111A male AFP1112A AFP1111 AFP1112 Used Used Used Not used Not used Not used Not used ote Precautions concerning version upgrade In case of using FPWIN GR Ver 1 please purchase upgrade model FPWIN GR Ver 2 FPWIN GR Ver 2 0 can be upgraded to Ver 2 1 or later free of charge at our web site FPWIN Pro Ver 6 0 can be upgraded to Ver 6 1 or later free of charge at our web site Website address http industrial panasonic com ac e dl_center software Changing Program from 12k Type to 32k Type Program compatibility Between the 12k type and the 32k type the number of internal relays and the hold type areas backed up in the F ROM area when the power turns off differ as the figure shown below When a battery for memory backup is used the hold type area can be set by system registers regardless of the areas shown below 12k type 32k type Internal relay areas Internal relay areas WRO to WR97 WRO to WR255 Hold type area 128 points 8 words R900 to RIF
142. S iieri a a a aaa aai 13 1 1S DIMENSIONS cee based eesti emer e botnet a Oration ueuaac A a a 13 2 13 2 Connection Diagram with Motor Driver cccceeeeesssseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeneensnneeeees 13 5 13 3 FPO Power Supply Unit AFPO634 scsssscsecessssssssesesesesesesscseseseserenscscsesessnensneeneees 13 6 13 4 Cable Adapter SpeECIN CANONS sisiocfectictictccaiee erdeetectinwenedeutivetchaniidetedesbastuntendeieislane 13 7 14 PAD DOIIGIX iniisa anaana aA A AAEE AE AAE AAAA Er AOE PAPAE AENEA PEAREN 14 1 14 1 System Registers Special Internal Relays Special Data Registers 14 2 14 2 Table Of Basic NSUTUCHONS casen a a a 14 33 14 3 Table of High level Instructions cccceecesessseeesceensseeeeeoesseeeeseeenseeeeseoenseeessooeaes 14 41 14 4 Table Of Error COd S vinis a a EE a a AE 14 61 14 5 MEWTOCOL COM Communication COMMANAS cccccceeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 74 14 6 Hexadecimal Binaly BCD isecscisessecdecciceipeceasce cetecsantantewessusiviedtuataresdvisctaxdanteassdetiecesiaes 14 75 WAT SCI COGCS anc a naal Seca a a A A aa EA 14 76 Before You Start Operating environment Use the unit within the range of the general specifications when installing Ambient temperatures 0 55 C Ambient humidity 30 to 85 RH at 25 C non condensing Keep the height below 2000m For use in pollution Degree 2 environment Do not use it in the following environments
143. S2 AND gt Connects a Form A normally open contact fp 5152 5 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 AND gt Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 or S141 S1 S2 1 S2 AND lt Connects a Form A normally open contact p04 5152 5 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 AND lt Connects a Form A normally open contact D 1 82 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the L L comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S 1 S2 1 S2 32 bit Connects a Form A normally open contact in po 1 82 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the data comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 compare ORD lt gt OR D gt S1 82 ile el Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 ORD gt Connects a Form A normally open contact in pb 1 82 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 gt Sl rr al s2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 po
144. STX No 415 Baud rate Baud rate setting for COM1 port for COM1 port 115200 bps Note The baud rate of the AFPG806 must be identically set to 115200 bps by the system register and the dip switch located in the communication cassette l2 a Reference lt 7 1 4 Setting of AFPG806 Switch gt Unit no and communication mode settings Setting for unit no 1 No Name Sette No 410 COM1 port unit no No 412 COM1 port selection of communication mode PC PLC link Setting for unit no 2 No Name Sette No 410 COM1 port unit no No 412 COM1 port selection of communication mode PC PLC link Setting for unit no 3 po Name Sette No 410 COM1 port unit no No 412 COM1 port selection of communication mode PC PLC link gy Key Point Make sure the same unit number is not used for more than one of the PLCs connected through the PC PLC link function 7 62 Link area allocation Link relay allocation FPE FPE FPE Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 WLO N Ties N i WLO a Send area gt e 19 19 Recelve area No 2 i 39 20 Receive area 40 40 muh No 3 Receive area i Send area 53 63 mame ae ae Range of link relays used for PC PLC link Start address of link relay send area o n 0 ee eee ee Size of link relay send area Link register allocation 53 FPE FPE FPE Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 i F Receive area al Receive area a
145. Start address of link register send area 40 Size of link register send area 40 40 48 o Note No 41 range of link registers must be set to the same range for all the units When link areas are allocated as shown above the send area of unit no 1 can be transmitted to the receive areas of units no 2 3 and 4 Also the receive area of unit no 1 can receive data from the send areas of units no 2 and 3 Unit no 4 is allocated as a receive area only and can receive data from units no 1 2 and 3 but cannot send data to other units 7 56 For PC PLC link 1 For FP 32k type only Link relay allocation FP 32k FP2 FP2SH FPS 32k Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 o l 1 1 Send area Receive area T Receive area Send area Receive area Receive area r Receive area Send area Range of link relays used Starting No of word for link relay transmission 53 Link relay transmission size Note No 50 range of link relays used must be set to the same range for all the units Link register allocation FPX 32k FP2 FP25H FP 32k Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit mo 4 LDI28 167 168 Receive area System registers 51 _ Range of link registers used ES Starting No for link register transmission 40 40 48 0 Link register transmission size Note No 51 range of link registers used must be set to the same range for all the units When link areas are allo
146. T100 KO as shown below Data table DT100 Control code 1 K1 DT101 Duty 2 50 1 Specify the control code by setting the K constant Resolution of 1000 Resolution of 100 156K 006 0 96 6 58 2 specification of duty specify using K constant If the control code is KO to K19 the duty is KO to K999 0 0 to 99 9 If the control code is K20 to K24 the duty is KO to K990 0 to 99 Values are specified in units of 1 K10 digits behind the decimal point are rounded off Note e f a value outside the specified range is written to the duty area while the instruction is being executed a frequency corrected to the maximum value is output If written when instruction execution is started an operation error is occurred 6 59 6 60 Chapter 7 Communication Cassette 7 1 Functions and Types 7 1 1 Functions of Communication Cassette With the optional communication cassette the FP offers three different communication modes computer link general purpose serial communication and PC PLC link Computer link e The computer link function is to communicate between a computer and PLCs or between PLC and external devices connected A proprietary MEWNET protocol called MEWTOCOL COM is used for communicating with the computer link MEWTOCOL COM is also used for the communication between the tool software such as FPWIN GR and the PLC e There are a MEWTOCOL master function and a MEWTOCOL slave functio
147. TO ANOGCAUOM eieaa aaa aAa a A aa a a EOE aR N S 4 2 4 2 Allocation of FP Control Unit c ccccccececcececcececeececeececescecnscseaseseaseseaeescnensenensenenseeens 4 3 4 3 Allocation Of FP Expansion Ut viceicivecctesicticscteescscisteeseticeessetexiedccaccasssieusicesweccavszesens des 4 4 4 4 Allocation of FPO FPOR Expansion UNiit cccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 4 5 5 Installation and WILING ccccceescseseceeseeeseeeseeenseenseeeseeeaseoeeeeeaeeonseoeseneasens 5 1 Dil TVS TAMAUION a a 5 2 5 2 Wiring Of POWEF SUPDIY srira aA aa aaea 5 8 5 3 Wiring Of Inputand OULDUL ismin ca aieo aani aaa aa inaa E aade iaaa taea aat 5 11 5 4 Wirtng Of MIL Connector Type sisisi aada 5 15 5 5 Wiring of Terminal BIOCK Type sirana aaraa EAEN 5 17 5 6 Safely MGCASUICS iiciin iaraa aa a a a aan a Eaa 5 19 5 7 Manaling OF Back p Balt y iscriis oenar anaa araa anaiai 5 21 6 High speed counter Pulse Output and PWM Output functions 6 1 6 1 Overview Of Each PUnCUOINS vsisiiccecistecciietiitedeceiedccnetliieudiuiviviuetibesaedeivivesstltienanlavetietiieets 6 2 6 3 High speed Counter Function cicciccccccecctsc cece coceiecvicccdeteedictecsien ccabvedistearvereteteeicneastenaiacs 6 10 6 4 Pulse Q tp t FUNGUO scecsccssesscsedeccceccsseavensceccesseasazceavececeetsavssveeceucsssensctwecedesatetiasageeneds 6 18 CO PWM OUTOUN FPUNICUION misinis ee ESE EEEE 6 58 7 COMMUNICATION CaS Sell n eacvedatosetetedo
148. The response must start with the same header that was at the beginning of the command 2 Unit number The unit number of the PLC that processed the command is stored here 3 Text The content of this varies depending on the type of command The value should be read based on the content If the processing is not completed successfully an error code will be stored here so that the content of the error can be checked y 0 1 R C 1 2 0 lf the read command was used the data that was read is stored here if normal Command name lf error occurs Error code Response code If normal ASCII code H24 If error occurs ASCII code H21 1 22 4 Check code BCC block check code for error detection using horizontal parity The BCC starts from the header and checks each character in sequence using the exclusive OR operation and replaces the final result with character text 5 Terminator end code There is always a C ASCII code HOD at the end of the message Note e f no response is returned the communication format may not be correct or the command may not have arrived at the PLC or the PLC may not be functioning Check to make sure all of the communication specifications e g baud rate data length and parity match between the computer and the PLC e If the response contains an instead of a the command was not processed successfully The response will contain a communicati
149. UN has been started and goes on for the second and subsequent scans Step ladder initial pulse Turns on for only the first scan of a process after the boot at relay on type the step ladder control Initial on type pulse relay Initial off type pulse relay R9016 R9017 Repeats on off operations in 0 01 0 01 s clock pulse relay sec cycles Repeats on off operations in 0 02 s 0 02 s clock pulse relay cycles Repeats on off operations in 0 1 s 0 1 s clock pulse relay cycles Repeats on off operations in 0 2 s 0 2 s clock pulse relay cycles Repeats on off operations in 1 s 1 s clock pulse relay ayes Repeats on off operations in 2 s 2 s clock pulse relay cycles Repeats on off operations in 1 min 1 min clock pulse relay cycles 14 11 WR902 Relay No Name s S SCiesSecription _ __________ Turns off while the mode selector is set to PROG 9020 RUN mode fag Turns on while the mode selector is set to RUN R9024 Notused o o S O R9026 ao flag A on while the F149 MSG instruction is executed a O OOO e f R9029 Forcing flag Turns on during forced on off operation for input output relay timer counter contacts Turns on while the external interrupt trigger is enabled by R902A Interrupt enable flag the ICTL instruction Note Sampling by the instruction 0 When the sampling operation starts 0 flag When the sampling stop trigger stops 0 Sampling enable flag W
150. WR90 to WRY7 Hold type area 128 points 8 words R2480 to R255F WR248 to WR255 Procedure for changing program type As a program that has been converted cannot be converted inversely back up the program before conversion 1 Retrieve a program to be converted with FPWIN GR 2 Select Tool gt Change PLC Type in the menu bar The Select PLC Type dialog box appears seca Ac We PLC Type C30R C60R L14R L30R L60R C147 P C30 60T P C384 40T xX C4ORTOA 2 5 FP X0 L14R L30R FP X0 L40R L60R FP e FP SIGMA V Keep Current Settings 3 Select FP SIGMA 32K and press the OK button The type conversion wizard appears E Convert PLC Type Change FP SIGMA Type When converting FP SIGMA s program type to 32K from 12K following procedure should be carried out 1 Initialize system register No F Default setting for starting word in internal relay holding area is different 2 Change program Internal relay fixed holding area is different Perform the above automatic conversion Click Next and continue Note As data cannot be restored after conversion do not overwrite data if you want to save it Also note that converting to 12K type from 32K type is not available Cancel 4 Press the Next button The menu for selecting Initialize system register No 7 is displayed Convert PLC Type Change FP SIGMA Type Initialize system register No 7 goseseccess
151. X3 Increasing Decreasing Increasing Decreasing r Count for reset input Incremental input mode XO or X1 ON xg orxay U LALA LEU LP LE Lee i i j X2 X5 i ebde e ile Tel count is prohibited The reset input is executed by the interruption at 1 on edge and 2 off edge 1 on edge Count disable Elapsed value clear 2 off edge Count enable DT90052 bit2 able disable setting of the input can be set by the reset input 6 3 3 Minimum Input Pulse Width For the period T 1 frequency a minimum input pulse width of T 2 single phase input or T 4 two phase input is required lt Single phase gt lt Two phase gt x e a 1 6 3 4 I O Allocation e As shown in the table in the previous section 6 2 1 the inputs and outputs used will differ depending on the channel number being used e The output turned on and off can be specified from YO to Y7 as desired with instructions F166 HC1S and F167 HC1R When using CHO with incremental input and When using CHO with two phase input and reset input reset input FP FP gt Count input oh a A phase input ai B phase input al ai Reset input Reset input l X2 gt X2 vn ON and OFF output x ON and OFF output The output turned on and off when the target The output turned on and off when the target value is reached can be specified from YO to Y7 value is reached can be specified from
152. X3 X4 approx 8 mA Rated input current For X2 X5 to X7 approx 4 3 mA For X8 to XF approx 3 5 mA For C32 C28 16 points common X0 to XF 1 common For C24 8 point common X0 to X7 1 common X8 to XF 1 Input points per common common Either the positive or negative of the input power supply can be connected to common terminal l l For X2 X5 to XF 19 2V DC 3 mA For X0 X1 X3 X4 approx 3 KQ Input impedance For X2 X5 to X7 approx 5 6 KQ For X8 to XF approx 6 8 KQ For input X0 X1 X3 X4 1 ms or less normal input 5 us or less high speed counter pulse catch interrupt input settings For input X2 X5 to X7 off gt on Response time 1 ms or less normal input 100us or less high speed counter pulse catch interrupt input settings For input X8 to XF 1 ms or less normal input only Operating mode indicator LED display Note1 this specification is applied when the rated input voltage is 24V DC and the temperature is 25 C 70 F 2 6 Limitations on number of simultaneous input on points Keep the number of input points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature C28 C24 C32 at 24V DC at 24V DC at 24V DC 16 y at 26 4V DC S at26 4voc 1 fat 2 4 VDC Number of m Number of i Number of 2 points per PEE pE gj PST i common 8 common I common 7 which are which are which are simulta simulta simulta neo
153. a No to store read data Example RO H H F150 H5003 K500 K10 DT100_ When RO is on 10 words will be read from the address K500 of the bank No H50 in the expansion data memory unit installed in the slot No 03 to store DT100 to DT109 in order 2 To write data to the expansion data memory unit from the control unit S1 The area for specifying the slot No of an Intelligent I O unit this unit and bank numbers Specify them in hexadecimal Higher byte Bank No HO to HFF Slot No HO to H3 S2 The first area No of write data n No of words to write K1 to K1024 H1 to H400 D The first area No to store write data Example RO H H F151 HABO1 DT10 K10 H2FE_ When RO is on the contents of DT10 11 12 and higher are written for 10 words in order in the area starting with the address H2FE of the bank No HAB in the expansion data memory unit installed in the slot No HO1 Note e The operating time for the instructions is as follows F150 READ 16 19 0 84 x No of words to read us F151 WRITE 17 88 0 77 x No of words to write us e f all areas are read and written in one scan the scanning time may be over e If you try to READ WRITE data in multiple addresses in one scan arrange the instructions using the above operating time as a guide Battery error When any error occurs in a backup battery the input will be turned on as follows Example When installing in the expansion unit 1 slot No 0 X
154. a register volume input V1 VO gt DT90040 a a SSS DT90042 esed by the system o the system DT90043 Po Used Used by the system s d the system The elapsed value 32 bit data of the high plete eucepeed speed counter is stored here The value can CHO counter i DT90045 elapsed value be read or written by executing F1 DMV Instruction instructions to be used when the high speed counter related instruction F166 F167 F171 F175 or F176 is executed The value can be read by executing F1 DMV instruction The target value 32 bit data of the high DT90046 speed counter specified by the high speed High speed counter instruction is stored here Target For values have been preset for the various CHO counter target value DT90047 The elapsed value 32 bit data of the high High speed DT9004 eeu counter speed counter is stored here The value can be read and written by executing F1 DMV pT90049 elapsed value area instruction For CH1 The target value 32 bit data of the high DT90050 speed counter specified by the high speed i counter instruction is stored here Target High speed i aone adel For values have been preset for the various g CH1 instructions to be used when the high speed value area DT90051 counter related instruction F166 or F167 is executed The value can be read by executing F1 DMV instruction 14 22 A Available N A Not a nee O No ing e
155. a rewrite during RUN is executed the operation as below will be performed Exercise caution 1 Interrupt programs will be disabled Enable by executing an ICTL instruction once again lt Example gt Using R9034 rewrite during RUN completed flag R9013 ICTL S1 S2 R9034 2 The high speed counter will continue to count Target value match on off instructions F166 F167 will continue Coincidence interrupt programs will be disabled when the F166 F 167 instruction is running 3 The pulse output PWM output stops when the rewriting is performed The operation after the completion of the rewriting during RUN varies depending on each instruction Instruction Operation after the completion of number rewriting during RUN F171 SPDH Pulse output Trapezoidal control The operation before rewriting continues F171 SPDH Pulse output Home position return The operation before rewriting continues F172 PLSH Pulse output JOG operation F173 PWMH PWM output Stop F174 SPOH Pulse output Selectable data table The operation before rewriting continues control operation ting continues F175 SPSH Pulse output Linear interpolation The operation before rewriting continues F176 SPCH Pulse output Circular interpolation Rewriting during RUN cannot be performed 4 The regular sampling trace will not stop 11 16 11 7 3 Procedures and Operation of Rewrite During RUN FPWIN GR FPWIN GR Ladder symbol mode Boolea
156. acceleration deceleration time in the 30 ms unit with 30 steps and in the 60 ms unit with 60 steps 5 Acceleration deceleration time t ms No of steps x 1000 Initial speed fO Hz 6 30 1 Control code lt H constant gt H OOOUOOUOU 0 Fixed oed o Number of acceleration deceleration steps 0 30 steps 1 60 steps Can be used with Ver 1 4 or later Duty on width 6 0 Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 25 Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2 1 91 Hz to 100 kHz E Optional mode and output type 20 21 geile 4 5 Type home return Type home return Type home return Type home return Type home return Type home return Type home return Type home return Type Il home return Type Il home return Type Il home return Type Il home return Type I home return Type Il home return Type Il home return Type Il home return CW CEW Direction output OFF Direction output ON CW and deviation counter clear CCW and deviation counter clear Direction output OFF and deviation counter clear Direction output ON and deviation counter clear CW CCW Direction output OFF Direction output ON CW and deviation counter clear CCW and deviation counter clear Direction output OFF and deviation counter clear Direction output ON and deviation counter clear Frequency Hz lt K constant gt Frequency range O 1
157. again After the operation change to the online edit mode to check When the timeout error occurs using the through mode in GT series programmable display Extend the timeout time of the programmable display using the GTWIN The default setting is 5 seconds Select Transfer from File in the menu bar The transfer data screen will open Select Condition to Network ye eT open Communication Setting screen COM port zi Cancel Change the value for Timeout Baudrate 115200 bps iio Click OK button to complete the change of setting Communication Setting fe fe It will be set as the e f gt following value automatically Data Length 8 Stop Bit 1 Parity C Non C Even 0 Time out 5 v sec Parameter for automatic setting V Baud rate Iv Parity 11 15 Cases where rewriting is not possible during RUN 1 When the result of rewriting is a syntax error lt Example gt When executing the rewriting which does not form the following pair of instructions 1 Step ladder instructions SSTP STPE 2 Suroutine instructions SUB RET 3 Interrupt instructions INT IRET 4 JP LBL 5 LOOP LBL 6 MC MCE Also rewriting is not possible during RUN in case of other syntax errors 2 During the forced input output operation Interrupt restrictions When using interrupt high speed counter pulse output or PWM output functions do not perform a rewrite during RUN If
158. age frame START ADDRESS FUNCTION DATA CRCCHECK END 3 5 character time 16 bits 3 5 character time ADDRESS Unit No 8 bits 0 to 99 decimal Note1 0 Broadcast address Note2 Slave unit No is 1 to 99 decimal Note3 For MODBUS 0 to 247 decimal FUNCTION 8 bits DATA Varies depending on commands CRC 16 bits END 3 5 character time Differs depending on baud rate Refer to reception judgement time Response in normal status The same message as a command is returned for single write command A part of a command message 6 bytes from the beginning is returned for multiple write command Response in abnormal status In case a parameter disabled to be processed is found in a command except transmission error Slave address unit number Function code 80H One of either 1 2 0r 3 Error code CRC Error code contents 1 Function code error 2 Device number error out of range 3 Device quantity error out of range Reception done judgment time The process for receiving a message completes when the time that is exceeding the time mentioned below has passed after the final data was received Approx 6 7 ms Approx 3 3 ms Approx 1 7 ms Note The reception done judgment time is an approx 32 bit time 7 12 Supported commands z xecutanig Name MODBUS Remarks instructions for ae Name for FP ear decimal original Reference No F146 RECV Read Coil Status Read Y and R Coils 0X Read I
159. ailable Not available partially data compare 14 38 FP2SH FP10SH FP2SH FP10SH EL sz M 32 bit Hn p tea s2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 __ bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 o A o o A o A o p o z cala Lem 2 ae S2 1 S2 compare as de gt 81 82 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 Start a bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 e l bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S2 1 S2 STDs D gt SI S25 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 S2 1 S2 STD Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 i E s132 7 _ bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S24 1 S2 STD lt n S51 2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 __ bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 S2 1 S2 32 bit Connects a Form A normally open contact po 81 825 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the data comparative condition S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 compare AND lt gt eae a Form A Pr EEN gates D gt S1 89 serially by comparing two 32 bit data In the AND aL 1 comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S1 1 S1 gt S2 1
160. all guel After set value Spee cut ard ROOD eset x 0 01 seconds the 16 bit STMR H HFwrswesoH i sso uot ard ROD eset specified output and R900D are set to on Auxiliary timer F183 guel After set value S x 0 01 seconds the 32 bit DSTM H HFmosms o H Specified output and R900D are set to on Time constant Executes the filter processing for the processing H Fig FLTR SI 2 53 T specified input Counter W count _ Decrements from the preset value n n Available X Not available Not available partially 7 The type of the devices that can be specified depends on the models 2 The allowable number of using the PSHS and RDS instruction depends on the models 3 For FP2SH FP10SH and FP X Ver2 0 or later any device can be set for the setting value of counter or timer instruction 4 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 5 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when using Y1280 R1120 special internal relay included L1280 or anything beyond for the KP instruction the number of steps is shown in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a relay number has an index modifier the number of steps is shown in parentheses 6 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when timer 256 or higher or counter 255 or lower is used the number of steps is the number in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when a timer number or counter number has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in par
161. am itself will not be downloaded 8 13 8 4 5 Setting using FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select or Set PLC Password under Tool on the menu bar The following display will be shown Set PLO Password Untitlel PLE Home Current status gt Password is not set Available retry counts 3 counts digit number f 4 digits Hex fe 8 digits alphanumerc Match case Operation Mode f Access fe Protect f Unprotect a digits password Enter in alphanumeric ETETETT Setting for FF memory loader option i Allow the dawnload to alder than Yersion 3 2 Close Force Cancel Help 1 Select 8 digits for Digit number 2 Uncheck Allow the download to older than Version 3 2 in Setting for FP memory loader option 3 Check the functions to be used of Options for FP memory loader Limited distribution function Allow the download in case of same password Enable the upload protection setting Set that PLC cannot be uploaded 4 After setting the above check box input a 8 digit password and then click Setting The setting has completed Note This function is available only when the version of FP is Ver3 2 or later and a 8 digit password has been set 8 5 Table of Security Settings Cancel When setting the security on F
162. and S2 are transferred to the area starting at D Data write to ICWT S1 The data specified by S1 and S2 are IC card PICWT S2 D transferred to the IC card expansion memory area starting at D Program read PGRD The program specified using S is from IC Peano O transferred into the CPU from IC memory memory card card and executes it QO Available Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP10SH cannot be used 2 This instruction is available for FPO Ver 2 0 or later FP2SH FP10SH 14 41 FP2SH FP10SH Ope eee Pis exchange PXCH ayeliance PDXCH i CE i fo el F17 Higher lower SWAP The higher byte and lower byte of D are aS a f data exchange F18 16 bit data BXCH D1 Exchange the data between D1 and D2 block with the data specified by D3 exchange Control instruction Auxiliary jump SJP S The program jumps to the label instruction VEE ag ETES PEA ETA E as ifi ay z 3 x ka ka x a ka specified by S and continues from there Binary arithmetic instructions a a eI TT oTololelelo Pao adamo p OESO olofofo addition P a m fi o een fefefe addition PD Eee ae ae eee addition P S2 D addition PD So D E a ee subtraction subtraction me imam e gee ooo P27 subtraction s2 D P28 subtraction S2 D multiplication S2 D 5s S1 X S2 1 S 2 gt D 3 D 2 D 1 multiplic
163. and DT90201 for channel 2 matches K20000 output Y6 turns on If the elapsed value DT90048 and DT90049 for channel 1 matches K30000 output Y4 turns off If the elapsed value DT90204 and DT90205 for channel 3 matches K40000 output Y5 turns off 6 3 6 Sample program Positioning operations with a single speed inverter Wiring example FP gt Input terminal Conveyor Encoder input ers E Fo Operation start i O 0 P Motor Encoder Inverter Y Y Operation Stop Inverter operation I O allocation VO No Encoder input Operation start signal Inverter operation signal R100 Positioning operation running 0 5000 RO Positioning operation start i Number of pulse ee ane R02 Positioning done pulse YO a R903A High speed counter CHO control flag Program When X5 is turned on YO turns on and the conveyor begins moving When the elapsed value DT90044 and DT90045 reaches K5000 YO turns off and the conveyor stops x5 R903A R102 R100 e e HDF 9 Positioning operations running J R100 ee R100 R101 r HDF 7 Positioning operations start o A101 se emg Srl ii ss es tine E ee 1 Resets elapsed value of high speed er ji n F L N ee F167 HCIR KO K5000 YO _ f Target value match off instruction 1 YO goes off when elapsed value of high _speed counter CHO reaches 5000 pulses _ R101 Y cc PA __
164. are storage area stored Specify control codes when executing the circular interpolation of P4 to P1 DT4 DT41 ae POTO egan Stop mode Pass position setting Absolute From CHO CW to CH2 CW direction User setting DT42 to DT43 Composite speed 2000 Hz are for circular DT44 to DT45 Target position Specify the target position of X axis when moving from interpolation X axis P4 to P1 Target position Specify the target position of Y axis when moving from DT48 to DT49 Pass Position Specify the X coordinate of the pass position when X axis moving from P4 to P1 DT50 to DT51 Pass position Specify the Y coodinate of the pass position when Y axis moving from P4 to P1 Work area for circular interpolation Parameters calculated due to instruction execution are stored Operation result DT52 to DT57 storage area Specify control codes when executing the circular interpolation of P2 to P3 DT60 to DT61 trol l PAE POMU ORCONE Stop mode Center position setting Absolute From CHO CW to CH2 CW direction DT62 to DT63 Composite speed 2000 Hz User setting area for circular interpolation DT64 to DT65 Target position Specify the target position of X axis when moving from X axis P2 to P3 DT66 to DT67 Target position Specify the target position of Y axis when moving from Y axis P2 to P3 Center position Specify the X coordinate of the center position when DT DT in executing the circular interpolation of P2 to P3
165. area to D 1 D Turns output Yn on when the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target value of S 1 S Available X Not available Not available partially 1 The instruction is available for FPO T32 type V2 3 or later 2 The instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later and the pulse execution type can be specified FP10SH cannot be used 3 This instruction is available for FP Ver 2 0 or later 4 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later 5 This instruction is available for FP Ver 3 10 or later 14 49 FP2SH FP10SH Boo rete _ High speed HC1R n S Yn Turns output Yn off when the counter output elapsed value of the built in high reset with speed counter reaches the target channel value of S 1 S specification Positioning Outputs a positioning pulse from control with the specified output YO or Y1 channel according to the contents of the specification data table beginning at S Pulse output with Outputs a pulse from the channel specified output YO or Y1 specification according to the contents of the data table beginning at S PWM output with Performs PWM output from the channel specified output YO or Y1 specification according to the contents of the data table beginning at S High speed counter Pulse outp put mstructon for FPOR High speed Performs high speed counter counter and Puls
166. ata table containing the pulse output stop value KO When the program runs the data table and pulse output diagram are as shown below H DF H F174 SPOH DT400 KO Pulse output start Positioning data table Control code H 1200 Frequency 1 2 1000 Hz ppe Target value 1 3 1000 pulses PL Frequency 2 2500 Hz Target value 2 2000 pulses pie Frequency 3 5000 Hz ARE Target value 3 5000 pulses DT414 DT445 Frequency 4 1000 Hz DT416 NT417 Target value 4 2000 pulses DT418 Pulse output DT419 stop setting Pulse output diagram Frequency speed Hz Elapsed value of high speed counter 01000 3000 e900 10000 Amount of travel 1000 Execution condition R10 R3034 REO3C Note When the execution condition R10 of the F174 SPOH instruction goes on the high speed counter control flag R903A R903C goes on When the elapsed value reaches 10000 and pulse output stops R903A R903C goes off 6 39 1 Control code lt H constant gt Upper word 0 Fixed E Duty on width 4 0 Duty 1 2 50 1 Duty 1 4 25 Frequency range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz H QOOOOOOOO E Operation mode 0 Incremental Specifies the amount of travel number of pulses 1 Absolute Specifies the target value absolute value E Output method CW Incremental counting CCW Decremental counting Pulse and direction forward off Inc
167. ation P p ll EE SEO division P S2 D remainder DT9015 32 bit data D S1 1 1 S2 1 S2 gt quotient D 1 D ei DT9016 DT9015 16 bit data S1 S1 X S2 D multiplication p S2 D result in 16 pits ei liu increment P 1 increment PD 1 P37 decrement P38 ocre noni 32 bit data S1 multiplication o S2 D result in 32 bits D 1 D 1 D 1 D D 1 D D 1 D 1 D 1 D C fo lo lt C O C eS D Cc alo i A G S1 1 1 x S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D O Available Not available Not available partially 14 42 FP2SH FP10SH Ope a _ ne rand BCD arithmetic instructions fo Same see ee data addition PB oar ea EEE data addition PDB a a EE state data addition PB data addition poe oa cial a pas sacton pB ome 0 2 0 aly eubiaction p subtraction PDB ei WE We ale abot e E 7 Cy Ga Ga Ga Go O subtraction pat Sanson pop Oe Ln ofoofo eubiacien PDB see a Pee rr eeh multiplication PB ieee ECECEG multiplication PDB be D division PB ue DT9015 aa cles Va 8 digit BCD data DB S1 S2 D S141 1 S2 1 S2 quotient a 6 DT9015 ele fee o ek increment PB 1 increment PDB 1 2 ee ecrement PB 1 Sco Be decrement PDB 1 i compare instructions 16 bit data CMP S1 S2 R900A on compare Pe gt Gn R900B on 32 bit data DCMP S1 S2 F S1 gt S2 1 S2 gt ROO0A on compare Poeme S1 1 S 1 S2 1 S2 R
168. be used as internal relays Link register allocation Range of link registers used for PC PLC link Receive area Start address of link register send area Size of link register send area Used With the above settings the 28 words consisting of LD100 to LD127 can be used as internal registers 7 98 Note Precautions for link area allocation A mistake in the link area allocation will cause an error and communication will be disabled Avoid overlapping send areas When sending data from the send area to receive area of another FP send and receive areas must match In the example shown below there is an overlapping area between units no 2 and 3 and this will cause an error so that communication cannot be carried out Link relay allocation FPE FPE FPE Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Receive area Receive area Send area rc i Send area Receive area System registers mo Name ae Tk Range of link relays used for PC PLC link Start address of link relay send area 0 2 Size of link relay send area Invalid allocations The allocations shown below are not possible neither for link relays nor for link registers Send area is split Send area Receive area Send area Send and receive areas are split into multiple segments Send area Receive area 7 59 Setting the largest unit number for a PC PLC link The largest unit number can be set using system register no 47
169. ber 32k 0 to a to R e If no backup setting for internal relays 256 O to battery is used do Hold type area starting number 32710 0 to 32765 not change the setting for data registers default settings Hold or non hold setting for step Non hold Hold Non hold Otherwise proper Previous value is held for a hold non hold see Sy m Hold iat g values cannot be Pati DF instruction wi on ho guaranteed Hold type area starting word number for PC PLC link relays 64 O to 64 Hold type area starting word number for PC PLC link relays for PC PLC link 1 Hold type area starting number for PC PLC link registers 128 0 to 128 for PC PLC link 0 Hold type area starting number 256 for PC PLC link registers 32k only 128 to 256 for PC PLC link 1 y DIRADE cher ie SENNO Disabled Disabled Enabled duplicated output Spee ah Song WAEN ANM Stop Continuation of operation verification error occurs operation SEUNG WEN AN Stop Continuation of operation operation error occurs When a battery error occurs a self diagnostic error is not Alarm battery error issued and the ERROR Operating setting when Disabled Beno eee NOL TASI a self diagnostic error is issued and the ERROR ALARM LED flashes Note The 12k type is available with Ver 1 4 to 1 9 2 4 or later 14 4 Default eae Descriptions value En Wait time setting for multiframe 6500 0 ee ee communication ms Communication timeout setting pen 2 for SEND RECV RMRD RMWT
170. ber in parentheses 2 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n in a jump instruction has an index modifier the number of steps isthenumber in parentheses 3 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the number n in a loop instruction has an index modifier the number of steps is the number in parentheses 14 35 FP2SH FP10SH zo aii e H i operation of program is ended Indicates the end of a main program a a a The operation of program is ended when oe end one H the trigger turns on t ll Nia EJECT 1 XIXI IUJ ull Oo oO Step ladder instructions SSTP The start of program n for process Ilala lala sr Pro 3 0 O J amp control Starts the specified process n and clears the process currently started Scan execution type Starts the specified process n and clears the process currently started em fe execution type Resets the specified process n H ___NSTP nH Clear ae CSTP H ema oste nH hudal multi SCLR Resets multiple processes specified by alala m ple steps H H sarn eH n1 and n2 Subroutine instructions Subroutine ___ 1 When the trigger is on Executes the call eel subroutine When the trigger is off Not execute the subroutine The output in the subroutine is maintained Output off ae When the trigger is on Executes the type gii subroutine subroutine When the trigger is off Not execute the subroutine But the output in the
171. cated as shown above the No 1 send area can be sent to the No 2 No 3 and No 4 receive areas Also the No 1 receive area can receive data from the No 2 and No 3 send areas No 4 is allocated as a receive area only and can receive data from No 1 No 2 and No 3 but cannot transmit it to other stations Note The PC link 1 can be used to connect with the second PC link WO of the FP2 Multi Communication Unit MCU At that time the link relay number and link register number for the PC link can be the same values as the FP2 from WL64 from LD128 Set the system register 46 to Reverse to use the PC PLC link 1 the second half of link relays and link registers gt FA Reference For the information on FP2 MCU lt Chapter 5 Communication Function PC PLC Link in FP2 Multi Communication Unit Technical Manual ARCT1F396E gt 7 57 Partial use of link areas In the link areas available for PC PLC link link relays with a total of 1024 points 64 words and link registers with a total of 128 words can be used This does not mean however that it is necessary to reserve the entire area Parts of the area which have not been reserved can be used as internal relays and internal registers Link relay allocation Range of link relays used for PC PLC link Receive area Start address of link relay send area Size of link relay send area With the above settings the 14 words 224 points consisting of WL50 to WL63 can
172. cation when a communication error occurs due to excessive noises or when a receiver equipment cannot receive data temporarily Note2 The number of units of the PC PLC link with RS232C is two Communication specifications Item sd Specifications RS232C non isolated RS485 isolated N 1 N communication 45m o Transmission distance 15m Max 1200 m 2 Baud rate Note3 Note8 l 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps to be set by system register Computer link ASCII serial communication Communication format to be set by system register asi No of connected units 2 units Max 99 units Max 32 units when C NET adapter is connected Note1 When connecting a commercially available device that has an RS485 interface please confirm operation using the actual device In some cases the number of units transmission distance and baud rate vary depending on the connected device Trans mission code 12 10 Note2 The values for the transmission distance baud rate and number of units should be within the values noted in the graph below For baud rate 115 2 kbps 99 For baud rate 70 57 6 kbps Number of units stations 40 0 700 1000 1200 Transmission distance m When using a baud rate of 2400 bps to 38400 bps you can set up to a maximum of 99 units stations and maximum transmission distance of 1200 m Note3 Only 9600 bps or 19200 bps can be specified when the
173. cessed as if RO are on The output is determined by the final operation results e f the same output is used by several instructions such as the OT KP SET RST or data transfer functions the output obtained at the I O update is determined by the final results of the operation lt Example gt Output to the same output relay YO with OT KP SET and RST instructions XO Y0 c YO ON X1 YO s gt YO ON X2 YO RM YO OFF When XO to X2 are all on YO is output as off at I O update e If you need to output a result while processing is still in progress use a partial I O update instruction F143 11 2 Handling BCD Data 11 2 1 BCD Data BCD is an acronym for binary coded decimal and means that each digit of a decimal number is expressed as a binary number lt Example gt Expressing a decimal number in BCD Decimal number 6 4 5 Each digit is converted to a binary BCD 0110 0100 0101 Binary coded decimal 11 2 2 Handling BCD Data in the PLC e When inputting data from a digital switch to the PLC or outputting data to a 7 segment display with a decoder the data must be in BCD form In this case use a data conversion instruction as shown in the examples at below e BCD arithmetic instructions F40 to F58 also exist which allow direct operation on BCD data however it is normally most convenient to use BIN operation instructions F20 to F38 as operation in the PLC takes place
174. cetaieconsa 7 1 TASHUACHONS ANG TYDE Scia aaa aa aa aaaea AEN Gaara EON aaan Eana ENS 7 2 7 2 COMMUNICATION Specifications cise sassiess sec cesecensiseesececuesesarsvnes cccsussbeetevenuecscessnsesscexeenncunes 7 10 723 Unstallatiom and Wiring ericeira aaa a Eaa a aaia anadan 7 14 7 4 Communication Function 1 Computer LINK ccccsssssseeeeceesseeeeecennseeeseeenseeeseoeees 7 18 7 5 Communication Function General purpose Serial Communication 000 7 35 7 6 Communication Function 3 PC PLC link ssannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn na 7 50 7 7 Communication Function 4 MODBUS RTU Communication ceseeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 71 o CCU FUN ON Saa 8 1 8 1 Type of S cu urity FUNCOMS ii scsseesecesitvessnnistsecasecvenscccsusacsceteuasneduceesateveeesancuvencecadeserseauauees 8 2 8 2 Password Protect Function 2 icicccciiecdeilie vdecw thie icedublinvhnuteteedbiebaiedeib deeded 8 3 8 3 Upload Protection FPX 32k Type Only ccccceseeessseeeeceensseeeeeoesseeeseeeesseeeseoeesneessens 8 10 8 4 Setting Function for FP Memory LOade ccccssssseeeescsesseeeeseeesseeeseeeesseeeseeeesseeesees 8 11 8 5 Table of Security SettingsS Cancel cccccsssssseeeseseesseeesceessseeseeeenseeeeeoeenseeeseonesneeesees 8 15 9 Other FUNCIONS sana rctarioeetectoeatienivecsecheeetaosaetenels 9 1 9T P13 CWT INSCRUICU ON sia a a E iS a 9 2 9 2 Sampling Trace Function 32k Type Only
175. ch2 CW axis to chO CW axis 1 From chO CW axis to ch2 CW axis Circular shape method 6 0 Pass position setting method 1 Center position setting method HM Operation mode and output method 00 Incremental CW CCW 02 Incremental pulse and direction forward off reverse on 03 Incremental pulse and direction forward on reverse off 10 Absolute CW CCW 12 Absolute pulse and direction forward off reverse on 13 Absolute pulse and direction forward on reverse off 2 Composite speed Frequency lt K constant gt 100 Hz to 20 kHz K100 to K20000 Use the following formula to calculate composite speed Radius r Pulse x 10 Fv Hz Scan time ms 3 Target position pass position and center position K 8388608 to K8388607 4 Operation continuation mode stop It will stop when the target position is reached Continue It will continue the circular interpolation action by setting the next target position before the target position is reached during the circular interpolation action 5 Rotation direction The code to be specified differs depending on the direction of axes and rotation direction setting clockwise or counterclockwise CH2 CH2 cw Rotation CW Rotation direction direction i Specify 1 y Specify 0 CHO CHO CW CW 6 Circular shape method Pass position setting Specify the pass and target positions for the current position Center position setting Specify the center and tar
176. coder ainiti noutic FP The high speed counter function counts external the high speed counter inputs such as those from sensors or encoders When the count reaches the target value this function turns on off the desired output Encoder Roller Motor STOP signal Tape lead wire Pulse output function Stepping motor Combined with a commercially available motor Servo motor driver the function enables positioning control With the exclusive instruction you can perform Pulse output CCW Motor Y trapezoidal control home return and JOG LLL _ driver 1 OS operation Pulse output CW Pulse output CCW Ty FP gt Pulse output CW JUUL__ stepping motor Servo motor PWM output function By using the exclusive instruction the PWM output function enables a pulse output of the desired duty ratio WVhen you increase the pulse width Heating increases WVvhen you decrease it a JAL Heating decreases 6 1 2 Performance of Built in High speed Counter Number of Channel e There are four channels for the built in high speed counter e The channel number allocated for the high speed counter will change depending on the function being used Counting range e K 2 147 483 648 to K 2 147 483 647 Coded 32 bit binary e The built in high speed counter is a ring counter Consequently if the counted value exceeds the maximum value it returns to the minimum value Similarly if the
177. component 1 Duty 1 4 25 DT520 X axis CHO frequency range calculated due to instruction 0 Fixed DT521 Y axis CH2 frequency range eion ane Bd N gt 02 Incremental pulse and direction forward offfreverse on DT523 Y axis ia number of 03 Incremental pulse and direction forward on reverse off 12 Absolute pulse and direction forward offfreverse on 13 Absolute pulse and direction forward on reverse off 2 Composite speed Initial speed Max speed Hz lt K constant gt 1 5 Hz to 100 kHz K1 to K100000 However 1 5 Hz is for an angle of 0 deg or 90 deg only Also specify K1 when speatying 1 5 Hz lf the component speed drops lower than the minimum speed for each frequency range then the speed will become the corrected component speed so be careful See 6 When simultaneously using a high speed counter periodical interrupt or PLC link do no set to 60 KHz or higher If initial speed is set equal to maximum speed pulses will be output with no acceleration deceleration Composite speed Initial speed 30 kHz or less Specify composite speed to make the component speed of each axis become1 5 Hz or higher 6 47 3 4 5 6 Acceleration Deceleration time ms lt K constant gt KO to K32767 If this is O pulses will be output for the initial speed composite speed as is with no acceleration deceleration Target value Movement amou
178. counter F171 SPDH trapezoidal control home return F172 PLSH JOG operation F174 SPOH Data table control F175 SPSH Linear interpolation control F176 SPCH circular interpolation control Note1 The pulse output function is only available with the transistor output type Note2 Linear and circular interpolation control is only available with the C32T2 or C28P2 units Note3 The home return operation of the interpolation axes should be performed for every channel Note4 Reference For DT90052 see lt 6 4 4 Pulse Output Control Instruction FO F1 gt PWM output function speed Output area used Output frequency counter contact duty ae No used Control flag y R903A When resolution 1000 a 1 5 Hz to 12 5 kHz 0 0 to 99 9 Related instructions FO MV High speed counter control F1 DMV Read write of When resolution 100 ae high R903C 15 6 kHz to 41 7 kHz F173 PWMH BWM 0 to 99 output Note The PWM output function is only available with the transistor output type 6 5 6 2 2 Functions Used and Restrictions Restrictions on channels maximum counting speed frequency The same channel cannot be used by more than one function The maximum frequency when using the high speed counter and pulse output function is determined by the combination as shown in the table below A Available Channel being used Max counting speed z frequency kHz ra PRS OUE Pulse output High speed Pulse outpu
179. counter instructions counter control F166 HC15 F167 HC1R and the pulse output instructions flag F171 SPDH to F176 PWMH are executed High speed Turn on while the high speed counter instructions counter control F166 HC15 F167 HC1R and the pulse output instructions flag F171 SPDH to F176 PWMH are executed TOOL port reception done flag during general purpose communication TOOL port transmission Goes on when transmission has been completed in done flag during general purpose serial communication general purpose serial Goes off when transmission is requested in general communication purpose serial communication Turns on when the terminator is received during general purpose serial communication Note R9030 to R9030F can be changed during 1 scan 14 13 WR904 RelayNo Name Description _ _ _ _ _ Turns on when the general purpose communication R9040 Medes Pat aa function is being used g Goes off when the computer link function is being used COM2 port Goes on when the general purpose serial communication R9042 communication mode is used Goes off when the MEWTOCOL is used R9043 Notused __ Monitors whether the F145 SEND or F146 RECV instructions can be executed or not aite oa ide ka Off None of the above mentioned instructions can be a executed During executing the instruction g On One of the above mentioned instructions can be executed Monitors if an abnormality has b
180. ctions command messages to slave units and the slave units respond response messages according to the instructions e Enables the communication between the devices of max 99 units as the master function and slave function is equipped About MODBUS RTU e The MODBUS RTU communication is a function for the master unit to read and write the data in slave units communicating between them e There are ASCI mode and RTU binary mode in the MODBUS protocol however the FP is supported with the RTU binary mode only Master function Writing and reading data for various slaves is available using the F145 SEND and F146 RECV instructions Individual access to each slave and the global transmission is possible Master re Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave A KT temperature KT temperature control unit control unit Slave function If the slave units receive a command message from the master unit they send back the response message corresponding to the content Do not execute the F145 SEND nor F146 RECV instructions when the unit is used as a slave unit Master A i Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave imm imm lt a S _ So D G D O O EE FF P oe af E 7 1 2 Types of Communication Cassette 1 channel RS232C type Product No AFPG801 This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a five wire RS232C port RS CS control is possible Terminal layout Abbrev
181. ctly pressure connected the contact puller pin provided with the fitting can be used to remove the contact Press the housing against the pressure connection tool so that the contact puller pin comes in contact with this section gy Key Point If using a MIL connector for flat cables specify the product No AXM110915 In this case the suitable wire is AWG 28 and the rated current is 1A 5 16 5 5 Wiring of Terminal Block Type A screw down connection type for terminal block is used The suitable wires are given below Product No Suitable wires Size Nominal cross sectional area AWG 24 to 16 0 2 to 1 25mm Pole terminal If a pole terminal is being used the following models manufactured by Phoenix Contact Co should be used Cross sectional Panno O O OOS S area mm Without insulating sleeve sleeve AWG 24 AWG 24 Al 0 25 6 BU A 0 25 7 AWG 22 Al 0 34 6 TQ A 0 34 7 Phoenix AWG 20 AI 0 5 6 WH A 0 5 6 PODAN AWG 18 Al 0 75 6 GY A0 75 6 1 00 AWG 18 A160 0 5x2 AWG 20 for2 Al TWIN 2x pcs 0 5 8 WH Pressure welding tool for pole terminals Part No Product No Phoenix Contact Co CRIMPFOX 6 1212034 For tightening the terminal block When tightening the terminals of the terminal block use a screwdriver Product No 1205037 with a blade size of 0 4 x 2 5 Part No SZS 0 4x2 5 The tightening torque should be 0 22 to 0 25 N m 2 3 to 2 5 kgf cm or les
182. d received via the specified COM port RO S n D ee eee Fis9MTRN DT100 _ K8 Ki _ Serial data communication Starting from DT100 the contents of 8 bytes are sent from the COM port 1 K1 Devices that can be specified for S Only data registers DT can be specified as the send buffer Devices that can be specified for n WX WY WR WL SV EV DT LD l0 to ID K H Devices that can be specified for D Only the K constants only K1 and K2 Transmission of data The amount of data specified by n is sent to the external device from among the data stored in the data table starting with the area specified by S through the COM port specified by D Data can be sent with the header and terminator automatically attached A maximum of 2048 bytes can be sent When the above program is run the eight bytes of data contained in DT101 to DT 104 and stored in the send buffer starting from DT100 are sent from COM1 port Reception of data Reception of data is controlled by turning the reception done flags R9038 R9048 on and off The received data is stored in the receive buffer specified in the system register Data can be received when F159 MTRN turns the reception done flag off When the reception of the data is completed the terminator is received the reception done flag turns on and subsequently receiving data is prohibited To receive the next data execute the F159 MTRN instruction and turn
183. d with FP 2 pressure contact Control unit transistor type or FP Expansion 1 O unit tool AXY52000FP For FP Control unit AFP0808 Flat cable Required for wiring with flat transistor output type 10P 4 pack connector cables For FP2 Expansion I O unit AFP2802 40P 2 pack For FP Control unit transistor output type and eee a AFP0521 FPOR Expansion unit Loose wiring cable with gM 2 cable set I O cable connector attached at one end 10 leads AWG22 0 3mm2 2 pcs blue and Length 3m AFP0S23 white set 2 cable set Note For using the high capacity battery folder for FPZ purchase a commercial CR123A battery 1 2 9 Maintenance Parts Specifications Product No Terminal socket Attaches to FP control unit relay output type 9P AFP0802 2 pack Attaches to FP control unit transistor output type 10P AFP0807 2 pack Wire press socket Attaches to FP expansion I O unit and FP positioning unit 40P AFP2801 2 pack For FP control unit transistor Suitable wire AWG 22 AXW7221FP output type FPE expansion AWG 24 5 pins in line Wire press contact e I O unit and FP positioning Suitable wire AWG 26 AXW7231FP unit AWG 28 5 pins in line Power cable for FPOR FP2 Attaches to FPOR FP gt control unit Length 1 m AFPG805 1 pack Power cable for FPO Attaches to FPO FPOR expansion unit Length 1 m AFP0581 1 pack Note Order wire press contacts in units of 200 pins in 40 rows 1
184. der Symbol View FP SIGMA 32K 0 4 Offline Home When selecting Not change Both program and internal relay numbers are not converted if Convert_FPG12k_FPG32k_After Ladder Symbol View Foll amp s FP SIGMA 32K 0 3 Offline Home xii Detail of conversion when selecting Add transfer program automatically Compatibility can be retained with the existing program by partially adding a transfer program without modifying the existing program Also for connecting a device such as a programmable display it is not necessary to change switches and internal relays R and WR referred by data parts on the programmable display 013 0 F10 BKMY gt WR 248 WR 255 WR 30 Existing program Area that is not need to be changed Existing program R30 10 3H F10 BKMY YR 90 WR 9 WR248 lt Explanation of program gt Beginning of a program Transfers the contents stored in the hold area of internal relays WR248 to WR255 to the existing hold area WR90 to WR97 when the power turns on and returns the area WR90 to WR97 to the previous state before the power turns off because the area WR90 to WRQ7 cannot be held without a battery on V3 WRSO0 WR97 WR248 WR255 End of a program After returning to the previous state that is the one before the power turns off always transfers the WR operated during the scan or the information of R input from a programmable display WR90 to W
185. difier the number of steps is shown in parentheses For the FP and FP X the number of steps varies according to the relay number to be used 14 33 Stores the oo result up to this instruction oo noone hoe Reads the operated result stored by the BEGea PSHS instruction 2 Pop stack Reads and clears the operated result stored by the PSHS instruction Leading edge Turns on the contact for only one scan differential DF when the leading edge of the trigger is O detected Trailing edge DF Turns on the contact for only one scan differential DF when the trailing edge of the trigger is detected Leading edge Turns on the contact for only one scan differential when the leading edge of the trigger is initial execution detected The leading edge detection is possible on the first scan type YRL E Output is set to and held at on z YR LE ee is set to and held at off B R o o l Se e Diinan at set trigger and holds until i at reset trigger turns on Oj o m oe e wai E Basic function instructions On delay timer After set value n x 0 001 seconds B timer contact a is set to on a a al set value n x 0 01 seconds timer contact a a al is set to on sa Fics essed ill Bis After set value n x 0 1 seconds timer en ee a C contact a is set to on After set value n x 1 second timer alal C contact a is set to on ily z Auxiliary timer b
186. duct No This is an RS485 adapter C NET Adapter designed to allow use of the S2 type computer link function for for PLC tool port connecting to a host computer via AFP15402 side C NET It comes with a cable 30 cm for tool port side A power supply is not required ARCT1F96 FPO Power Input voltage 100 to 240 VAC Free input supply unit Output capacity 0 7 A 24 VDC FPO PSA4 AFP0634 1 2 8 Options Backup battery A With a connector AFPG804 APENS ffon ERE Necessary for the backup of data wihacomector for l igh i registers etc or for using the i memory High capacity 7 rane g Folder with a connector AFPG807 backup battery folder for Clock calendar function for a commercial battery Folder only FP CR123A y FP Memory loader Programming tool for copying Data clear type AFP8670 y programs written to a control unit Data hold type AFP8671 Slim 30 tyoe Mounting plate for mounting FP Control unit or FP Expansion AFP0811 yP I O unit on a panel vertically 10 pack Pi Alin Sia we Mounting plate for mounting FPO FPOR Expansion unit or AFP0803 5 3 i Intelligent unit on a panel vertically 10 pack Mounting plate for mounting FP Control unit on a panel AFP0804 Flat type horizontally 10 pack Terminal Required for connecting the terminal block made by Phoenix AFP0806 screwdriver Contact Co supplied with FP2 Control unit relay output type Multi wire connector Required for connecting the connectors supplie
187. during forced input output The RUN and PROG LEDs flash alternately Lights when in the PROG Mode and indicates that operation has stopped Lights when in the PROG Mode during forced input output It flashes during forced input output The RUN and PROG LEDs flash alternately Flashes when an error is detected during the self diagnostic function ERROR Lights if a hardware error occurs or if operation slows because of the program and the watchdog timer is activated ALARM RUN green PROG green ERROR ALARM red 2 2 RUN PROG mode switch This switch is used to change the operation mode of the PLC Switch position Operation mode Thi he RUN Th i i d ti RUN upward a e RUN mode The program is executed is executed and operation This sets the PROG mode The operation stops In this mode programming POAN a bordone using tools e The remote switching operation from the programming tool is operable e When performing remote switching from the programming tool the setting of the mode switch and the actual mode of operation may differ Verify the mode with the status indicator LED e Restart FPZ to operate in the mode set with the RUN PROG mode switch 3 Communication status LEDs These LEDs display the communication status of the COM 1 and COM 2 ports Flashes while data is being transmitted COM 1 data monitor Goes out when no data is being transmitted Received Flashes while data is being received
188. e Composite speed 1000 Hz Target position P2 1000 0 Pass position S1 500 250 Lej L Lk ee U U Data setting fro the control Data setting P2to P3 from P2 to P3 1 F1 DMV H11010 DT 1000 Control code Control code Continue mode CF1 DMV K1000 DT 1002 from CHO CW to CH2 CW direction Composite speed Pass position setting method Absolute F1 DMV K2000 DT 1004 P3 X axis Target position cho F1 DMV KO DT 1006 P3 Y axis Target position ch2 F1 DMV K1500 DT 1008 S2 X axis Pass position ch0 Fi DMV K 250 DT 1010 R12 S2 Y axis Pass position ch2 0e _ _ dg Composite speed 1000 Hz Target position P3 2000 0 Pass position S2 1500 250 L kd L b U Data setting fro the control Data setting from P3 to P4 from P3 to P4 1 gt F1 DMV H10010 DT 1000 Control code rol code Continue mode F1 DMV K1000 DT 1002 from CH2 CW to CHO CW direction Composite speed Pass position setting method Absolute F1 DMV K3000 DT 1004 P4 X axis Target position chO F1 DMV KO DT 1006 P4 Y axis Target position ch2 F1 DMV K2500 DT 1008 3 X axis Pass position chO F1 DMV K250 DT 1010 3 Y axis Pass position ch2 SS Mode changing for stoppage Composite speed 1000 Hz Target position P4 3000 0 Pass position S3 2500 250 bed bed Le be Let LJ R13 Mode changing for stoppage 1 F1 DMV H10 lt DT 1000 J Co
189. e 1 825 or S141 1 S2 1 S2 ORD gt ons peT Connects a Form A normally open contact in _ Os SI 82 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 ORD lt Connects a Form A normally open contact in oe 1l comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 or S141 S1 S2 1 S2 parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the Available X Not available Not available partially 14 39 FP2SH FP10SH WN zH i Oo o i Floating i Lem 2 pt a logic operation by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 point En 2 aia S2 1 S2 type real a o Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 mber e gt 5152 1_ bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 data Beai l STF i egins a logic operation by comparing two 32 compare S S 1_ bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 Start 1 gt S24 1 S2 STFs a a ta Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 a l bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 gt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 S24 1 S2 STF Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 a S S bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S2 1 S2 STF lt mea Begins a logic operation by comparing two 32 lt s S S _ bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1
190. e prohibt ion input Serve ready outpu CCW limit over inp PLG VO To input CW limit Over input Serve alarm output Positioning completion ulput Home mear sensor COW Lind Sensor CW Limit Sensor fp GMD W 24 V DC Powor supp Mote Input address can be changed 13 2 2 Panasonic MINAS Sseries E series R1 2kQ 1 2W FPG C32T FP X RZ akO 12W to 4702W MINAS S series MINAS E series Eg aan cali ies iene rr ten enlarges iain CW pulse r 22 PULS1 7a Ag CW pulse command output command input CCW pulse oes econ Rea X2 CCW pulse command output Home input Z phase output Counter clear inupt Servo ON input Gain ewitch input Torque lirnit switch input Note Alarm clear input Deviation counter reset outpul CCW drive Home near input prohibition input CW drive prohibition input CCW limit oar kou D oe CW limit COIN e Po over inou E Se rana aop BRKOFF P Brake release output Home nesreenac O OOW tn somaar 12 WARN H vamin ouput CW limit sensor Note Only for MINAS E series Note2 Input address can be changed 13 5 13 3 FPO Power Supply Unit AFP0634 Hem Description o Input Rated operating voltage 100 240 V AC Operating voltage range 85 264 V AC Rated frequency 50 60 Hz Operating frequency 47 63 Hz The number of phase Single phase nrush current
191. e values can be loaded as analog values by connecting the thermister with these leader lines Mechanism for loading thermister input e Loads the change in the resistance values of the thermister connected externally as the change in voltage and then loads it as digital values by the AD converter in which a microcomputer is built e The values converted to digital values are reflected in the special data registers DT90040 or D1T90041 and can be read in the user s program lt Block diagram gt FP X Leader line Red Thermister 00000000 00000000 Leader line Black Thermister is connected with leader lines O0000000 OO000000 Non isolated between the FP thermister input unit and the power supply connector 24V The red leader line is connected with the 3 3V power supply and the black is connected with the Vin Total precision Total precision Total precision of AD converter in which microcomputer is built 5LSB 4 Precision of thermister Note 5LSB means there is a margin of error of 5LSB for the values 0 to 1000 converted with AD converter Thermister resistance values and digital conversion values e Use the following formula for conversion of thermister resistance values and digital conversion values e Digital conversion values changes within a range of KO to K1000 1024 X 2 2 Thermister resistance value KQ 2 2 Digital value 1 2
192. e e and Pulse output controls according to the control code specified by S The control code is stored in DT90052 Change and read Transfers S 1 S to high speed of the elapsed n counter and Pulse output value of high elapsed value area DT90045 speed counter DT90044 and Pulse output 1T 90200 Transfers value in high speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 to D 1 D patterns of each cam output according to the elapsed value of output controls Cam control mae Controls cam operation on off Target value much HC1S on with channel specification High speed counter control Pulse output control Target value much HC1R Turns output Yn off when the off with channel elapsed value of the high speed specification counter or pulse output reaches High speed the target value of S 1 S counter control Pulse output control the high speed counter Turns output Yn on when the elapsed value of the high speed counter or pulse output reaches the target value of S 1 S Pulse output JOG Positioning pulses are output positioning type from the specified channel in 0 1 Trapezoidal accordance with the contents of Pulse output JOG PLSH operation 0 and 1 PWM output with PWMH channel specification the data table that starts with S Pulse strings are output from the specified output in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S
193. e for FPX which enables to change the time after receiving a command until a response is returned With the converter SI 35 manufactured by Lineeye Co Ltd adjust the response time by this instruction if necessary SYS1 instruction This is to delay a response for n scan time to be specified H SYS1 M COM1I WAITn n 0 999 Example RO S 10 H oF H sYs iM COMI WAIT2 A a sn A N mpe aif rail First Second Fj keyword keyword ral Input all 12 letters after M including comma aligning to the right Exmapel M uu COMI WAIT2 12345678 9101112 When RO turns on the response of COM1 port RS485 port delays for two scans If the scan time is 500us it delays for 1 ms Reference lt FP series Programming manual gt The RS485 port of AFPG806 COM4 occupies the communication line for a given time after transmitting data No transmission is available during this period When data is transmitted from FP via the RS485 communication of AFPG806 COM4 start the transmission of the data to FP after the time mentioned blow passes at a receiver AFPG806 Connected equipment t t t Incase of 19200 bps 1 ms or more In case of 115200 bps 200 x s or more 7 12 Following adjustments are required depending on the types of connected equipment 1 With FPx when the connected equipment are also the combination of FPX and AFPG806 e When PC PLC link mode Adjustment is not required e When general communication mode
194. e sensor 6 45 Program XA R903A R903C R44 R40 te Positioning operation start Positioning data table CHO CH2 HHF omy Hunza orz J BER Contor codet mman Fi DMV K200 DT202 D1205 Fi omv K200 oT 204 ISIS Acceleration ime 150m Fi DMV K150 DT206 O TA F1 DMV KO DT 208 Duty 1 4 25 i 48 Hz to 100 kHz Home return CCW Pulse output instruction Home return F171 SPDH DT200 KO ja se The data table headed by M is used _and pulses are output from CHO _ FI71SPDH DT200 K2 pulso output instruction Home return The data table headed by DT200 is used _and pulses are output from CH2 _ J R903A R40 R44 R42 HoF7 4 ECHO home return completes R42 a calc anc rhc R903C R40 R44 BAS m eae ai DF 1 CH2 home return completes R43 lg ah a ey nino gl R42 R43 R44 a man p e cne a z Home return completes XO 1 _ Fo MV H10 0T 90052 Fo MV HO DT 90052 1 gt Tro mv H2010 DT 90052 CH2 near home deceleration start Fo MV H2000 pT90052 g Key Point As there is not interpolation function for the home return the home return should be executed for each channel After the home return for both channels is completed the positioning operation running program R40 turns off Pulse output diagram Near home sensor XA ON x3 ON Home sensor xo ON 2000 Hz 700 Hz Hz
195. e to S1 is stored in D 2 mini mum value type data total and mean values Floating point S1 S2 The total value and the mean value D of the real number data from the area selected with S1 to S2 are obtained The total value is stored in the D 1 D and the mean value is stored in the D 3 D 2 Floating point FSORT S1 S2 The real number data from the area type data sort PFSORT S specified by S1 to S2 are stored in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first Scaling of FSCAL 1 S2 Scaling linearization on a real real number PFSCAL D number data table is performed and data the output Y to an input value X is calculated Q Available Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP2 FP2SH Ver 1 5 or later FP10SH cannot be used 2 This instruction is available for FP 32k type 3 This instruction is available for FP X Ver 1 13 or later 14 59 FP2SH FP10SH Ope mee A Boolean P Description TE rand Time series processing instruction PID processing S PID processing is performed depending on the control value mode and parameter specified by S to S 2 and S 4 to S 10 and the result is stored in the S 3 Easy PID S1 Temperature control PID can be S2 easily performed using the image S3 S4 of a temperature controller Compare instructions
196. e word P160 subtraction Serial port communication 32 bit data square root DSQR S D PDSQR V S gt D 7 x x Oo 4 Reads the data from the intelligent unit at the MEWNET F remote I O slave station ites the data into the intelligent unit at the MEWNET F remote I O slave station EE TE 1 X f 5D X When the trigger of this instruction turns on the sampling trace stops The time after S2 1 S2 elapses from the time of S1 2 S1 1 S1 is stored in D 2 D 1 D The time that results from subtracting S2 1 S2 from the time S1 2 S1 1 S1 is stored in D 2 D 1 D x D x lt This is used to send data to an external device through the specified CPU COM port or MCU COM port Data is received from external equipment via the COM port of the specified MCU High speed counter Pulse output instruction for FPO FP e High speed S counter and DT9052 Pulse output controls Change and S read of the DT9044 elapsed value of high speed counter and DT9044 Pulse output D High speed n S Yn counter output set with channel specification Performs high speed counter and Pulse output controls according to the control code specified by 5 S The control code is stored in D D D DT9052 Transfers S 1 S to high speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area Transfers value in high speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value
197. ecifications po tem escription 256 k words 1k word x 256 banks Battery life Consumption current 5V 100 mA or less No of occupied I O points Input 16 points Data organization This unit is organized with 256 banks 1 k word 1 bank Banks are assigned with numbers which are from 0 to FF in hexadecimal Each bank is assigned with an address for every word and one bank is organized with 1024 words 1k word of a range within 0 to 3FF 0 to 1023 for decimal address Specify the above bank No HO to HFF hexadecimal and address KO to K1023 for reading data from the control unit to this unit Address 0 0 1 1 x 256 3FF 1023 256 k words The numbers in parentheses is decimal address Data organization in each bank Bank FE Configuration of banks in unit 3 10 How to access the memory unit The following instructions are used to access the expansion data memory unit to the control unit 1 To read data from the expansion data memory unit to the control unit S1 The area for specifying the slot No of an Intelligent I O unit this unit and bank numbers Specify them in hexadecimal Higher byte Bank No HO to HFF Slot No HO to H3 S2 The first address word address KO to K1023 HO to H3FF for reading the memory of an intelligent I O unit this unit The area for specifying addresses in the bank specified in S1 n No of words to read K1 to K1024 H1 to H400 D The first are
198. ection forward OFF reverse ON Pulse output when direction output is OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Pulse and direction forward ON reverse OFF Pulse output when direction output is ON Pulse output when direction output is OFF HSC counting method Decremental When the current position value of elapsed value area is 5000 the pulse of 4000 is output from CCW by executing the pulse output instruction with the target value 1000 and the current position will be 1000 Home return e When executing the F171 SPDH instruction the pulse is continuously output until the home input X2 or X5 is enabled e To decelerate the movement when near the home position designate a near home input and set bit 4 of special data register DT90052 to off on off e The deviation counter clear output can be output when home return has been completed JOG operation e Pulses are output from the specified channel while the trigger for F172 PLSH instruction is in the ON state Also the pulse output can be stopped when the specified target value is matched e The direction output and output frequency are specified by F172 PLSH instruction 6 20 6 4 3 I O Allocation Double pulse input driver CW pulse input and CCW pulse input method e Two output contacts are used as a pulse output for CW CCW e The I O allocation of pulse output terminal and home input is determined by the channel us
199. ed 2 Writes the DT50 and DT51 of the local unit into the data DTO and DT1 in the unit number 1 from the COM1 port 3 Reads the data DTO and DT1 in the unit number 1 into the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit from the COM1 port Note The above COM1 port will be COM2 port for the COM2 port 7 34 7 5 Communication Function General purpose Serial Communication 7 5 1 General purpose Serial Communication Overview e In general purpose serial communication data is sent and received over the COM ports to and from an external device such as an image processing device or a bar code reader e Data is read from and written to an external device connected to the COM port by means of an FPZ program and the FP data registers Image processing device Sending data using F159 MTRN Data is sent by transferring the data to Data register DT a data register and then transmitting it using the F159 MTRN instruction Receiving data Data is received by transferring the data from the RS232C port to the data register specified in the system register as the receive buffer and then being stored there automatically Sending and receiving data with the external devices M is carried out via the data register Le pumara L Outline of operation To send data to and receive it from an external device using the general purpose serial communication function the data transmission and data reception
200. ed e Set the control code for F171 SPDH instruction to CW CCW lt When using CHO gt FP gt Home input on Near home input Driver CW output YO Y1 CCW output X3 or any other input can be specified for the near home input Single pulse input driver lt When using CH2 gt FP gt Home input X5 x6 Near home input Driver CW output Y3 Y4 CCW output X6 or any other input can be specified for the near home input pulse input and directional switching input method e One output point is used as a pulse output and the other output is used as a direction output e The I O allocation of pulse output terminal direction output terminal and home input is determined by the channel used e Near home input is substituted by allocating the desired contact and turning on and off the lt bit4 gt of special data register DT90052 e Up to two driver systems can be connected lt When using CHO gt FPE Home input x x3 Near home input Driver Pulse output Direction output X3 or any other input can be specified for the near home input Reference lt 6 2 1 Table of Specifications gt lt When using CH2 gt FP gt Home input Near home input P Driver Pulse output Y3 Y4 Direction output X6 or any other input can be specified for the near home input 6 21 6 4 4 Pulse output control instructions FO
201. eeeeeeesneeeeeeeeeenensseeeeees 1 2 12 UNUTYPES 2ewcsieweass snczceseriecsosancdescacccsnsesacocctsseccue ssqccncesi uecdcazacssassuecccseecencandect soeieeacaeiemecceains 1 6 1 3 Restrictions ON Unit Combinations ceeseteetseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeooeeeeseeseneeeeeeeeeenees 1 12 1 4 Programming Tools iiis aa aap E eaa a aa aE OAE 1 14 2 Specifications and Functions of the Unit aannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 2 1 21 Parts and FUNCUONS ias 2 2 2 2 Input and Output Specifications wewsecs esis riveadecuivendeoredtsredswerwteruarsseraierteuredteoeiwveuteule 2 6 2 3 Terminal Layout Diagram sssnsnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn mnnn 2 11 2 4 Analog Potentiometer sissioni ainssi adaa tia iaeoa nipid ainia 2 13 2 5 Thermister Input Only for TM type cccsecsseeesceeeseeeeseeenseeeeseeenseeeseooesseeeseoeesseeesens 2 14 2 6 Clock Calendar Function iiccecscescostcassswecceeccceccasecvacsaccestersnecoececccossstsstcesuesseustenseccesceweests 2 17 3 Expansion a a 3 1 3 1 Type OF Expansion UNM ssie a aaa Eae aai 3 2 3 2 Expansion Method of FPO FPOR Expansion Unit cccceccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 3 3 3 3 Expansion Method of FP Expansion Unit ccccsessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeseeeeseneenseeesens 3 4 3 4 Specifications of FPX Expansion Unit s sssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 3 5 AVO PNOCAUON esoe ae a e a OaE EESE aSa 4 1 AT
202. een detected during the execution of the F145 SEND or F146 RECV COM1 port SEND RECV instructions as follows instruction execution Off No abnormality detected end flag On An abnormality detected communication error The error code is stored in DT90039 End code DT90124 COM2 port Goes on if a transmission error occurs during data inati communication Cea ern Goes off when a request is made to send data using the ag N instruction COM2 port reception done flag during Turn on when the terminator is received during general general purpose purpose serial communication communicating COM2 port transmission Goes on when transmission has been completed in done flag during general purpose serial communication general purpose Goes off when transmission is requested in general communication ourpose communication Monitors whether the F145 SEND or F146 RECV instructions can be executed or not ed at a e esa Off None of the above mentioned instructions can be executed During executing the instruction g On One of the above mentioned instructions can be executed Monitors if an abnormality has been detected during the execution of the F145 SEND or F146 RECV COM2 port SEND RECV instructions as follows instruction execution Off No abnormality detected end flag On An abnormality detected communication error The error code is stored in DT90039 End code DT90125 Raap Notused o R904D R904E Circula
203. egarded as duplicated output e If you enter RUN mode while the duplicated output condition exists it will be normally flagged as an error The ERROR ALARM LED will flash and the self diagnostic error flag R9000 will go on How to check for duplicated use You can check for duplicated outputs in the program using the programming tool by the following method Using the tool software Select the Debug gt Totally Check Program in the menu bar and click Execute If there are any duplicated outputs an error message and the address will be displayed Enabling duplicated output e If you need to use output repeatedly due to the content of the program duplicated output can be enabled e In this case change the setting of system register 20 to enable e When this is done an error will not occur when the program is executed 11 1 2 When Output is Repeated with an OT KP SET or RST Instruction Condition of internal and output relays during operation e When instructions are repeatedly used which output to internal and output relays such as transfer instructions and OT KP SET and RST instructions the contents are rewritten at each step during operation lt Example gt Processing when SET RST and OT instructions are used X0 to X2 are all on This section of the program is processed as If RO are on This section of the program is processed as if RO are off This section of the program is pro
204. elefsefefefe move PDMV a Erle EE invert and PMV O D move 32 bit data DMV Bee pcoggd Reading of GETS The head word No of the specified slot is head word PGETS read No of the Pict ice acca I specified slot Bit data BIM gt n The specified one bit in S is transferred to specified by n Hexadecimal DGT S n d The specified or one digit in S is transferred digit 4 bit PDGT to the eee one digit in D The digit is 7 o o aqaa oa a ea data move SID by n BCOEOGoo data move PMV2 S2 D TENT ER BEGEOOoo data move PDMV2 S2 D S241 S2 gt D 3 D 2 Z gt PBKMV S2 D transferred to the area starting at D A ee ee ee ee ee The data of S is transferred to the all area nee PCOPY D2 between D1 and D2 Data read ICRD S1 The data stored in the expansion memory from EEP S2 D of the EEP ROM specified by S1 and S2 ROM are transferred to the area starting at D Data write to The data specified by S1 and S2 are EEP ROM S2 D transferred to the EEP ROM starting at D The data stored in the expansion memory from F ROM S2 D ofthe F ROM specified by S1 and S2 are transferred to the area starting at D The data specified by S1 and S2 are F ROM S2 D transferred to the F ROM starting at D Data read ICRD S1 The data stored in the expansion memory from IC card PICRD S2 D ofthe IC card specified by S1
205. els 14 52 FP2SH FP10SH M M M i M FP2SH FP10SH Ope B Hal rand Pulse output S n Pulses are output from channel in Linear accordance with the designated 5 interpolation data table so that the path to the target position forms a straight line S Pulse output SPCH Circular interpolation Screen display instructions FP e screen SCR S1 S2 Register the screen displayed on display S3 S4 the FP e OO xX x x x xk xX registration FP e screen S Specify the screen to be displayed display on the FP e 3 O x x x x KI x switching n Pulses are output from channel in accordance with the designated 5 i data table so that the path to the target position forms an arc Basic function instruction Auxiliary DSTM S D Turn on the specified output and timer 32 bit R900D after 7195 0 l lj j 0 01 s x set value Time FILTR 1 2 Executes the filter processing for f constant S3 D the specified input x x O i 5 x x processing alal 2 Data transfer instructions P190 data move PMV3 S3 D S3 gt D 2 ME E ee ee Three 32 bit DMV3 S1 S2 S1 1 1 gt D 1 D S2 1 S3 D 5 D 4 Logic operation instructions AND PDAND D S 2 D 1 D ee ee ee ee ee OR PDOR D D Wea ie a F217 32 bit data DXOR 1 2 P217 XOR PDXOR D S14 1 S1 AND S2 1 S2 OR S1 1 S1 AND S2 1 S2 D 1 D F218 32 bit data DXNR S1 S2 S14 1 S1 AND S2
206. en an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 14 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 15 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 16 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode 14 17 WR909 Description Koi Turns on when Unit No 1 Is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 1 is in the PROG mode ae Turns on when Unit No 2 Is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 2 is in the PROG mode a Turns on when Unit No 3 Is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 3 is in the PROG mode oe Turns on when Unit No 4 Is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 4 is in the PROG mode oi Turns on when Unit No 5 Is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 5 is in the PROG mode PI Turns on when Unit No 6 Is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 6 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 7 Is in the RUN mode No 7 Turns off when Unit No 7 is in the PROG mode ERE Turns on when Unit No 8 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 8 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 9 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 9 is in t
207. entheses For the FP and FP X the number of steps varies according to the specified timer number or counter number 14 34 FP2SH FP10SH H UP DOWN F118 Increments or decrements from the counter UDC preset value S based on up down T input Shift ig PERIN Shifts one bit of 16 bit word internal register Shift relay WR data to the left Reset Left right F119 LE abm Shifts one bit of 16 bit data range shift LRSR LE specified by D1 and D2 to the left or register to the right Control instructions Master control relay Starts the master control program iMG nH Master control area The program jumps to the label instruction and continues from there Master MCE Ly p T Ends the master control program control relay end JP LBL Auxiliary F19 The program jumps to the label jump SJP sere instruction specified by S and continues from there Label LBL LOOP The program jumps to the label instruction and continues from there the number of jumps is set in S Stops program execution when the predetermined trigger turns on in the TEST RUN mode only Q Available Not available Not available partially 1 In the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when internal relay WR240 or higher is used the number of steps is the number in parentheses Also in the FP2 FP2SH FP10SH when the specified internal relay number word address has an index modifier the number of steps is the num
208. entify the different PLCs on the same network The same number must not be used for more than one PLC on the same network If unit number setting switch is 0 SYS1 instruction and the system register Is valid If unit number setting switch is a number other than 0 the unit number setting switch is valid and the unit number setting with the system register is ignored The same unit number is given to both COM1 port and COM2 port Note When using the PC PLC link with the RS232C the number of units is 2 1 53 Setting unit numbers with the setting switch The unit number setting switch is located underneath the cover on the left side of the FP control unit The selector switch and the dial can be used in combination to set a unit number between 1 and 16 With the RS232C a maximum of 2 unit number can be set Unit number setting switch Selector switch Dial switch e The numbers in a range of 1 to 16 can be set using the unit number setting E switch With the RS232C set it to 1 or 2 o OFF 2 e Set the unit number setting switch to 0 to en make the system register setting valid 23 Not available Individual settings are possible using the 3S system register setting m or e s oFF o Setting with the system register Setting the unit number setting switch to 0 makes the system register settings valid Set the unit numbers using the FPWIN GR programming tool Select PLC Configuration under Option
209. er supply cable AFPG805 that comes with the unit M Left side connector for FPE expansion This is used to connect dedicated FP expansion unit on the left side of the control unit with the internal circuit Note FPG C32T nor FPG C32TTM control units are not equipped with this connector 2 Unit No Station No setting switch The unit number setting switch is located under the left side cover of the unit Unit numbers are set with the switch and dial for using the communication function with an optional communication cassette The switch is set to OFF and the dial is set to 0 at the factory and the unit number setting is available using system registers When the switch is OFF and the dial is set to any of 1 to F each unit number is 1 to 15 When the switch is ON and the dial is set to any of 1 to F each unit number is 16 to 31 Unit No S Unit No a x OFF 0 16 ON 0 01 OFF 1 17 ON 1 02 OFF 2 18 ON 2 03 OFF 3 19 ON 3 04 OFF 4 20 ON 4 05 OFF 5 21 ON 5 06 OFF 6 22 ON 6 07 OFF 7 23 ON 7 08 OFF 8 24 ON 8 09 OFF 9 25 ON 9 10 OFF A 26 ON A 11 OFF B 27 ON B 12 OFF c 28 ON C 13 OFF D 29 ON D 14 OFF E 30 ON E 15 OFF F 31 ON F Unit numbers can be set using system registers Note The unit number of tool port cannot be set Also when using a 2 channel cassette the both channel
210. er the password in hex Gig O Do not forget this password The setting has completed AN PLC became digabled to writetead Setting to allow the access to the program by inputting a password As the dialog box is shown select as below x Set PLC Password Untitlel PLE Home Operation Mode Access Protect i Unprotect Password Enter in hex E Operation Mode Select Access Close Force Cancel 4 digits password Input a password to be set Help PLE Click Settings The setting has completed FPWIN GR x N PLC became enabled to writerread EFT Note If the power supply of the PLC is turned on off with the setting that the access is allowed the setting will be that the PLC is protected again How to cancel the password setting Following two methods are available to cancel the password setting Unprotect Cancels the registered password to be specified All programs are retained Erases all programs and security information to All programs are deleted er t The upload protection setting is rorcegancel sancalthe setting forcibly also deleted Releasing the protect of PLC Programs are retained As the dialog box is shown select as below Set PLC Password Untitlel PLE Home Operation Mode Access Operation Mode Select Unprotect Close Force Cancel 4 digits pa
211. eration error occurred is stored non hold in DT90018 The contents change each time a new error occurs This is set if an overflow or underflow occurs in the R9009 Carry flag calculation results and as a result of a shift system instruction being executed R900A gt Fla Turns on for an instant when the compared results become g larger in the comparison instructions Turns on for an instant when the compared results are equal in the comparison R900B instructions when the calculated results become 0 in the arithmetic instructions smaller in the comparison instructions Turns on when the set time elapses set value reaches 0 in Auxiliary timer the timing operation of the F137 STMR F183 DSTM instruction flag auxiliary timer instruction The flag turns off when the trigger for auxiliary timer instruction turns off Tool port TAN R900E Aoi Turns on when communication error at tool port is occurred communication error Turns on when scan time exceeds the time specified in R900F Constant scan error flag system register 34 during constant scan execution This goes on if 0 has been set using system register 34 14 10 Backup battery error flag hold Operation error flag hold R900D WR901 Relay No Name Description R9010 Goes on for only the first scan after operation RUN has been started and goes off for the second and subsequent scans Goes off for only the first scan after operation R
212. ersion F251 ATOB ASCII Binary conversion lt SYS instructions gt UP DOWN switching of HSC by SYS1 instruction Addition of 8 digit password operation by SYS1 instruction Addition of operation by SYS2 instruction MODBUS master instructions een be wows F145 SEND Data send F146 RECV Data receive MEW TOCOL master instructions F145 SEND Data send F146 RECV Data receive F356 EZPID Easy PID instructions lt Partial I O refresh gt Partial I O refresh for FPO expansion lt 10us ring counter current value read gt FO MV DT90020 D lt New PID instruction gt F356 EZPID F182 FILTR Time constant processin Sampling trace function Refer to Chapter 9 Sampling by instructions F155 SMPL Sampling F156 STRG Sampling trigger Sampling by specifying time Leading contact trailing contact instructions STT ANT ORT STY ANY ORY An arbitrary device can be specified for the setting value of Timer counter instruction 32k type V3 10 e g TML 0 DTO Other additional convenient instructions F252 ACHK ASCII data check F284 RAMP Inclination output Baud rate setting 300 600 1200 bps by SYS instruction High speed operation FO MV and F1 DMV instructions Execution time Approx 1us Only when every operands are without index modifier Function addition to existing instructions F70 BCC Block check code calculation F356 EZPID Easy PID instruction M Reference lt Programming Manual ARCT1F313E gt viii Programming Tool
213. ery 10 24 us HO to HFFFF Difference between the values of the two A JA N A W N N N N points absolute value x 10 24 us Elapsed time between the two points Note The exact value is 10 24 us DT90021 Notused Jo SCN NAA Note1 It is renewed once at the beginning of each one scan Note2 As DT90020 is renewed even if FO MV DT90020 and D instruction is being executed it can be used to measure the block time A Available N A Not available ing n W g The current scan time is stored here Scan oan ee curren Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 N A value ms Example K50 indicates 5 ms The minimum scan time is stored here Scan time is calculated using the formula N A N A A DT90022 vale NOG minimum Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 ms Example K50 indicates 5 ms The maximum scan time is stored here The Scan time maximum scan time is calculated using the formula ote Scan time ms stored data decimal x 0 1 A DT90023 DT90024 N value ms Example K125 indicates 12 5 ms The mask conditions of interrupts using the instruction can be stored here Monitor using Mask condition binary display monitoring register for interrupts INTO to 7 7 3 O INTNo O interrupt disabled 1 interrupt enabled time is calculated using the formula i N DT90026 Notused J o S Periodical interru t The value set by ICTL instruction is stored DT90027
214. es on YO is output LO Y S D YO output J Unit no 3 When L1 of the link relay goes on Y1 is output LO a i tl as c J YO output J 7 65 7 6 5 PC PLC link Response Time The maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle can be calculated using the following formula max s1 s2 sn lt Tso Tlk e TIk link addition processing time Ts transmission time per station Tso master station scan time TIt link table sending time The various items in the formula are calculated as described below Ts transmission time per station Ts scan time Tpc PC PLC link sending time Tpc Ttx Sending time per byte x Pem PC PLC link sending size Ttx 1 baud rate x 1000 x 11 ms Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Pem 23 number of relay words number of register words x 4 Tit link table sending time Tit Ttx Sending time per byte x Ltm link table sending size Ttx 1 baud rate x 1000 x 11 ms Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Ltm 13 2 x n n number of stations being added Tso master station scan time This should be confirmed using the programming tool Tik link addition processing time If no stations are being added Tik 0 Tik Tic link addition command sending time Twt addition waiting time Tis Sending time for command to stop transmission if link e
215. es the load voltage Averag rectified torward current Load current or more Precautions when using capacitive loads When connecting loads with large in rush currents to minimize their effect connect a protection circuit as shown below Resistor Output inductor O terminal Output 4 terminal FPE FP gt COM About the short circuit protective circuit To prevent the output circuit from being damaged by a short circuit or other electrical problems on the output side a transistor with short circuit protection is provided Excluding the YO 1 3 4 of the FP control unit and the FPO expansion unit 5 3 3 Precautions Regarding Input and Output Wirings e Be sure to select the thickness dia of the input and output wires while taking into consideration the required current capacity e Arrange the wiring so that the input and output wiring are separated and these wirings are separated from the power wiring as much as possible Do not route them through the same duct or wrap them up together e Separate the input output wires from the power and high voltage wires by at least 100mm 3 937 in 5 14 5 4 Wiring of MIL Connector Type Supplied connector and suitable wires The connector listed below is supplied with the FP control unit Use the suitable wires given below Also use the required pressure connection tools for connecting the wires Suitable wires Nominal cross Insulat
216. esseseeg IF the internal relay is not held select this C Not initialize IF the internal relay is held with a backup battery select this System register No 7 Starting word No in internal relay holding area Bak Wet cae cton Value of system register No 7 Non hold hold type setting after conversion Starting word No of internal relay hold area Non hold area RO te Raaz RO to R247F R2480 to R255F RO to R89F R900 to R255F Not initialize EA note When a memory backup battery is not used select Initialize in the above wizard If Not initialize is selected the value of data in the hold area may be indefinite 5 Select Initialize or Not initialize and press the Next button The menu for selecting a program conversion method is displayed See the next page for the examples of conversion methods Convert PLC Type Change FP SIGMA Type Change program Select one of the followings to perform the automatic backup correctly after converting PLC type r m a A C Convert internal relay No automatically C Not change The existing program does not change 4 process is added to transfer data in the 12K type and 32K type fixed holding areas to the head and end of the program Fixed holding area 12K type WR9O WR R900 R97F 32K type WR248 WR255 R2480 R255F Note It is not necessary to change the internal relay No registered in other d
217. ession of numbers for input output relays Since input relay X and output relay Y are handled in units of 16 points they are expressed as a combination of decimal and hexadecimal numbers as shown below Decimal e Slot No Slot No is the number indicating the installing position of the expansion unit which is used to generate programs by some FP expansion unit 4 2 4 2 Allocation of FPX Control Unit 4 2 1 1 O Number of FPX Control Unit The I O allocation of FPX control unit is fixed Type of control unit Number of allocation I O number FPG C32T FPG C32TTM Input 16 points XO to XF FPG C32T2 FPG C32T2TM i FPG C32TH FPG C32THTM Output 16 points YO to YF FPG C28P2 FPG C28P2TM FPG C28P2H FPG C28P2HTM FPG C24R2 FPG C24R2TM FPG C24R2H FPG C24R2HTM 4 3 4 3 Allocation of FP Expansion Unit The FP expansion unit is installed on the left side of the FP control unit The I O numbers of the FP expansion unit start with the lowest number at the right and proceed in sequential order 4 3 1 V O Numbers of FP Expansion Unit e O do not need to be set as I O allocation is performed automatically when an expansion unit is added e The I O allocation of expansion unit is determined by the installation location Expansion Expansion Expansion Expansion Number of p j i unit 2 unit 3 unit 4 allocation E Slot 2 Slot 3 EPY Input X100 to X180 to X260 to X340 to Expansion FPG 32 points X11F X19F X2
218. et in S The reception done flag R9038 R9048 is turned off and the reception data number is cleared to O 2 The set data is transmitted in order from the lower order byte in S 1 of the table e During transmission the transmission done flag R9039 R9049 turns off e f system register 413 or 414 is set to header start code with STX the header is automatically added to the beginning of the data e The terminator end code specified in system register 413 or 414 is automatically added to the end of the data DTIOi DTIG2 OTIC DTI04 Transmission data A B C D E F G H er R9039 ON R9049 OFF Execution condition ON RO OFF F159 MTRN execution During transmission During this interval the F159 MTRN instruction cannot be executed 3 When all of the specified quantity of data has been transmitted the S value is cleared to 0 and the transmission done flag R9039 R9049 turns on When you do not wish to add the terminator end code during transmissions e Specify the number of bytes to be transmitted using a negative number e If you also do not wish to add a terminator to received data set system register 413 or 414 to Terminator None Programming example The following program transmits 8 bytes of data without adding the terminator RO oF _ 1 1 gt F159 MTRN DT100 K 8 K 1 T yg Key Point e Do not include the terminator end code in the transmission data The
219. evices such as a programmable display Bak Eem cme 6 Select a program conversion method and press the Execute button The program is converted by the specified method and a message indicating that the conversion was completed is displayed Xi gy Key Point The results of various conversions when the following program of FP 12k type is converted are shown below A Convert_FPG12k_FPG32k_Before Ladder Symbol View Colea FP SIGMA 12K 0 3 Offline Home When selecting Add transfer program automatically Programs for transferring internal relays in the hold type area are inserted before and after the program before conversion The internal relay numbers in the program before conversion are not converted AS program compatibility is retained for accessing corresponding internal relays from an external device such as a programmable display it is not necessary to change the settings of the external device Ii Convert_FPG12k_FPG32k_After Ladder Symbol View FP SIGMA 32K 0 21 Offline Home When selecting Convert internal relay No automatically Only internal relay numbers are converted Internal relays WR90 to WR9Q7 in the program before conversion are converted to WR248 to WR255 For accessing corresponding internal relays from an external device such as a programmable display it is necessary to change the settings of the external device Ii Convert_FPG12k_FPG32k_Before Lad
220. exclusive ground for each device C CORRECT x INCORRECT Other device Inverter etc Note Depending on the surroundings in which the equipment is used grounding may cause problems Other device Inverter ete Example Since the power supply line of the FPE power supply connector is connected to the function earth through a varistor if there is an irregular potential between the power supply line and earth the varistor may be shorted i 24 V DC eTA L V 0 OV l Varistor Varistor I 82 V C32 C28 39 V 56 V C24 Function Function earth earth FPO expansion unit FP E power supply line power supply line Do not ground the FP function earth terminal when grounding a plus terminal of the power In some computers the SG terminal of RS232C port and connector shielding are connected Also the FP tool port shielding is connected with the function earth terminal Therefore the GND terminal of FP and the function earth terminal are connected if the computer is connected Especially when the FP is connected to a computer with a plus terminal grounded therefore an FP s minus terminal is connected with the function earth terminal As a result short circuit occurs which may lead to the breakage of FP and its neighboring parts Shielding Shielding Grounding Grounding 9 10 5 3 Wiring of Input and Output 5 3 1 Input Wiring Connection of photoelectric sensor and proximity
221. flag number specification yg Key Point e The contact numbers in parentheses refer to COM2 port R9038 R9048 7 42 Data to be sent received with FP Remember the following when accessing data in the FP2 send and receive buffers e f a header has been chosen in the communication format settings the code STX H02 will automatically be added at the beginning of the data begin sent e The data without the Code STX at the reception is stored in the receive buffer and the reception done flag turns on when the terminator end code is received However if the code STX is added in the middle of the data the number of received byte is cleared to 0 and the data is stored from the beginning of the receive buffer e A terminator is automatically added to the end of the data being sent e There is no terminator on the data stored in the receive buffer Sending data Data written to the send buffer will be sent just as it is Example The data 12345 is transmitted as an ASCII code to a device with RS232C port 1 Data sent using the F95 ASC instruction should be converted to ASCII code data Conversion to ASCII code 123945 Data to be transmitted Conversion to ASCII code H 31 32 33 34 35 Coded data 1 2 3 4 5 2 If DT100 is being used as the send buffer data will be stored in sequential order in the data registers starting from the next register DT101 in two byte units consisting of the up
222. functions described below are used The F159 MTRN instruction and the reception done flag are used in these operations to transfer data between the FP and an external device Sending data Data to be transmitted from the PLC is stored in the data register used as the send buffer DT When F159 MTRN is executed the data is output from the COM port e The terminator specified in the system register is automatically added to the data ma Data register DT r at using that has been sent ted datz e The maximum volume of data that can be sent is 2048 bytes Device with RS232C port 7 35 Receiving data Data received from the COM port is stored in the receive buffer specified in the system register and the reception done flag goes on Data can be received whenever the reception done flag is off Data register DT Data receiving Device with RS232C port ie Reception done flag on FPE 7 36 e When data is being received the reception done flag is controlled by the F159 MTRN instruction e No terminator is included in the stored data e The maximum volume of data that can be received is 4096 bytes Setting Baud rate communication format By default the COM port is set to Computer link System register settings should be entered for the following items The settings for baud rate and communication format are made using the FPWIN GR programming tool Select Opti
223. fy the effective interrupt edge When set ON OFF is valid Note1 If the operation mode is set to Two phase incremental decremental or incremental decremental control the setting for CH1 is invalid in part 2 of system register 400 and the setting for CH3 is invalid in part2 of system register 401 Note2 If reset input settings overlap the CH1 setting takes precedence in system register 400 and the CH3 setting takes precedence in system register 401 Note3 The settings for pulse catch and interrupt input can only be specified in system registers 402 and 403 Note4 If system register 400 to 403 have been set simultaneously for the same input relay the following precedence order is effective High speed counter Pulse catch gt Interrupt input lt Example gt When the high speed counter is being used in the addition input mode even if input XO is specified as an interrupt input or as pulse catch input those settings are invalid and X0 functions as counter input for the high speed counter 14 7 Default Descriptions value i Pd ToD SES E Sommer ik COMPUTE link Selection of modem Disabled Enabled Disabled Enter the settings for the various items Data length bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity check none with odd with even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits The following setting is valid only when the communication mode specified by system register 412 has been set to General purpose serial communication Terminator
224. g data The reception done flag the transmission done flag and the F159 MTRN instruction are related as follows Transmitted date STX a G Er STX a e Em Transmission Transmission ON Transmission done flag R9039 or OFF R9049 Duplex transmission ON disabled while F159 MTRN is bein F159 MTRN A OFF instruction execution Send buffer a a D b EF O Ce S Number of bytes not p p po 2 gt yer kananniag Transmission pointer e Header STX and terminator ETX are automatically added to the data being transmitted The data is transmitted to an external device e When the F159 MTRN instruction is executed the transmission done flag R9039 or R9049 goes off e Duplex transmission is disabled while F159 MTRN is being executed The transmission done flag R9039 or R9049 must be observed yg Key Point e The contact numbers in parentheses refer to COM2 port 7 46 Changing communication mode of COM port An F159 MTRN instruction can be executed to change between general purpose serial communication mode and computer link mode To do so specify H8000 for n the number of transmission bytes and execute the instruction Changing from general purpose to computer link R9032 RO HDF H i 1 gt F159 MTRN DT100 H8000 K1 Set to H8000 Specify the port to be changed Changing from computer link to general purp
225. g the first scan and turns on at the second scan lt Example 1 gt DF leading edge differential instruction 0 Ls Y HDF 5 i Add R9014 AQ R9014 YO H oF L RUN Power on Even if X0 was initially on the input condition for the DF instruction is off to on at the second scan therefore derivative output is obtained lt Example 2 gt CT counter instruction Add R9014 AQ R9014 H CT 100 X1 RUN Power on AQ CT100 counting operation K Even if X0 was initially on the input condition for the counter is off to on at the second scan therefore the count is incremented 11 10 11 5 3 Precautions When Using a Control Instruction e f a leading edge detection instruction is in a control instruction it will be executed only under the following condition The leading edge detection instruction was off when the execution condition of the previous control instruction was reset and the leading edge detection instruction is on when the execution condition of the current control instruction becomes on e When a leading edge detection instruction is used with an instruction which changes the order of instruction execution such as MC MCE JP or LBL the operation of the instruction may change as follows depending on input timing Take care regarding this point lt Example 1 gt Using the DF instruction between MC and MCE instructions XO X1 YO X1 was on when 4 X0 became off The input
226. g tool software To specify the steps to be taken by the FPWIN GR if a PLC error occurs select PLC System Register setting under Option on the menu bar and click on the Action on Error tab ile screen shown below is displayed PLC Configuration Untitle x Example1 When allowing duplicated High Speed Counter Interrupt Input Tool Port COMI Port GOM2 Port output Hold Non hold 1 Hold Non hold 2 Action on Error Time Link m eai Disable setings for duplicated oulpul cel Turn off the check box for No 20 When e ea eaten feed rc operation is resumed it will not be handled v No top when an verification error occurs Dwie as an error JV No 26 Stop when an operation error occurs Heb Example2 When continuing operation even a calculation error has occurred Turn off the check box for No 26 When operation is resumed it will be continued but will be handled as an error No 4 Alarm Battery Error 10 2 10 2 Troubleshooting 10 2 1 If ERROR ALARM LED is Flashing Condition The self diagnostic error occurs Procedure 1 Check the error contents error code using the programming tool Using FPWIN GR With the FPWIN GR Ver 2 if a PLC error occurs during programming or debugging and the RUN mode is changed to the PROG mode the following status display dialog box is displayed automatically Check the contents of the self diagnosed error Status display dialog box
227. ge W of the resistor is _ Power supply voltage R W In the actual selection use a value that is 3 to 5 times the value of W 5 11 Precaution when using LED equipped limit switch If the input of PLC does not turn off because of the LED i leakage current from the LED equipped limit m E sa peta switch the use of a bleeder resistor is switch recommended as shown below Power supply for input r Internal resistor of limit switch k amp R Bleeder resistor k 2 The off voltage of input is 2 4 V therefore when the power supply voltage is 24 V select the bleeder resistor R so that 24 24 The current will be greater than l The resistance R of the bleeder resistor is 13 44 _ a ko 5 6 x1 2 4 RS The wattage W of the resistor is Power supply voltage R Wz x 3 to 5 times 5 12 5 3 2 Output Wiring Protective circuit for inductive loads e With an inductive load a protective circuit should be installed in parallel with the load e When switching DC inductive loads with relay output type be sure to connect a diode across the ends of the load When using an AC inductive load Surge absorber Varistor Output 4 terminal Output terminal T FP gt Example of surge absorber Resistance R 50 Q Capacity C 0 47 uF When using a DC inductive load Diode terminal gt Output may 1 Diode Reverse voltage 3 tim
228. get positions for the current position 6 50 Sample program Continuous interpolation control linear and circular e Using linear and circular interpolation functions perform positioning control that draws trajectory like the one shown below e The interval between the first position P1 and P2 and the interval between P3 and P4 perform control using linear interpolation e The interval between P2 and P3 performs circular interpolation control using center designation e The interval between P4 and P1 performs circular interpolation control using passing position designation X axis CHO CW direction P1 0 0 P2 10000 0 S 5000 5000 Q 10000 5000 P4 0 10000 P3 10000 10000 CW direction I O Allocation R20 From P1 to P2 start R903C__ Controlflag CH2 Z R21 __ From P2 to P3 start R904E__ Circular interpolation control flag Positioning done 6 51 Data register allocation Data register DTO to DT1 Conkolcode Control code when executing linear interpolation absolute User setting DT2 to DT3 Startup speed 2000 Hz area for linear DT4 to DT5 Target speed 2000 Hz celeration time P1 to P2 DTS to DT9 Target position Specify the target position of X axis when moving from P3 to P4 X axis P1 to P2 and P3 to P4 Target position Specify the target position of Y axis when moving from Workarea DT12 to DT23 Operation result Parameters calculated due to instruction execution
229. gt _ gt d gt gt gt UCU o S T T gt gt gt gt gt gt BE A Available 14 71 Table of MEWTOCOL COM Communication Error Error Description code p 124 NACK error Link system error EA WACK error Link system error 123 Unit No overlap Link system error Transmission format Link system error error Link unit hardware Link system error error 126 Unit No setting error Link system error S i 128 Noresponseerror Linksystemerror S O Link system error 130 Time outerror out error Link system error Transmission Link system error a error 133 Communication stop Link system error 136 No destination error Link system error Other communication Link system error error 140 BCCerror s A transfer error occurred in the received data Hat Format err __ A command was received that does not fit the format 142 No support error A command was received that is not supported ve eae ag eS procedure error frames 80 Unkseting emer ine rumpor by desigraing ne taneisoon station Link setting error ee route number by designating the transmission station e e ear e time out error transmission buffer is congested a disable Transmission processing to another device is not possible Link unit runaway etc Command process cannot be received because of multiple sa frame processing Or cannot be received because command being processed is congested 6
230. he MEWTOCOL master via COM port OC x x pa oO oO a _ A e7 F147 S D Converts the ASCII code data in the area starting with S for printing and outputs it to the word external output relay WY specified by D F148 Self ERR n Stores the self diagnostic error number P148 diagnostic PERR n in DT9000 turns R9000 on and 3 error set to K299 turns on the ERROR LED F149 Message Displays the character constant of S in P149 display the connected programming tool O Available gt x lt Not available Not available partially The instruction is available for FPO T32 type V2 3 or later 2 This instruction is available for FP X V1 20 or later and FP 32k type 3 This instruction is available for FP X V2 50 or later and FP V3 20 or later 4 This instruction is available for FPO V1 20 or later h 14 48 Ope Fe _ ree rand Fe ee ee intelligent unit PREAD n D intelligent unit 3 baa oa lace BEE PWRT n D unit 3 Data write into intelligent unit Data read from MEWNET F slave station Data write into MEWNET F slave station RMRD S1 S2 PRMRD n D RMWT S1 S2 PRMWT n D SMPL Starts sampling data PSMPL Sampling STRG trigger PSTRG F157 Time addition CADD S2 P157 PCADD F158 Time CSUB S1 S2 PCSUB D P158 MTRN S n D PMTRN MCU serial port MRCV S D1 reception PMRCV D2 BIN arithmetic instruction F160 Doubl
231. he PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 10 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 10 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 11 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 11 is in the PROG mode operation nos R9098 mode relay g 32k only Ho R909A ER R909B Turns on when Unit No 12 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 12 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 13 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 13 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 14 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 14 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 15 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 15 is in the PROG mode Turns on when Unit No 16 is in the RUN mode Turns off when Unit No 16 is in the PROG mode 14 18 14 1 3 Table of Special Data Registers for FP amp The special data registers are one word 16 bit memory areas which store specific information A Available N A Not available Register rT Read Writ Descriptions i ing ing DT90000 Self diagnostic error The self diagnostic error code is stored here A N code when a self diagnostic error occurs DT90001 Notused N A When an error occurs at FP expansion I O unit the bit corresponding to the unit No will Positionmorabnonmal be set on 1 Monitor using binary display DT90002 I O unit for FP left 15 11 3 2 1 0 Bit No A side expansion OO T T 3 2 1 0 Unit No on 1 error off 0 normal N A N A N A N
232. he next data The data in the receive buffer is not cleared Note e Be aware that the reception done flag R9038 or R9048 changes even while a scan is in progress e g if the reception done flag is used multiple times as an input condition there is a possibility of different statuses existing within the same scan To prevent multiple read access to the special internal relay you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program Explanatory diagram Data register DT Ha 4d3aadsaea7 de lt q OS Receive Reception done Re038 0N ane a DReceplion ready ROOS8OF FP i Device with RS232C port ad 7 41 Explanation of data table Data sent from an external device connected to the RS232C port is stored in the data registers that have been set as the receive buffer Tenanan e Specify the data registers in system register 416 to received is stored in 419 this area i e The number of bytes of data received is stored in the starting address of the receive buffer The initial value is O Reception data storage area e Received data is stored in the received data storage The circled numbers indicate the arder of area in order from the lower order byte storage Reception process When the reception done flag R9038 R9048 is off operation takes place as follows when data is sent from an external device The R9038 R9048 flag is off during the first scan after RUN 1 I
233. he positioning xC start done was done or not Emergency stop SW Forced stop program If XC turns on the output of the pulse is stopped AG L FO MV H8 DT90052 Emergency stop SVV FOMV HO DT90052 FO MV H2008 DT90052 LILI LI LJ FO MV H2000 DT90052 ED 6 54 Sample program Continue mode method e This is a program that continually executes the circular interpolation action e Start the first point P1 0 0 overwrite the target value three times and move to final position P4 e To overwrite the data after startup use the special internal relay R904F and a shift register CH2 CW direction Y axis X axis CHO CW direction I O Allocation Ro Positioning running R903C_ Control flag CH2 R1 Positioning done R904E_ Circular interpolation control flag R10 __ Data setting for the control from P1 to P2_ R904F_ Set value change confirmation flag R11 Data setting for the control from P2 to P3 R12 Data setting for the control from P3 to P4_ R13 Mode changing for stoppage _ Note R10 to R13 are used by shift register Data register allocation Continue mode Absolute Pass position setting method HE Ei a Rotation direction changes according to the control direction User DT1002 t0 1003 Composite setting DT1002 to 1003 to 1003 spee o 1000 Hz Anae DT1004 to 1005 Target position Target position X axis P2 to P4 DT1006 to 1007 Target po
234. he wire e In the terminal block socket construction if the wire is fastened upon counter clockwise rotation of the screw the connection is faulty Disconnect the wire check the terminal hole and then re connect the wire e f two wires are connected to the plus terminal and minus terminal of the RS485 of AFPG806 COM4 use the wires of the same cross sectional area which is 0 5 to 0 75 mm Clockwise Counter clockwise 7 3 3 Cables Please use the following cables for systems using RS485 type communication cassettes Appropriate electrical cables twisted cables z Sample Cross sectional Resist A j appropriate view ance cabi at 20 C Belden 9860 1 25 mm Max Hitachi Cable Polye AWG16 16 8 Ltd KPEV thylene 2 Shielded or greater Q km 1 25 mm x l i 4 1P twisted Con ductor We Belden 9207 pair r er 0 5mm Max E Hitachi Cable AWG20 33 4 a Ltd KPEV or greater Q km S0 5 mm x 1P y 0 75 mm Max Polychlo F a VCTF 0 75 p AWG18 25 1 rinated 3 Con mm x 2C JIS ductor or greater Q km biphenyl Note e Use shielded twisted pair cables e Use only one type of transmission cable Do not mix more than 1 type e Twisted pair cables are recommended in noisy environments e When using shielded cable with crossover wiring for the RS485 transmission line grounded one end e If two wires are connected to the plus terminal and minus terminal of the RS485 of
235. hen forced input output is initiated during RUN Forced set reset processing A input output update Forced set reset processing B eecced Operation Forced set reset processing Peripheral service LY 1 Processing of external input X e Regardless of the state of the input from the input device forced on off operation will take precedence at a contact specified for forced input output in the above procedure B At this time the input LED will not blink however the area of input X in the operation memory will be rewritten e Contacts not specified will read in the on off state according to the condition of the input from the input device 2 Processing of external output Y e Regardless of the result of operation forced on off will take precedence at a contact specified for forced input output in the above procedure A At this time the area of output Y in the operation memory will be forcedly rewritten External output will take place according to the input output update timing in the above diagram e The on off state of contacts not specified will be determined by the operation result 3 Processing of Timer T and Counter C e Regardless of the timer counter input condition forced on off operation will take precedence at a contact specified for forced input output At this time the contact of the timer T or counter C in the operation memory will be rewritten Timing
236. hen sampling starts 1 Rooze Sapporo onamo teo pE sameina sopo O O OO Note Available for the 32k type only 14 12 WR903 Relay No R9034 R9036 R9037 Name Description Turns on when the general purpose communication function is being used aaa meds Goes off when the MEW TOCOL COM or the PLC link j function is being used execution flag On Execution is in progress flag rewrite during the RUN operation Goes on is a transmission error occurs during data COM1 port J communication error communication flag Goes off when a request is made to send data using the F159 MTRN instruction COM1 port COM1 port reception done flag during general purpose communication COM1 port transmission Goes on when transmission has been completed in Turns on when the terminator is received during general purpose serial communication done flag during general purpose serial communication general purpose serial Goes off when transmission is requested in general communication purpose serial communication High speed Turn on while the high speed counter instructions counter control F166 HC15 F167 HC1R and the pulse output instructions flag F171 SPDH to F176 PWMH are executed High speed Turn on while the high speed counter instructions counter control F166 HC15 F167 HC1R and the pulse output instructions flag F171 SPDH to F176 PWMH are executed High speed Turn on while the high speed
237. high speed lt counter CHO _J f Target value match off instruction YO goes off when elapsed value of high __ Speed counter CHO reaches 5000 pulses gt E 32 bit data comparison instruction R900C tums on when the CHO high speed counter ee 2 cM f Speed reduction point reached ee CL 0 1 ee timer Setting K5 and usingitasaQ Sstimer _ 6 4 Pulse Output Function 6 4 1 Overview of Pulse Output Function Instructions used and controls Together with a commercially available pulse string input type motor driver the pulse output function can be used for positioning control Exclusive Type of control instru Description ction Provides trapezoidal table shaped control for automatically obtaining pulse outputs by specifying the initial soeed maximum speed acceleration deceleration time and target value Trapezoidal control F171 SPDH C32T aca Enables automatic home return operation C28P2 Causes pulses to be output as long as the ones C32TH F172 execution condition is on A target value can JOG operation C32T2H PLSH also be set so that pulse output stops at the C28P2H point when the target value is matched Data table conitrol F174 Enables positioning control in accordance with SPOH the data table Enables pulses to be output using linear interpolation control by specifying the composite speed the acceleration deceleration time and the target value The user can select one of two ci
238. ht shift registers are ignored Interrupt functions are stopped Internal clock relays special internal relays are also stopped Pulse output is stopped during the rewrite Set values for timer counter instructions All set values specified with decimal constants K in timer and counter instructions are preset in the corresponding set value areas SV Values in the elapsed value area EV do not change Operation of rewrite during RUN completed flag The rewrite during RUN completed flag R9034 is a special internal relay that goes on for only the first scan following the completion of rewriting in the RUN mode It can be used instead of the initial pulse relay following a change in the program 11 14 11 7 2 Cases Where Rewriting During Run is not Possible When the timeout error message is indicated Even if the timeout error message is indicated it is highly possible that the program in PLC has been already rewritten Carry out the following operations FPWIK GR 9 Timeout error while changing program in PLC Frogram may differ from PLC Please click below Help Button to find the way how to salwe it 1 When ladder symbol mode As a ladder editing is left set it to the offline edit mode Complete the program conversion in the tool software and then change to the online edit mode to check 2 When boolean mode A ladder editing is cleared Set it to the offline edit mode and carry out the editing operation
239. iagnosis function Such as watchdog timer program syntax check Available year month day hour minute second and day of Calendar timer week However this can only be used when a battery has been installed Backup by F12 P13 Flash ROM Data register 82765 words Notes backup Automatic backup Counter 16 points 1008 to 1023 internal relay 128 points R900 to R97F data register 55 words 32710 to 32764 Memory that is set as hold area at system register However only when an optional battery has been installed 220 days or more Actual usage value approx 840 days 25 C Battery life Periodic replacement interval 1 year Value applies when no power is supplied at all All kinds of comments including I O comments remarks and block comments can be stored 2 points Resolution 10 bits KO to K1000 C32T C32T2 C24R2 C28P2 only Thermister input 2 points Resolution 10 bits KO to K1000 C32TTM C32T2TM C24R2TM C28P2TM only PLC link function Program edition during RUN constant scan forced on off password floating point operation and PID processing Note1 The number of points actually available for use is determined by the hardware configuration Note2 The number of points can be increased by using an auxiliary timer Note3 Precision of calendar timer At 0 C less than 119 seconds per month At 25 C less than 51 seconds per month At 55 C
240. iation Name Signal direction Port SD Transmitted Data FPx External device R Received Data FPx lt External device O R O Request to Send FPx External device COM1 port Clear to Send FPx lt External device SG SignalGround SD RD RS CS SG Note1 RS Request to Send is controllable by the SYS1 instruction Note2 Data cannot be sent without the pin CS Clear to Send When using with a three wire port short circuit the pin RS and CS communication 1 N communication Computer link Available Not available General purpose serial communication Available Not available PC PLC link Available N MODBUS RTU Available Not available Note Number of units is two 2 channel RS232C type Product No AFPG802 This communication cassette is a 2 channel unit with a three wire RS232C port Communication with two external devices is possible Terminal layout Abbreviation Name Signal direction Port i se Transmitted Data 1 FP x External device M1 O R Received Data 1 FPx lt External device COMEpON a ae Transmitted Data 2 FP External device COM port OO R O Received Data 2 FPx lt External device COM1 port p11 communication 1 N communication Computer link Available Not available General purpose serial communication Available Not available 51 Ri 52 R2 SG PC PLC link Available MODBUS RTU Available Not available Note Number of units is two 1 channe
241. ication format The settings for baud rate and communication format of the COM port are entered using the FPWIN GR Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Double click COM Port There are separate settings for COM1 and COM2 Note Also select Computer Link when using the MEWTOCOL master function FP 32k type only Dialog box of PLC system register setting PLC Configuration Untitlel Hold Non hold 1 Hold Non hold2 Action on Error Time Link High Speed Counter Interrupt Input Tool Port COMI Port COM2 Port No 410 Unit No M Cancel No 412 Comm Mode Computer Link Modem Enabled M Pead PLC m No 413 Communication Format No 415 Baudrate Char Bit 8 Bits lemmata can ttt 9600 bps miai Parity Odd Ej Header eemo Hep Stop Bit fi No 410 unit number The unit number can be set within a range of 1 to 99 However if the unit no setting switch of the FP has been set to the numbers other than 0 the setting of the unit no setting switch becomes effective In this case the same number is given to the port 1 and port 2 When specifying the number by a system register set the unit no setting switch to 0 No 412 Communication mode Select the COM port operation mode Click on M l and select Computer Link No 413 for COM1 port No 414 for COM2 port Communication Format setting Default setting Char Bi
242. ices with Devices with RS232C port RS232C port RS232C port RS232C port Analog control supported An analog potentiometer volume dial is provided as a standard feature This can be used in applications such as analog timers without using the programming tools An analog unit is also available as the intelligent unit Type with thermister input function For the units of which part numbers or product numbers end in TM the leader line which enables the thermister input is equipped instead of an analog potentiometer The change of the resistance value of the thermister can be taken in as an analog value The thermister of which resistance value is from 200 to 75 KQ can be used Calender timer function can be added Optional backup battery enables the calender timer function Positioning control supported through high speed counter and pulse output A high speed counter and pulse output functions are provided as standard features The pulse output function supports frequencies of up to 100KHz enabling positioning control using a stepping motor or servo motor Measurement using high speed counter supported Increment input mode decrement input mode 2 phase input mode individual input mode and direction discrimination mode are supported 1 phase Max 50kHz 2 phase Max 20kHz Encoder Pulse input FPE JUUUL Encoder Pulse input STULL Positioning control based on pulse output supported Pulse direction and clockwise co
243. ich must be used in a pair in the correct positions An instruction has been written which does not agree with system register settings For example the number setting in a program does not agree with the timer counter range setting Change to PROG mode check the system register settings and change so that the settings and the instruction agree An instruction which must be written in a specific area main program area or subprogram area has been written to a different area for example a subroutine SUB to RET is placed before an ED instruction Change to PROG mode and enter the instruction into the correct area Parameter mismatch error Program area error A Available Note This error is also detected if you attempt to execute a rewrite containing a syntax error during RUN In this case nothing will be written to the CPU and operation will continue 14 63 14 64 Compile memory full error High level instruction type error High level instruction operand combina tion error No program error Rewrite during RUN syntax error Opera tion status Description and steps to take The program is too large to compile in the program memory Change to PROG mode and reduce the total number of steps for the program FP10SH If memory expansion is possible compilation will become possible when the memory is expanded In the program high level instructions which execute in every scan and a
244. ight P127 rotate with carry flag R9009 data F128 32 bit data left P128 rotate with carry flag R9009 data Bit manipulation instructions 16 bit data bit set BTS 16 bit data bit BTR 16 bit data invert BTI PBTI 16 bit data bit test BTT DRCL PDRCL U J O J U D n Sets the value of bit position n of the data of D to 1 n Sets the value of bit position n of the data of D to 0 n Inverts the value of bit position n of the data of D Tests the value of bit position n of PBTT the data of D and outputs the result to R900B Stores the number of on bits in the Number of on 1 BCU bits in 16 bit data PBCU data of S in D Available X Not available Not available partially D D a o D n 14 47 FP2SH FP10SH j t Ope lean rand Number of DBCU S D Stores the number of on bits in the data on 1 bits in PDBCU 32 bit data of S 1 S in D Basic function instruction F137 Auxiliary STMR S D Turns on the specified output and R900D olo timer 16 bit after 0 01 s x set value ia Special instructions F138 Hours min S D Converts the hour minute and second P138 utes and sec data of S 1 S to seconds data and onds to the converted data is stored in D 1 D seconds data Seconds to S D Converts the seconds data of S 1 S to hours hour minute and second data
245. ight shift of BITR D1 Shifts the n bits of data range by P108 multiple bits n bits PBITR D2 n D1 and D2 to the right F109 BITL D1 Shifts the n bits of data range by P109 bits n bits PBITL D2 n D1 and D2 to the left k Right shift of one WSHR D1 Shifts the one word of the areas by word 16 bit PWSHR D2 D1 and D2 to the right V T oOo O D1 Shifts the one word of the areas by word 16 bit PWSHL D2 D1 and D2 to the left Right shift of one WBSR D1 Shifts the one digit of the areas by hexadecimal digit 4 PWBSR D2 D1 and D2 to the right bit Left shift of one WBSL D1 Shifts the one digit of the areas by hexadecimal digit 4 PWBSL D2 D1 and D2 to the left bit O Available Not available Not available partially 14 46 FP2SH FP10SH Ope SN W Boo lean p Description Ta rand PFIFT are defined in the buffer Wes aa ee Data read from S D The oldest data beginning from S FIFO buffer that was written to the buffer is read 5 x 0 O O OF and stored in D j F117 Data write into FIFW S D The data of S is written to the s xlxlo alaloa P117 FIFO buffer PFIFW buffer starting from D Me 7 7 7 Basic function instructions O S O Ei Basic function instructions UP DOWN UDC S D Counts up or down from the value counter preset in S and stores the 5 18 0
246. il Unperformable operations on the FP set to prohibit uploading 1 Uploading ladder programs and system registers to PCs 2 Transferring programs to FP memory loader The setting for this function can be cancelled using the programming tool however all ladder programs system registers and password information will be deleted when the setting is cancelled Ac Note When cancelling this setting forcibly All programs and security information will be deleted when the upload protection setting is cancelled We cannot restore the deleted programs even if you ask us We cannot read the data of the control units that are set to prohibit uploading Keeping your programs is your responsibility Interaction with the password protect function The password setting can be specified for the FP that this function is set at the same time Also this function can be specified for the FP that a password is set 8 3 1 Upload Protection Setting Use the programming tool to set the upload protection on the control unit 1 Set in the control unit using the programming tool 2 Specify the information on the upload protection in the master memory cassette and set in the control unit Setting using FPWIN GR 1 Select Online Edit Mode under the Online on the menu bar or press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select or Upload settings under Tool on the menu bar The following displa
247. in binary Input from a digital switch Use the BCD to BIN conversion instruction F81 cale Cj 6d _ J _ _ PTT BCD Conversion using F81 BIN instruction 9 9 2 1 M rr aT aT a BoD deta ofofofs sfofofs s ofo sJofo fo BCD data 10 0 0 4 1Jo 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 o nine rie enea COMPELLED Lr Converted to 1992 in decimal data Output to a 7 segment display with decoder Use the BIN to BCD conversion instruction F80 BIN Conversion l using F80 BCD instruction 7 segment display Dat di pte ei data Ch hho Data outputtom Tolo aojo Tooo 4 9 9 2 11 3 Handling Index Registers 11 3 1 Index Registers e Like other registers index registers have 14 points I0 to ID for reading and writing 16 bit data e Use an index register to indirectly specify a memory area number This is also called index modification lt Example gt Transferring the contents of data register DT100 to the number specified by the contents of an index register RO H Fo MV DT 100 I0DTO Base memory area In this example the number of the destination data register varies depending on the contents of 10 with DTO acting as a base For example when l0 contains K10 the destination will be DT10 and when 10 is K20 the destination will be DT20 e In this way index registers allow the specification of multiple memory areas with a single instruction and thus index registers are very
248. inals X0 to X7 input terminals X8 to XF and output terminals Between input output terminals and power supply terminal tunction earth Between input terminals X0 to X7 input terminals X8 to XF and power supply terminal function earth terminal function earth Between input terminals X0 to X7 and input terminals X8 to XF Between input terminals X0 to X7 input terminals X8 to XF and output terminals 24V DC 21 6 to 26 4V DC 4ms at 21 6V 7ms at 24V 10ms at 26 4V 3ms at 21 6V 5ms at 24V 8ms at 26 4V oe Breakdown voltage C28 Insulation resistance 5OOVAC for 1 minute N 5OOVAC for 1 minute 1500VAC for 1 minute 5OOVAC for 1 minute 1500VAC for 1 minute Min 100MQ measured with a 500V DC megger Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz 1 cycle min double amplitude of 0 75 mm 10 min on 3 axes Shock resistance Shock of 98 m s 4 times on 3 axes TEET 1000 Vp p with pulse widths 50 ns and ius based on in house Noise immunity EAI Operation condition Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust Note Cutoff current 10 mA However excluding varister for protection Factory default setting value 12 2 Weight Unittypee PartNo S Weight l FPG XY64D2T Febexpancioniunl Approx 859 16X E16YT E16YP ees Soe eaeenre FPO IOL FPO TC4 Approx 85g FPO TC8 Approx 95g FPO CCLS Approx 80g FPO A04V A04I RTD6 Approx 75g 12 3 Unit s current co
249. ing ing Step ladder process DT90060 0 to 15 DT90061 Step ladder process 16 to 31 Step ladder process 32 to 47 Step ladder process 48 to 63 Step ladder process DT90064 64 to 79 Step ladder process DT90065 80 to 95 Step ladder process anon 96 to 111 DT90067 Step ladder process Indicates the startup condition of the step 112 to 127 ladder process When the process starts up pT9006g SteP adder process the bit corresponding to the process number 128 to 143 turns on DT90069 Step ladder process 144 to 159 Monitor using binary display DT90070 Step ladder process 160 to 175 Step ladder process mekampis R A DT90071 e to 191 i 1511 3 O Bit No prsoso pT DT90072 Step ladder process 7 3 0 Process No 192 to 207 1 Executing 0 Not executing Step ladder process RORO 208 to 223 A Step ladder process A programming tool software can be used to 224 to 239 write data Step ladder process TOS 240 to 255 Step ladder process eoowre 256 to 271 Step ladder process di 272 to 287 DT90062 DT90063 Step ladder process 2120079 288 to 303 Step ladder process 304 to 319 Step ladder process eau 320 to 335 Step ladder process PORS 336 to 351 DT90079 14 25 A Available N A Not available an me ewe a No ing ing Step ladder process di abi 352 to 367 Step ladder process anita 368 to 383 Step ladder process eee 384 to 399 Step ladder process PL2 400 to 415
250. interpolation control Wiring diagram Input terminal Home sensor Near home sensor side Home sensor Near home sensor Home return start Positioning start Emergency stop CHO Moving table side CH2 Output terminal Common Motor driver Note If the input of the stepping motor is 5V photocoupler type connect a resistor of 2k Q 1 2 W to R1 and connect a resistor of 2k Q 1 2 W 470 Q 2 W to R2 6 44 Home return operation Minus direction When XA turns on the pulse is output from CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CHO and CCW output Y4 of the specified channel CH2 and the return to home begins In CHO when X3 turns on deceleration begins and when X2 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value areas DT90044 and DT90045 are cleared to 0 In CH2 when X6 turns on deceleration begins and when X5 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value areas DT90200 and DT90201 are cleared to 0 When the operations in both CHs is completed the return to home completes 0 V 24 V DC Home return start F Home input Near home input sre Home input Near home input Pulse output CW Pulse output CCW side side Motor Do o im CH1 X5 m TE X3 side side Motor O i im CHO X2 XO Home sensor Near hom
251. ion Rated eC me area thickness current AW G 22 0 3mm smm Twisted wire of 12 Twisted wire of 12 pcs 0 18 18 AWG 24 ee Note The contact Suitable for AWG 22 or AWG 24 is supplied with the product For purchasing a contact suitable for AWG 26 or AWG 28 specify AFP7231FP Supplied connector Attached to FP gt control unit Housing 10P 2 pcs x 2sets Manufactured by us Contact for AW22 and 24 5 pins Note The parts of the number of the connectors are supplied with the product If you need more connectors purchase AFP0807 2 sets pack Supplied connector Attached to FP expansion unit Housing 40P 1 pc x 2sets Manufactured by us Contact for AW22 and 24 5 pins Note The parts of the number of the connectors are supplied with the product If you need more connectors purchase AFP2801 2 sets pack Pressure connection tool Manufacturer Product No Manufactured by us AXY52000FP Pressure connection tool D Key Point When using a MIL connector for flat cables purchase the product number AFP0808 4 pcs 10 pin strain relief with key In this case the suitable wire is AWG 28 and the rated current is 1A 9 15 Procedure of assembly Wiring method The wire end can be directly crimped without removing the wire s insulation saving labor 1 Bend the welder contact back from the carrier and set it in the pressure connection tool If there is a wiring mistake or the cable is incorre
252. ion number is 16 relays and registers have been allocated evenly and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Ts 5 6 82 11 82 ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 15 4 13 ms Tik 0 96 400 0 67 5 407 ms Note The default value for the addition waiting time is 400 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 11 82 x 15 4 13 5 407 593 43 ms Calculation example 4 When all stations have been added to an 8 unit link the largest station number is 8 relays and register have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 8 16 x 4 119 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 119 11 43 ms Each Ts 5 11 43 16 43 ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 8 2 79 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 16 43 x 8 2 79 5 139 23 ms Calculation example 5 When all stations have been added to a 2 unit link the largest station number is 2 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 32 64 x 4 407 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 407 39 072 ms Each Ts 5 39 072 44 072 ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 2 1 632 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 44 072 x 2 1 632 5 94 776 ms Calculation exam
253. its When using a up to 4 units Max 288 points When using k FP expansion Not possible When using up to 4 units transistor output units NPN output type type expansion unite expansion units When using FPO expansion units No of controllable I O points Max 376 points jax 380 points Been up to FPO 3 Max 384 points units and FPx 4 l units and FP 4 up to FPO 3 units eer N units When i units and FP 4 When using expansion units using NPN units transistor output output type type expansion i expansion units units Programming l l Relay symbol Cyclic operation method Control method PRI 4 P Built in Flash ROM without backup battery 12000 steps No of Basie JB 7 E l i l I rel cies a reay 1568 points RO to R97F 1024 points for initial setting Timer 1008 points TO to T1007 Timer Counter 16 points C1008 to C1023 Ope ration Counter T C Timer can count up to in units of 1ms 10ms 100ms or 1s x 32767 Counter Can count up to 1 to 32767 mory Link relay L 1024 points Data register 32765 words DTO to DT32764 DT Mem ory area me Link register 128 words LD Index register 0 14 words l0 to ID 12 5 ae Se C32TTM C32T2TM C24R2TM C28P2TM 9 programs external input 8 points XO X1 X3 X4 5us X2 X5 to No of interrupt programs X7 100us periodical interrupt 1 point 0 5ms to 30s Self d
254. l RS485 type Product No AFPG803 This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit with a two wire RS485 port 7 6 Terminal layout Signal direction ssion li L e Transmission line Transmission line e Transmission line 1 port Transmission line Terminal station setting General Terminal _ Station station OPEN Short circuit po Tri communication 1 N communication Note When using this cassette the data transmission is executed with the STOP2 regardless of the setting for the stop bit The data reception is available with 1 or 2 regardless of the setting for the stop bit as ae EN f i i f T l j JA WY NYY NIS NS 1 channel RS485 and 1 channel RS232C combination type Product No AFPG806 This communication cassette equips a 1 channel unit with a two wire RS485 port and 1 channel unit with a three wire RS232C port Terminal layout Abbr Name Signal direction Port Transmission Bi S Transmission line SD Sent Data FPx External device RS232C RD Received Data FPX lt External device COM2 p For terminal SG SignalGround por station set SW1 1 to ON side pt communication 1 N communication Computer link Available Available General purpose serial communication Available Available PC PLC link Available N MODBUS RTU Available Available Note PC PLC link is available only for RS485
255. l switch RO H DF F81 BIN Wx1 0 Js F81 BIN WX0 losvo ss WX1 WXO L_ Digital _ switches 9 Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and set it in index register l0 2 Convert the BCD timer set value in WXO to binary and store in the timer set value area SV specified by contents of l0 lt Example 2 gt Taking external output of the elapsed value in a timer number specified by a digital switch 7 segment Timer elapsed 7 S indicator value display R1 H DF H F81 BIN WX1 10 J ss F80 BCD I0EVO WYO sss WX1 Q Convert the BCD timer number data in WX1 to binary and set it in index register l0 2 Convert the elapsed value data EV in the timer specified by 10 to BCD and output it to output relay WYO 11 6 11 4 Operation Errors 11 4 1 Outline of Operation Errors e An operation error is a condition in which operation is impossible when a high level instruction is executed e When an operation error occurs the ERROR ALARM LED on the control unit will blink and the operation error flags R9007 and R9008 will turn on e The operation error code E45 is set at special data register DT90000 e The error address is stored in special data registers DT90017 and DT90018 Types of operation error 1 Address error The memory address number specified by index modification is outside the area which can be used 2 BCD data error Operation is attempted on non B
256. l value and the mean value of the word data with sign from the area selected with S1 to S2 are obtained and stored in the D The total value and the mean value of the double word data with sign from the area selected with S1 to S2 are obtained and stored in the D The word data with sign from the area specified by S1 to S2 are sorted in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first The double word data with sign from the area specified by S1 to S2 are sorted in ascending order the smallest word is first or descending order the largest word is first The output value Y is found for the input value X by performing scaling for the given data table The output value Y is found for the input value X by performing scaling for the given data table Executes the linear output for the specified time from the specified initial value to the target value F284 Inclination P284 output of 16 bit data S3 D Integer type non linear function instructions F285 Upper and LIMT S1 P285 lower limit PLIMT S2 control 3 D 16 bit data When S1 gt S3 Si D When 1 lt S3 S2 gt D When S1 lt or S8 lt or S2 S8 gt D O Available X Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 2 or later 2 This instruction is only available for FP X Ver 2 0 or later and
257. lays and registers are used First half VWWLO to WL63 LDO to LD127 is used Second half WL64 to WL127 LD128 to LD255 is used Main flag Link area Second half 1 WL64 to WL127 LD128 to LD225 First half O WLOto WL63 LDO to LD127 7 60 7 6 3 Monitoring When using a PC PLC link the operation status of the links can be monitored using the following relays Transmission assurance relays For PC PLC link 0 R9060 to R906F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 For PC PLC link 1 R9080 to R908F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 For FP2 32k type only If the transmission data from a different unit is being used with the various PLCs check to make sure the transmission assurance relay for the target unit is on before using the data Relay no Jeco oe Reon a0 rene Rees Ros ee ecee Roos Ren roose Reose ener Wto 1 2 3 4 slel7 s 9 2 3 4 66 Conditions ON When the PLC link is normal for on off OFF If transmission is stopped a problem has occurred or a PLC link is not being used Operation mode relays For PC PLC link 0 R9070 to R907F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 For PC PLC link 1 R9090 to R909F correspond to unit no 1 to 16 For FP 32k type only The operation modes RUN PROG can be checked for any given PLC Relay no Rero or Re07z Roa7 Ren Rora Rear Rea orao ereo oO Wto 1 2 3 4 slel7 s 90 2 3 4 66 Conditions ON When the unit is in the RUN mode for on off OFF When the
258. lear high speed counter instruction Note In the reset input setting the reset 0 Continue 1 Clear input X2 or X5 allocated in the high speed counter setting of the system registers are defined to enable disable Reset input setting Nol 0 Available 1 Not available Count 0 Permit 1 Prohibit Software reset 0 No 1 Yes Elapsed value write and read instruction F1 e This instruction changes or reads the elapsed value of the high speed counter e Specify this instruction together with the special data register DT90044 e The elapsed value is stored as 32 bit data in the combined area of special data registers DT90044 and DT90045 e Use this F1 DMV instruction to set the elapsed value Example 1 Writing the elapsed value X7 HDF F1 DMV K3000 DT90044_ Example 2 Reading the elapsed value X7 LDF F1 DMV DT90044 DT100 Target value match ON instruction F166 Example 1 XA LDF F166 HC1S KO K10000 Y7 Example 2 XB LDF F166 HC1S K2 K20000 Y6 Target value match OFF instruction F167 Example 1 xe DF F167 HC1R K1 K30000 Y4 Example 2 XD HDF F167 HC1R K3 K40000 Y5 6 14 Set the initial value of K3000 in the high speed counter Read the elapsed value of the high speed counter and copies it to DT100 and DT101 If the elapsed value DT90044 and DT90045 for channel 0 matches K10000 output Y7 turns on If the elapsed value DT90200
259. less than 148 seconds per month Note4 Writing is available up to 10000 times When the optional battery is used all areas can be backed up Areas to be held and not held can be specified using the system registers Note5 If an area is held when the battery is not installed the value of data may be indefinite as it is not cleared to 0 when the power is turned on When the battery ran out of the power the data at the hold area will be indefinite Note6 The contact information and the elapsed value EV of the counter is backed up The setting value SV is not held Note7 The value in the table indicates the life when using the backup battery for FP AFPG804 The life is 6 years when using a commercial battery CR123A Battery backup Comment storage Potentiometer Volume input Other functions 12 6 FP 32k type Descriptions C32TH C32T2H C24R2H C28P2H C32THTM C32T2HTM C24R2HTM C28P2HTM No of controllable I O points Control unit When using FPO expansion units When using FP expansion units When using FPO and FP expansion units 32 points DC input 16 NPN output 16 Max 128 points up to 3 units Not possible 32 points DC input 16 NPN output 16 Max 128 points up to 3 units Max 288 points up to 4 units Max 384 points up to FPO 3 units and FP 4 units Relay symbol Cyclic operation 24 points DC input 16 Relay output 8 Max 120 units up to 3
260. low System regis DT9022 lt Example gt i is When DT90219 is 0 DT90229 PLC link System regis i Unit ter 42 and 43 A N A DT90230 station System regis Higher byte Lower byte No 3 or 11 ter 44and 45 DT90220 to a a ae ic DT90243 DT90231 a p Unit Station ter 46 an No 1 Setting contents System regis of system register DT90232 40 42 44 and 46 a Setting contents of system DT90233 PLC link System regis register 41 43 45 and 47 Unit ter 42 and 43 pre prer Ipa ion is i System regis ter 46 and 47 14 31 A Available N A Not available Register Te Read Writ Descriptions i No ing ing System regis PLC link System regis DT90241 station System regis Ponana No 6 or 14 ter 44 and 45 A System regis The contents of the system register DT90243 ter 46 and 47 Settings pertaining to the PLC inter link ie function for the various unit numbers are DT90244 stored as shown below ter 40 and 41 i PLC link System regis DT90245 Unit sta lt Example gt when DT90219 is 0 Higher byte Lower byte pT90246 Non No 7 System regis provon Tt or 15 ter 44 and 45 DT90243 Sjem Teic Unit Station DT90247 a g No 1 Setting contents ter 46 and 47 of systern register System regis e E DT90248 Setting contents of system ter 40 and 41 register 41 43 45 and 47 PLC link System regis DT9024 Unit sta tion No 8 System regis DT90251 System regis ter 46 and 47 DT90
261. lse output with channel specification JOG operation PWM output with channel specification Pulse output with channel specification Selectable data table control peration MV S DT90052 FPx S DT90044 FP X S DT90300 FPx DT90044 D FP X DT90300 D Performs high speed counter and Pulse output controls according to the control code specified by S The control code is stored in DT90052 Transfers S 1 S to high speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 Transfers value in high speed counter and Pulse output elapsed value area DT90045 DT90044 to D 1 D Turns output Yn on when the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target value of S 1 S Turns output Yn off when the elapsed value of the built in high speed counter reaches the target value of S 1 S Positioning pulses are output from the specified channel in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S Pulse strings are output from the specified output in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S PWM output is output from the specified output in accordance with the contents of the data table that starts with S Outputs the pulses from the specified channel according to the data table specified by S O Available X Not available Not available partially 1 The elapsed value area differs depending on used chann
262. lt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 S24 1 S2 Floating Connects a Form A normally open contact pf S S __ serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the point comparative condition S1 1 S 1 S2 1 S2 type real Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the number comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 data or S14 1 S1 gt S24 1 S2 ANF Connects a Form A normally open contact APRIG serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the AND comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact F gt S1 2 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the L comparative condition S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 or S14 1 S1 S241 S2 ANFe Connects a a A normally open contact ffs 8182 5 serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 32 bit data in the comparative condition S1 1 1 lt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in Floating parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the point comparative condition S1 1 S 1 S2 1 S2 type real Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 32 bit data in the number comparative condition S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 data or S1 1 S 1 gt S2 1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open
263. ly device without an internal protective circuit always make sure power is supplied to the unit through a protective element such as a fuse Power supply voltage Rated voltage 24V DC Operating voltage range 21 6 to 26 4 V DC Wiring system Isolate the wiring systems to the control unit input output devices and mechanical power apparatus Circuit breaker Mechanical Insulated DC power supply Measures regarding power supply sequence start up sequence e The power supply sequence should be set up so that power to the control unit is turned off before the input output power supplies e f the input output power supplies are turned off before the power to the control unit the control unit will detect the input fluctuations and may begin an unscheduled operation e Be sure to supply power to a control unit and an expansion unit from the same power supply and turn the power on and off simultaneously for both 9 9 5 2 2 Grounding In situations of excess noise Under normal conditions the inherent noise resistance is sufficient However in situations of excess noise ground the instrument to increase noise suppression Exclusive grounding e The grounding connection should have a resistance of less than 1002 e The point of grounding should be as close to the PLC unit as possible The ground wire should be as short as possible e f two devices share a single ground point it may produce an adverse effect Always use an
264. minutes and and the converted data is stored in D 1 seconds data D Piao rooveyset_ pse esonte cany tag 90h P140 R9009 set PSTC pian ooboyreset poro YING 9009h R9009 reset PCLC ou LL i i 2 r LA y Watching WDT S The time allowable scan time for the dog timer PWDT system of watching dog timer is x x x update changed to S x 0 1 ms for that scan Partial I O IORF D1 D2 Updates the I O from the number update PIORF specified by D1 to the number specified 5 by D2 The COM port received flag R9038 is set to off to enable reception Serial data TRNS communica n tion control Beginning at S n bytes of the data registers are sent from the COM port S1 S2 Sends the data to another station in the D N network MEWNET via link unit F146 Data receive RECV S1 S2 Receives the data to another station P146 PRECV N D in the network MEWNET via link unit S1 S2 Sends the data to the slave station as Data send Pa D N the MOD bus master via COM port F146 RECV S1 S2 Receives the data from the slave station N D as the MOD bus master via COM port D N MOD bus master type Il P146 N D of the MOD bus master type II S1 S2 Sends the data to the slave station as D N the MEWTOCOL master via COM port F146 Data receive RECV S1 S2 Receives the data from the slave station P146 N D as t
265. mmon common which are which are simultaneous simultaneous on on 52 55 52 55 Ambient temperature C Ambient temperature C Circuit diagram Xn COM Output NPN Output PNP Output indication LED Output indication LED ff terminal fd terminal External i 3 External powen Short ciruict prevention circuit Short ciruict prevention circuit F 3 rs i supply Power power o i Power supply supply of supply E l of load E load 5 to 24V DC E 24 V DC t i k l i wo 24 W DC terminal 2 H aoa E i I i i a 3 Terminal layout diagram 24VDC Note The numbers in the connector are for the first expansion 3 8 Input connector Output connector NPN Left side Right side gt 2 p OHOOQ Q Q O QQ QEOOO OEQEQEQ O QE ys x 89696966 Gogoge OPO P8EE PPTPP DOGOOOQOOONDOGOOOOS daye The four COM terminals are Terminals and terminals are connected internally connected on the same connector inside the unit but connect them outside X108 Y100 X100 Y108 Front view of connector Output connector PNP Right side Terminals and terminals are connected on the same connector inside the unit but connect them outside 3 4 2 FPX Expansion Data Memory Unit Parts and Functions Right side view 258 gt Switch ON directi
266. mpling by the F155 SMPL instruction simultaneously How to stop sampling Methods of the stop trigger request Following two methods are available 1 Deactivate request by the tool software 2 Deactivate request by the F156 STRG instruction If the stop trigger activates the PLC will continue to take samplings for the specified No of delay and then stop the sampling operation Once the sampling operation stops the data will be automatically retrieved by the tool software and will be indicated in a time chart It is possible to adjust whether to see before or after the trigger point by the setting of the No of delay Operation image of sampling trace Trace memory in PLC 1 sampling data 5 if exceeding the area Fi Fi j Back to the biginning Pi Fi k 9 2 3 How to Use Sampling Trace ff FPWIN GR Untitle1 2 Monitoring Time Chart ig File View Online Settings Option Help cota ele fe mm 4 2 vo Comment Remark FP216K Online PLC REMOTE RUN Monitor stopping Home FREE Sampling Times 1000 Times Sampling Rate 100ms Delay Times 100 Times Elan Monitor configuration SAMPLE T 100 75 Sampling data display 50 Relay entry c Dataentry a Time Scale o c oO R mon To it To oe 100ms Ons 1000ms 1000ms 2000ms 1000ms 2000ms c Cursor information 1 a Online
267. n D to 32 bits in D 1 D DER j I D D B 2 F90 Decode DECO S n D Decodes part of the data of S and P90 PDECO stores it in D The part is specified by n 7 segment SEGT S D Converts the data of S for use in a 7 decode PSEGT segment display and stores it in D 1 5 D ENCO S n D Encodes part of the data of S and PENCO stores it in D The part is specified by 7 n 16 bit data UNIT S n D The least significant digit of each of the combine PUNIT n words of data beginning at S are v T ge TI N N i EA 3 CO D C tC G n n 3 fi stored united in order in D Available Not available Not available partially O 14 45 FP2SH FP10SH P97 search PDSRC S2 for in the 32 bit data designated by S53 S3 beginning from S2 and the result if stored in DT90037 and DT90038 TE 7 Ww A n feat l lean rand Li ae N N oO L F94 16 bit data distribute DIST S n Each of the digits of the data of S P94 PDIST D are stored in distributed to the least zlo significant digits of the areas 7 beginning at D Character ASCII ASC S D Twelve characters of the character code PASC constants of S are converted to 510 ASCII code and stored in D to D 5 F96 16 bit table data SRC S1 The data of S1 is searched for in P96 search PSRC S2 the areas in the range S2 to S3
268. n ASCII code and written to DT 101 to DT 104 _ an ASCII code and written to DT 101 to DT 104 FisoMTRN DT100 K8 Ki Datatransmission The data in the send buffer is sent from Starting from DT 100 from DT100 theCOMpott OOOO O O the contents of 8 bytes are sent from COM port 1 K1 The program described above is executed in the following sequence 1 ABCDEFGH is converted to an ASCII code and stored in a data register 2 The data is sent from COM1 port using the F159 MTRN instruction Explanatory diagram 1 The characters are converted to ASCII code Data register DT and the data is stored in the send buffer See ee ee ee eee eee ee ee ey 2 Data transmission using F159 MTRN Device with RS232C port 7 39 Explanation of data table The data table for transmission starts at the data register specified in S At the beginning of transmission je the number of bytes to be transmitted is set l Ver 3 10 or later Se 2 1 At the end of transmission 0 is set Transmitted data storage area a a ens The circled numbers indicate the order of transmission e Use an FO MV or F95 ASC instruction to write the data to be transmitted to the transmission data storage area specified in S Transmission process When the execution condition of the F159 MTRN instruction turns on and the transmission done flag R9039 R9049 is on operation is as follows 1 N is pres
269. n for the computer link The side that issues commands is called master and the side that receives the commands executes the process and sends back responses is called slave nee 7 Note It is necessary to set the system register of the communication port to the computer link for using this function 1 Only the slave function is available for the FP 12k type 2 Both the master and slave functions are available for the FPX 32k type however the master function is not available for the TOOL port MEWTOCOL master function 32k type only e This function is to carry out the communication on the master side side Othat issues commands of the computer link It is executed with the PLC s instruction F145 SEND or Fi46 RECV It is not necessary to write the response process as a ladder so the program is easier than the general purpose communication function The 1 1 or 1 N communication is available between our devices equipped with the computer link function and the MEWTOCOL COM Our devices e g PLC IPD temperature control unit eco power meter For the MEWTOCOL master function communication is possible with COM1 port and COM2 port of the 32k type only Do not execute the F145 SEND nor F146 RECV instructions when the unit is used as a Slave unit FP gt a n Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Master i C e KT temperature KT temperature control unit control unit 1 2 MEWTOCOL slave function e This function i
270. n mode Rewrite procedure Operation of each instruction OT KP High level instructions MC MCE CALL SUB RET INT ARET Maximum of 128 steps Changes are performed by block When PG conversion is executed online the program will be rewritten Bowe Block b If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held e If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held e Set values specified by K constants in TM CT instructions are preset in all of the corresponding SV s in the program Elapsed values EV do not change If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held When writing MC MCE instructions be sure to write the instructions as a pair A subroutine is a program appearing between SUBn and RET instructions Be sure to write it to an address which follows the ED instruction An interrupt program is an program appearing between INTn and IRET instructions Be sure to write it to an address which follows the ED instruction Rewriting performed by step Caution is required as rewriting takes place simultaneously with the change If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held Y contact relays which are on bill be held in the on status To turn them
271. n power is supplied The lifetime is about twice as long as that when no power is supplied Detection of battery error and time for replacement Special internal relays R9005 and R9006 will go on if the battery voltage drops Create a program to announce errors to the outside as necessary Two seconds after starting supplying power the battery voltage is checked Therefore an error is not announced in the first scan When the system register No 4 Battery Error Alarm is enabled the ERR LED of the control unit will flash Although data will be retained for about a week after the detection of battery error without power the battery should be replaced as soon as possible Note if a week has passed without power after the special internal relays R9005 and R9006 turned on or the ERR LED flashed retained memory data may be lost Regardless of how much time has passed after the detection of battery error supply power to the control unit for more than one minute when replacing the battery Special internal relays R9005 and R9006 will be on when a battery error is detected regardless of the setting of system register No 4 9 25 9 26 Chapter 6 High speed counter Pulse Output and PWM Output functions 6 1 Overview of Each Functions 6 1 1 Three Functions that Use Built in High speed Counter There are three functions available when using the high speed counter built into the FP High speed counter function En
272. n the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 S2 16 bit Connects a Form A normally open contact in data parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 82 Compare Connects a Form A normally open contact in OR gt SI parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact in parallel by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 S2 Available X Not av
273. ncoming data is stored in order from the lower order byte of the 2nd word area of the receive buffer Header and terminator start and end codes are not stored Beginning of reception M Re opening Y Received data A B je T amp R Uy e R9038 R9048 ON OFF Execution condition R10 a a Reception Reception is possible is not possible re Reception is possible Execution of F159 MTRN 2 When the terminator end code is received the reception done flag R9038 R9048 turns on Reception of any further data is prohibited 3 When an F159 MTRN instruction is executed the reception done flag R9038 R9048 turns off the number of received bytes is cleared and subsequent data is stored in order from the lower order byte For repeated reception of data perform the following steps 1 Receive data 2 Reception done R9038 R9048 on reception prohibited 3 Process received data 4 Execute F159 MTRN R9038 R9048 off reception possible 5 Receive subsequent data Prepare for reception Hrs MTAN DT100 KO Ki e The reception done flag R9038 R9048 turns on when Ko data reception from the external device is completed To repeatedly perform only reception Reception of any further data is prohibited T PPE EA e To receive subsequent data you must execute the F159 transmission Is performed with a byte MTRN instruction to turn off the reception done
274. ncrements It corresponds to the timer number Relay which turns on or off based on specific R 176 ports P3000 10 M910 conditions and is used as a flag 74 words WXO to WX73 74 words WA WYO to Code for specifying 16 external output points WY73 as one word 16 bits of data Code for specifying 16 external input points as one word 16 bits of data Note2 Code for specifying 16 internal relay points as Internal relay WR 98 words WRO to WR97 one word 16 bits of data Code for specifying 16 link relay points as Link relay WL 64 words WLO to WL63 one word 16 bits of data Note2 32765 words DTO to Data memory used in program Data is Data register DT DT32764 handled in 16 bit units one word This is a shared data memory which is used Link register LD 128 words LDO to LD127 within the PLC link Data is handled in 16 bit units one word Data memory for storing a target value of a ee eevee 1024 words SVO to SV1023 timer and setting value of a counter Stores area SV by timer counter number f Data memory for storing the elapsed value Timer Counter elapsed 1024 words EVO to EV1023 during operation of a timer counter Stores by value area EV f timer counter number Special data register 260 words DT90000 to Data memory for storing specific data DT DT90259 Various settings and error codes are stored Index register I 14 words l0 to ID Register can be used as an address of
275. nding the command Header Unit no of destination 01 to 99 decimal Text B depends on type of command 4 Check code BCC hexadecimal Terminator Two One digit digit pf Target that reads the value internal relay R1 Specified item S specifies that only 1 point should be read Command name e g read contact area Command code Indicates that this is a command 1 Header start code Commands must always have a ASCII code H25 or a lt ASCII code H3C at the beginning of a message 2 Unit number The unit number of the PLC to which you want to send the command must be specified In 1 1 communication the unit number 01 ASCII code H3031 should be specified 3 Text The content differs depending on the command The content should be noted in all upper case characters following the fixed formula for the particular command S x 0 0 0 1 1 C h E cation name and data to Command code I be written ASCII code H23 4 Check code BCC block check code for error detection using horizontal parity The BCC should be created so that it targets all of the text data from the header to the last text character The BCC starts from the header and checks each character in sequence using the exclusive OR operation and replaces the final result with character text It is normally part of the calculation program and is created automatically The parity check can be skipped by ente
276. ndows Me AFPS10520 Enalish I Windows 2000 AOMB Upgrade version Windows Vista AFPS10520R Windows 7 Note1 Ver 1 1 must be installed to install the upgrade version Note2 Ver 2 0 can be upgraded to Ver 2 1 or later free of charge at our web site http industrial panasonic com ac e dl_center software Conforms to IEC61131 3 programming tool software FPWIN Pro Ver 6 Type of software OS Operating system Hard disk capacity Windows 2000 FPWIN Pro Ver 6 Windows XP 100MB or more FPWINPROFEN6 English language menu Windows Vista Windows 7 Note1 Ver 6 0 can be upgraded to Ver 6 1 or later free of charge at our web site http industrial panasonic com ac e dl_center software Type of computer and suitable cable Specifications Product No D sub 9 pin female Mini DIN round 5 pin AFC8503 D sub 9 pin D sub 0 pin female Mini DIN round 5 pin straight type AFC8503S Chapter 2 Specifications and Functions of the Unit 2 1 Parts and Functions FPG C32 Thermister input FPG C28 FPG C24 function type a 9 For all type control unit Right side view CONNECTOR EXPANSION DIN rail attachment Status indicator LEDs These LEDs display the current mode of operation or the occurrence of an error LED LED and operation status Lights when in the RUN mode and indicates that the program is being executed It flashes
277. ng year month example for DT90058 Higherbyte Lower byte rl Minute data Second data DT90054 00 to H59 HOO to H59 Day data Hoot data a DT20055 oc alendar Year data Month data DT90057 setting day of the DT900 6 H00 to H99 HO1 to H12 Day olthe veek week DT90057 HOO to H06 As a day of the week is not automatically set on FPWIN GR fix what day is set to 00 and set each value for 00 to 06 A Available N A Not available Register Read jae Descriptions No ing The Real Time Clock Clock Calendar i adjusted as follows When setting the Real Time Clock Clock Calendar by program By setting the highest bit of DT90058 to 1 the time becomes that written to DT90054 to DT90057 by FO MV instruction After the time is set DT90058 is cleared to 0 Cannot be performed with any instruction other than FO MV instruction lt Example gt Real Time Clock a vi time to 12 00 00 on the 5 day when DT90058 Clock Calendar time 40 turns on setting XO DFH FOMV H 0 DT90054 MPuts 0 minutes FO MV H 512 DT90055 Surah day FO MV H8000 DT90058 Sets the time Note If the values of DT90054 to DT90057 are changed with the programming tool software the time will be set when the new values are written Therefore it is unnecessary to write to DI90058 error code communication error occurs 14 24 A Available N A Not available ome cee PT No
278. ng at an arbitrary timing The sampling trace function is used in the time chart monitor function under the online menu of the FPWIN GR The instructions functions special relays and special registers related to the sampling trace function are as below F155 SMPL sampling instruction F156 STRG sampling stop trigger instruction Time charge monitor of FPWIN GR R902C Sample point flag OFF Sampling by instruction ON Sampling at regular time intervals R902D Sampling trace end flag When sampling trace starts 0 stops 1 R902E Sampling trigger flag Turns on when sampling stop trigger is on R902F Sampling enable flag Turns on when sampling operation starts DT90028 Interval of sampling trace kO For sampling by instruction k1 to k3000 10ms to 30 seconds For sampling at regular time intervals 9 2 2 Details of Sampling Trace Function No of data collectable at one sampling 16 bits 3 data Sampling capacity No of samples accumulable 1000 samples Types of sampling timing When an instruction is executed or at regular time intervals 1 Sampling at regular time intervals From 10 ms 2 Sampling by F155 SMPL instruction Sampling for every scan can be executed by the instruction Also more than one samplings can be executed in one scan Timing for the execution of the F155 SMPL instruction can be set by the ladder sequence ACS a Note It is not possible to activate the sampling at regular time intervals and the sa
279. nication mode Computer link No 414 Communication format for COM2 port Data length 7 bits 8 bits Parity check None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist The communication format and baud rate communication speed should be set to match the connected computer Note They are set in different bit positions of the same system register no so the different settings are possible for port 1 and port 2 Programming e For a computer link a program should be created that allows command messages to be sent and response messages to be received on the computer side The PLC automatically sends back a response to a command No communication program is required on the PLC side e Also if a software program such as PCWAY is used on the computer side PLC data can easily be read and written without having to think about the MEWTOCOL COM protocol 7 26 Connection to the computer lt 1 1 communication gt Overview For a 1 1 computer link between the FP and a computer an RS232C cable is needed Communication is performed via commands from the computer and responses from the PLC Computer FP F Command message Response message E Peyin eie detyt ty iy ytet y h ian AARMA telat N lt Using AFPG801 1 channel RS232C type communication cassette gt Computer side FP side D SUB 9 pin 5 pin terminal Symbol Pin no Pinname _ Signal name
280. nk 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 6 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 7 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 8 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 9 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 10 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 11 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 12 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 13 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 14 is communicating properly in PC PLC link
281. nput Status Read X Input 1X Read Holding Registers Read DT 4X Read Input Registers Read WL and LD 3X F145 SEND Force Single Coil Write Single Y and R 0X 4X X 4X 4 4 F146 RECV and Rs Words Mask Write 4X Register Write DT Mask Read Write 4X Registers Read Write DT Table for MODBUS reference No and FP device No MODBUS reference No Data on BUS hexadecimal FP x device No Coil 000001 001184 0000 049F Y0 Y73F 002049 006144 0800 17FF R0 R255F F145 SEND OX o X o Ko Bx I OX o F145 SEND 06 Preset Single Register Write DT 1 Word 4X Cannot be issued 08 Diagnostics Loopback Test Cannot be issued Cannot be issued 07D0 08CF 1 13 Setting using FPWIN GR 1 Change the display to the Online monitor by selecting Online Edit Mode under Online in the menu bar or pressing CTRL and F2 keys at the same time 2 Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Click COM Port There are separate tabs for setting the COM1 and COM2 Dialog box of MODBUS RTU setting PLC Configuration Untitlel i 5 x Link WO 0 LinkWO1 Pulse I O cassette HSC Intemal HSC Hold Non hold1 Hold Mon hold 2 Action on Enor Time Special input Special input Tool Fort COM1 Fort COM Port Cancel Hod10 Unit No fi Hodia Eommancaton Format Bead PLE No412 Comm Mode Char Eit fe Bits 7 Initialize Pc Link
282. nsmission speed of the RS485 port COM1 of AFPG806 must be identically set by the system register and the dip switch in the communication cassette Data length bit 8 bits Parity check with odd Stop bit 1 bit Communication format setting 14 9 14 1 2 Table of Special Internal Relays for FP The special internal relays turn on and off under special conditions The on and off states are not output externally Writing is not possible with a programming tool or an instruction WR900 Relay No Turns on when a self diagnostic error occurs R9000 Self diagnostic error flag gt The content of self diagnostic error is stored in DT90000 R9001 Notused R9002 Notused R9003 Notused Turns on when an V O verification error occurs R9004 I O verification error flag Turns on when an I O verification error occurs R9005 PACKUP SANEL ETOF TAg Turns on when an backup battery error occurs non hold Turns on when a backup battery error occurs Once a battery error has been detected this is held even after recovery has been made It goes off if the power supply is turned off or if the system is initialized Turns on and keeps the on state when an operation error occurs The address where the error occurred is stored in DT90017 indicates the first operation error which occurred Turns on for an instant when an operation error occurs Operation error flag gt The address where the op
283. nstallation location Samon of SAA Expansion Expansion E8X Input 8 points X20 to X27 X40 to X47 X60 to X67 ESR Input 4 points X20 to X23 X40 to X43 X60 to X63 Output 4 points Y20 to Y23 Y40 to Y43 Y60 to Y63 E8TY P Output 8 points Y20 to Y27 Y40 to Y47 Y60 to Y67 Expansion unit E16R E16T P FPO CHO X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F O unit CH1 X30 to X3F X50 to X5F X70 to X7F Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F FPO A D Input 16 points WX2 WX4 WX6 conversion unit FPO A80 CHO 2 4 6 X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F FPO FPO TC4 unit ate 3 5 X30 to X3F X50 to X5F X70 to X7F CHO 2 4 X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F RTD unit CH1 3 5 X30 to X3F X50 to X5F X70 to X7F Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F FPO D A X20 to X2F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F Unit FP0 A04l CHO 2 Y20 to Y2F Y40 to Y4F Y60 to Y6F Output 16 points WY3 WY5 WY7 FPO FPO IOL Input 32 points X20 to X3F X40 to X5F X60 to X7F I O link unit Output 32 points Y20 to Y3F Y40 to Y5F Y60 to Y7F e The data for the each channels of FPO A D conversion unit FPO A80 FPO thermocouple unit FPO TC4 FP0 TC8 FPO RTD unit FPO RTD6 and FPO D A conversion unit FPO A04V FP0 A041 is converted and loaded with a user program that includes a switching flag to convert the data e Regarding FPO CC Link slave unit please refer to the exclusive manual 4 5 4 6 Chapter 5 Ins
284. nsumption table Example Control unit FP 2 control unit and FPO Expansion Unit curre nt consumption Expansion Input circuit Output circuit unit current current current consumption consumption consumption This is the This is the This is the current current current consumed from consumed by consumed by the the expansion the input circuits output circuits of unit power of the various the various units supply units This value This value connector If a indicates the indicates the unit is not listed current that current used to below it means flows into the drive the output that it has no input circuit circuits This power supply value does not connector include the load current value FPG C32 FPz control FPG C28 90mA or less 77 2MA or less 70mA or less a FPG C24 160mAorless 77 2mAorless None Sonu Feeacvesbee SSMA orkess 1mAoriess 18mh oriess ffrapeia Stmaoriess aomaoriess EPepp 7maories asmoro FPG PN2AN FPG PN4AN 90mA or less FPG PN8AN toe ae ft Eees faomaores T Sid SSS FPO E8X_ 10mAorless_ 344mAorless FPO E8R____ 15mAorless 50mAorless_ 17 2mAorless FPO E8YR__ 10mAorless 100mAorless FPO E8YT P____ 15mAorless _ 2mAorles Aia FPO E16x _ 20mArless_ __ _ 6 8mAorless_ FPO E16R 20mAorless 100mA orless_ 34 4mAorless FPO E16T P____ 25mAorless 344maorless 24mAorless FPo Et6YTP 25mAorless
285. nt K 8388608 to K8388607 It must not exceed the target value When operating only one axis a In incremental mode set the target value for the axis which will be not be operated b In absolute mode set the target value for the axis which will not be operated the same as the current value Infinite feeding is not available during the linear interpolation control Component speed Initial speed and max speed of each axis This is stored as 2 words in real numbers type X axis com composite speed x X axis movement amount ponent speed X axis movement amount Y axis movement amount Y axis com _ composite speed x Y axis movement amount ponent speed x axis movement amount Y axis movement amount Composite speed Initial speed Set to 30kHz or less Example Even if the initial speed is corrected see 6 the calculation value will be stored as is in the operation result storage area Frequency range The system automatically selects the frequency range for each component of each axis Range 0 1 5 Hz to 9 8 kHz Range 1 48 Hz to 100 kHz Range 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz a If maximum speed S 9800 Hz If initial speed lt 1 5 Hz initial speed is corrected to 1 5 Hz and range 0 is selected If initial speed 1 5 Hz range 0 is selected b If 9800 Hz lt maximum speed S 100000 Hz If initial speed lt 48 Hz initial speed is corrected to 48 Hz and range 0 is selected If 48 Hz S initial speed
286. ntrol code Stop mode Stop mode Data table R904E R13 RI lI Control flag Mode changing for stoppage Positioning done Eh Po a Positioning done 7 F176 SPCH DT 1000 KO Data table ROAF F109 BITL WR1 WR1 K1 Set value Shift register 1 bit shift change confirmation 6 56 3 Key Point e To overwrite the data after startup use the circular interpolation data overwrite permission flag R904F e In control that heads toward final point P4 designate by switching the control code to the stop mode e In this example since the rotation direction changes for each positioning point designation of the control code rotation direction is as follows Between P1 and P2 From CH2 CW to CHO CW direction Between P2 and P3 From CHO CW to CH2 CW direction Between P3 and P4 From CH2 CW to CHO CW direction 6 57 6 5 PWM Output Function 6 5 1 Overview PWM output function With the F173 PWMH instruction the pulse width modulation output of the specified duty ratio is obtained System register setting When using the PWM output function set the channel CHO and CH2 with system registers 400 and 401 to High speed counter not used 6 5 2 PWM Output Instruction F173 X6 Fo MV K1 DT100 While X6 is in the on state a pulse with a period of 502 5 ms and duty ratio of 50 is FO MV K500 DT101 output from YO of specified channel CH2 When the program runs the data table will be F173 PWMH D
287. o the 16 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point off and the converted data is stored in D DROFF S D Converts real number data specified PDROFF by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point off and the converted data is stored in D 1 D FINT S D The decimal part of the real number PFINT data specified in S 1 S is rounded down and the result is stored in D 1 D FRINT The decimal part of the real number PFRINT data stored in S 1 S is rounded off and the result is stored in D 1 D F a real number data stored in S 1 PF is changed the sign and the are is stored in D 1 D FABS S D Takes the absolute value of real PFABS number data specified by S 1 S and the result absolute value is RAD The data in degrees of an angle PRAD specified in S 1 S is converted to radians real number data and the result is stored in D 1 D The angle data in radians real number data specified in S 1 S is converted to angle data in degrees and the result is stored in D 1 D FPX FP2SH FP10SH P345 type date point FCMP S2 P345 ype data compare PFCMP a 1 S2 1 S2 gt R900B on S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 R900C on F346 Floating point P346 type data band compare S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 R900A on FWIN i S1 gt S3 1 S3 gt R900A on PFWIN S2 1 S2 lt or S1 1 S1 lt or 3 1
288. of operation error can be confirmed in either special data registers DT9017 and DT9018 or DT90017 and DT90018 It varies according to the model to be used DT9017 DT9018 FP e FPO FPOR FPO mode DT90017 DT90018 FP FP X FPOR FPOR mode FP2 FP2SH FP10SH Verification is possible in FRPWIN GR Pro at I O error in the status display function AJAJAJAJAJAJAJA A Available 14 69 Opera tion status Remote I O commu nication error MEW NET F attribute error Expansion unit power supply sequence error battery error Description and steps to take S LINK error Occurs only in FPO SL1 When one of the S LINK errors ERR1 3 or 4 has been detected error code E46 remote I O S LINK communication error is stored Selection of operation status using system register27 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO MEWNET F communication error A communication abnormally was caused by a transmission cable or during the power down of a slave station FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data registers DT90131 to DT90137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the communication condition FP3 Check the contents of special data registers DT9131 to DT9137 and locate the abnormal slave station and recover the communication condition Selection of operation status using system register27 to continue operation set K1 to stop operation set KO
289. off in the RUN mode use forced output e If an instruction written in block a is deleted in block b the condition before the rewrite will be held e Set values specified by K constants in TM CT instructions are preset in all of the corresponding SV s in the program Elapsed values EV do not change e f deleted the output memory area will be held Writing or deleting a single instruction during RUN is not possible Write or delete the instruction in FPWIN GR ladder symbol mode Write in the order RET SUB CALL Delete in the order CALL SUB RET Write in the order IRET INT Delete in the order INT IRET 11 17 FPWIN GR FPWIN GR Ladder symbol mode Boolean mode SSTP STPE Operation of each instruction JP LOOP LBL A distance with the same number cannot be defined twice An SSTP instruction cannot be written in a subprogram Be sure to write the instruction for setting the loop number before LBL LOOP instructions Writing and deletion of a single instruction is not possible for a program with no step ladder area Write or delete both instructions simultaneously in FPWIN GR ladder symbol mode In the case of an SSTP instruction only writing and deletion of a single instruction is possible for a program with a step ladder area Write in the order JP LBL or LOOP LBL Delete in the order LBL JP or LBL LOOP me 11 8 Processing During Forced Input and Output 11 8 1 Processing w
290. olute value Can be used with Ver 1 4 or later This is used when setting the target value match stop mode Absolute only Designate the target value setting in the range indicated below If an out of range value is designated the number of pulses output will be different than the designated value The target value setting is ignored in the no count mode Output method Range of target values which can be designated Incremental counting Designate a value larger than the current value Decremental counting Designate a value smaller than the current value 4 When the frequency is set to 50Hz or higher the duty must be set to 1 4 25 yg Key Point The FP supports two operation modes for JOG operation one in which no target value is specified and one in which feed stops when the target value is reached Normal jogging operation feed no target value specified Pulses are output in accordance with the conditions set in the data table as long as execution condition is on Data table Pulse output diagram 51307 Control code H 1110 nE OFF JOG command Frequency 300 Hz 300Hz 7 P YO Pulse sis Output stops when target value is reached FP Ver 1 4 or later With FP Ver 1 4 or later a target value at which pulse output stops can be specified for jogging operation As shown below this mode is selected in the control code and the target value an absolute value is specified
291. on POWER LED Green BATT LED Red Lights out The voltage of the internal secondary battery is normal Lights on The voltage of the internal secondary battery decreases Also the memory backup switches are off Memory backup switches The factory default setting is OFF so turn both SW1 and 2 ON when using the unit If these switches are turned off the memory backup is not available as the memory is separated from the internal battery Turn them on when the unit is used Connector for FPE expansion This connector is used to expand the unit for FPx Expansion hook This hook is used to secure expansion units The hook is also used for installation on flat type mounting plate AFP0804 DIN hook The unit enables attachment at a touch to a DIN rail The lever is also used for installation on slim 30 type mounting plate AFP0811 3 9 General specifications Po ttem escription Y Ambient temperature humidity 0 to 55 C 30 to 85 RH at 25 C non condensing Storage temperature humidity 20 to 70 C 30 to 85 RH at 25 C non condensing f 10 to 55 Hz 1 cycle min double amplitude of 0 75 mm Vibration resistance 10 min on 3 axes 1000 Vp p with pulse widths 50 ns and ius based on in house measurements Operation condition Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust Weight Approx 80 g Noise immunity Shock resistance Shock of 98 m s 4 times on 3 axes Performance sp
292. on error code Check the meaning of the error code e Unit number and command name are always identical in a command and its corresponding response see below This makes the correspondence between a command and a response clear Nega r Same 7 Same m _ response sot are acy 1 23 Commands Reads the on and off status of contacts Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Turns contacts on and off Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Read data area RD Reads the contents of a data area Write timer counter set value area Read timer counter elapsed value area Write timer counter elapsed value area Register or Reset contacts monitored Register or Reset data monitored Read contact area Write contact area Monitoring start Preset data area fill command Writes the same contents to the data area of a specified range controller and error codes if an error occurs Switches the operation mode of the programmable controller Abort AB Aborts communication i i Monitors a registered contact or data using MD MG and MC E h f f 16 Preset contact area fill command SC eee Ue sea PRAPROTI point on and off pattern l if Read system register Write system register Read the status of PLC Remote control 1 24 Setting communication parameters Setting for Baud rate and commun
293. onnected e Up to 2 units of FP positioning unit RTEX can be installed 3 2 3 2 Expansion Method of FP0 FPOR Expansion Unit The FPO FPOR expansion unit expansion I O unit intelligent unit is expected by connecting to the right side of the control unit Unit expansion is done using the right side connector for FPO expansion and expansion hook on the side of the unit 1 Peel the seal on the side of the unit so that the internal right side connector for FPO expansion is exposed Peel the seal 3 Align the pins and holes in the four corners of the control unit and expansion unit and insert the pins into the holes so that there is no gap between the units 3 3 Expansion Method of FP2 Expansion Unit The dedicated expansion unit for FP including intelligent unit is expanded by connecting to the left side of the control unit Unit expansion is done using the left side connector for FPX expansion and expansion hook on the side of the unit 1 Remove the cover on the left side of the unit so that the internal left side connector for FP expansion is exposed 2 Raise the expansion hooks on the top and bottom sides of the unit with a screwdriver 3 Align the pins and holes in the four corners of the control unit and expansion unit and insert the pins into the holes so that there is no gap between the units 3 4 Specifications of FPX Expansion Unit 3 4 1 FP Expansion Unit Parts and functions
294. ons in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Double click COM Port There are separate settings for COM1 and COM2 Dialog box of PLC system register setting PLC Configuration Untitlel Hold Non hold 1 Hold Non hold 2 Action on Error Time Link High Speed Counter Interrupt Input Tool Port COMI Port COM2 Port No 410 Unit No fi Cancel Genera ee bpp No 412 Comm Mode Modem enabled m Heer pes gt No 413 Communication Format No 415 Baudrate Initialize Help Char Bit 8 Bits Terminator CR 7 3600 bps Parity Oad Header stx not exist 7 Stop Bit 1 Y Starting address for data received of l No 416 serial data communication mode u 0 32766 Buffer capacity setting for data received of 2048 No 417 serial data communication mode 0 2048 No 412 Communication Mode Select the COM port operation mode Click on M and select General Communication No 413 for COM1 port No 414 for COM2 port Communication Format setting Default setting Char Bit cccsccoresszods 8 bits PANI eerctrentotcawetcce Odd Stop Bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header 0006 STX not exist Enter the appropriate settings to match the communication format of the external device connected to the COM port No 415 Baud rate Communication speed setting The default setting for the communication speed for the variou
295. ontrolled so that a circular path is followed to the target position In the program operation is being carried out in the mode in which absolute and pass positions are specified Pulses are output from the current position 660 Xs 5000 Ys 8660 using circula interpolation control and when the pass position 6 20 Xp 9396 Yp 3420 has been passed pulse output stops at the target position 6 30 Xe 8660 Ye 5000 When the program runs the data table and positioning path are as shown below Positioning path Rotation Rotation direction 1 Y CH2 direction 0 Current position S Xs Ys Setting area Designated with user program Center position O CHO Xo Yo Pass position P Xp Yp Target position E Xe Ye stoage area Parameters for each axis Component cal culated due to in struction execution f are stored here Let CHO be the X axis and CH2 be the Y axis Fy Composite speed O Xo Yo Center point Center position Fx X axis component speed Xs Ys Start point Current position Fy Y axis component speed P Ap Ypk Pass point Pass position r Radius E Xe Ye End point Target position Ye 3 Fx Fvsin Fv el Fy Fvcos Fv wee Setting area Operation result stoage area 6 49 Pr S i4 Sm 1 Control code lt H constante HOOOOOOOO 0 Fixed E Operation continuation mode 4 0 Stop 1 Continue E Rotation direction 5 0 From
296. operation cannot be used to change to RUN mode Clearing a syntax check error By changing to the PROG mode the error will clear and the ERROR will turn off Steps to take for syntax error Change to the PROG mode and then execute the total check function while online mode with the programming tool connected This will call up the content of error and the address where the error occurred Correct the program while referring to the content of error 14 61 Self diagnostic Error This error occurs when the control unit CPU unit self diagnostic function detects the occurrence of an abnormality in the system The self diagnostic function monitors the memory abnormal detection I O abnormal detection and other devices When a self diagnostic error occurs The ERROR turns on or flashes The operation of the control unit CPU unit might stop depending on the content of error and the system register setting The error codes will be stored in the special data register DT9000 DT90000 In the case of operation error the error address will stored in the DT9017 DT9001 7 and DT9018 DT90018 Clearing the self diagnostic error At the STATUS DISPLAY execute the error clear Error codes 43 and higher can be cleared You can use the initialize test switch to clear an error However this will also clear the contents of operation memory Errors can also be cleared by turning off and on the power while in the PROG mode
297. or alarm is set to off in the system register settings For using the battery check the box of the system register No 4 Alarm Battery Error of the control unit PLO Contiteuration Untitlel Hold Non hold 1 Hold Non hald 2 W No20 Disable settings for duplicated output Time re oa Mw No 3 Stop when an lO verification emor occurs High Speed Counter Interrupt Input Tool Port W No26 Stop when an operation eror occurs COM Part COM2 Part Cancel ead _ Intiaize Hep Settings of Hold area Non hold area The settings of the operation memory area such as data registers and system registers No 6 to No 14 are necessary PLO Contiguration Untitlel ar Fetal felppletal a dee ee ona one Gane Hald Non hald 2 Mo 5 Counter starting address H O08 0 1024 Action on Error oe aah No 6 Hold type area starting address for timer counter i O08 0 102 Link WO 1 Bink Speed caine Moo Hold type area starting word en T m Ba 0 256 Interrupt Input cena Mo Hold type area starting address for data registers a271 0 0 32 765 or COM Part No 14 Step Ladder hold a No 4 Leading edge differential during MC holds the previous value NOTICE In case of not using back up battery option or battery exhaustion we cant guarantee the hold area value Cancel feat ritatze He Note When Battery Error Alarm is not set the ERR LED will not flash even if a battery error is detected Note that data may be los
298. or is turned off it takes as a default value 6 4 seconds for the transmission assurance relay of the PLC to be turned off at the other stations This time period can be shortened using the SYS1 instruction lt Programming example of SYS1 instruction gt SYS1 M PCLK1T1 100 Function Setting SYS1 to change the time that the PC PLC link transmission assurance is off from the default value of 6400 ms to 100 ms Keywords Setting for key word no 1 PCLK1T1 Permissible range for key word no 2 100 to 6400 100 ms to 6400 ms Note Enter one space after M and then enter 12 characters to be aligned to the right If the second keyword is 3 digits put 2 spaces and if it is 4 digits no space is needed Note The setting should not be changed as long as a longer transmission assurance relay detection time does not cause any problems e The SYS1 instruction should be executed at the beginning of the program at the rise of R9014 The same time should be set for all linked PLCs e The time should be set to a value of at least twice the maximum transmission cycle time when all of the PLCs are connected to the link e f short time has been set the transmission assurance relay may not function properly The shortest time that can be set is 100 ms 7 70 7 Communication Function 4 MODBUS RTU Communication 7 7 1 MODBUS RTU Communication Function overview e This function is available for the 32k type only
299. ord to be set Click Settings The setting has completed How to cancel the password setting Following two methods are available to cancel the password setting po i escription Progam Unprotect Cancels the registered password to be specified All programs are retained aoe All programs are deleted Erases all programs and security information to l ae Force cancel The upload protection setting is cancel the setting forcibly also deleted Releasing the protect of PLC Programs are retained As the dialog box is shown select as below Set PLC Password Untitlel Sate Digit number Current status 8 digits Available to access Close i K aa sag y Available retry counts 3 counts e Se ect 4 d Ig Its Or 8 d Ig Its digit number Hel i P p Operation Mode 8 digits alphanumeric Match case tc oD 2 Select Unprotect peration Mode C Access C Protect 4 digits or 8 digits password Input a password to be set 8 digits password Enter in alphanumeric foc ae Cl ick Setti ngs Setting for FP memory loader option I Allow the download to older than Version 3 2 r r x Click OK aN The protect of PLO was released Note The protection cannot be released if the access is not allowed Executing the force cancel Programs and security information are all deleted Click Force cancel Set PLC Password Untitlel PLC Home Settings Current status
300. ose RO R9032 HDF 4 _ _ gt 11 1 gt F159 MTRN DT100 H8000 K1 Set to H8000 Specify the port to be changed The RS232C port selection flag in R9032 or R9042 turns on when general purpose serial communication mode is selected Note e When the power is turned on the operating mode selected in system register no 412 takes effect 1 47 7 5 3 Connection with 1 1 Communication General purpose serial communication System register settings Settings for COM1 port AFPG801 AFPG802 No Name Set Value No 412 COM1 port selection of communication General purpose serial communication mode No 413 Communication format for COM1 port Data length 7 bits 8 bits Parity check None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Terminator CR CR LF None ETX Header No STX STX Baud rate setting for COM1 port No 416 Starting address for receive buffer for DTO to DT32764 Initial value DTO COM1 port No 417 Receive buffer capacity for COM1 port 0 to 2048 words Initial value 2048 words Settings for COM2 port AFPG802 AFPG806 No Name Set Value No 412 COM2 port selection of communication General purpose serial communication mode No 414 Communication format for COM2 port Data length 7 bits 8 bits Parity check None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits Terminator CR CR LF None ETX Header No STX STX
301. ote1 The number of points actually available for use is determined by the hardware configuration Note2 The number of points can be increased by using an auxiliary timer Note3 Precision of calendar timer At 0 C less than 119 seconds per month At 25 C less than 51 seconds per month At 55 C less than 148 seconds per month Note4 Writing is available up to 10000 times When the optional battery is used all areas can be backed up Areas to be held and not held can be specified using the system registers Note5 If an area is held when the battery is not installed the value of data may be indefinite as it is not cleared to 0 when the power is turned on When the battery ran out of the power the data at the hold area will be indefinite Note6 The contact information and the elapsed value EV of the counter is backed up The setting value SV is not held Note7 The value in the table indicates the life when using the backup battery for FP AFPG804 The life is 6 years when using a commercial battery CR123A Battery backup Comment storage Potentiometer Volume input Thermister input Other functions 12 8 High speed counter pulse output and PWM output specifications tem Descriptions i No of input When using single phase Max 4 When using 2 phase Max 2 points channels channels chO to ch4 chO ch2 When using single phase When using 2 phase for 1 channel Max 50kHz x1ch for 1 channel Max 20kHz
302. othermic heat or smoke generation Do not touch the terminal while turning on electricity It could lead to an electric shock Use the external devices to function the emergency stop and interlock circuit Connect the wires or connectors securely The loose connection could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not allow foreign matters such as liquid flammable materials metals to go into the inside of the product It could cause excessive exothermic heat or smoke generation Do not undertake construction such as connection and disconnection while the power supply is on It could lead to an electric shock Copyright Trademarks This manual and its contents are copyrighted You may not copy this manual in whole or part without written consent of Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries All other company names and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners PLC_BAT Table of Contents Before You Start Differences in Functions Between Versions of Controller Programming Tool Restrictions When Changing Ladder Program from 12k Type to 32k Type Compatibility with FPO Manuals to be Used 1 Functions and Restrictions of the UNnit ccceceteseeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 1 1 1 1 Features and Functions of the Unit ccccccesssseessseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeee
303. ounting plate AFP0811 for mounting FP Use M4 size pan head screws for attachment of the slim 30 type mounting plate and install according to the dimensions shown below 4mm 175mm 125mm 10mm iS t g G Tr G e i E Se Lo E o J A a EINTE e a D H k lt LAFPOB11 _30 mm 6 mm The rest of the procedure is the same as that for attaching the unit to the DIN rails installation Removal Caine POE ELEL E pn When using the slim type mounting plate AFP0803 for mounting FPO Use M4 size pan head screws for attachment of the slim type mounting plate and install according to the dimensions shown below 4mm 10mm pa 90 mm HE l H The rest of the procedure is the same as that for attaching the unit to the DIN rails 9 5 Note The procedure for the removal is the same as AFP0811 Installation Note When using an expansion unit tighten the screws after joining all of the slim type mounting plate to be connected Tighten the screws at each of the four corners Example When using the maximum numbers of the expansion units with AFP0811 AFP0803 Unit mm FFO mounting plate slim type AFPO803 FPO mounting plate slim 30 type AFPO811 FP2 FP expansion unit control unit FPO expansion unit e oD S oF 0 5 7 th Oa D O r E 3 g T e D a Ne lig oD a 3 3
304. ox 300 us is included from the time that the direction output goes on until the pulse output instruction can be executed CW CCW is set Approx Pulse direction is set Approx 6 9 6 3 High speed Counter Function 6 3 1 Overview of High speed Counter Function e The high speed counter function counts the input signals and when the count reaches the target value turns on and off the desired output e To turn on an output when the target value is matched use the target value match ON instruction F166 HC1S To turn off an output use the target value match OFF instruction F167 HC1R e Preset the output to be turned on and off with the SET RET instruction Setting the system register In order to use the high speed counter function it is necessary to set system register numbers nos 400 and 401 6 3 2 Input Modes and Count Incremental input mode 3 ON xo FL FL AL PLA X1 X3 X4 ar Count Two phase input mode Increment input CW mimi ON XO X3 OFF ON Ki X i UUL OFF Decrement input CCW i M r ON xO i x3 a OFF x FLAFLAL _fLFLe x4 OFF con afer repre Te a Direction discrimination ON XO x3 OFF ON X1 OFF X4 came fele Jelli C 7 Increasing Decreasing gt 6 10 Decremental input mode annnnN SULLE ore maapeal lee _ X1 X3 X4 Count Incremental decremental input mode ON xo FLA LE LAL FULL oF
305. per and the lower byte D1103 DT102 DT 101 Upper byte Lowerbyte Upper byte Lowerbyte Upperbyte Lower byte 5 4 3 2 1 Receiving data The data of the receive area being read is ASCII code data Example The data 12345 is transmitted from a device with RS232C port e If DT200 is being used as the receive buffer received data will be stored in the registers starting from DT201 in sequential order of first the lower byte and then the upper byte DT203 DT202 DT201 Upper byte Lower byte Upperbyte Lowerbyte Upperbyle Lower byte 5 4 3 2 1 7 43 Flag operation in serial communication Header No STX Terminator CR Receiving data The reception done flag the transmission done flag and the F159 MTRN instruction are related as follows Data received A d z C oR D FE G from external Cannot be stored when device X reception done flag is on ON Reception done flag R9038 or R9048 ji EF j OFF ON Duplex transmission disabled F159 MTRN ri while F159 MTRN is being instruction l A executed OFF execution S ON Transmission Fi done flag R9039 or R9049 OFF Transmitted data 1 2 3 CR Stored Receive buffer A e E iej B B B C C G la Number of bytes lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt lt 0 gt lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt cleared when F159 MTRN received Write pointer et i
306. ple 6 When all stations have been added to a 2 unit link the largest station number is 2 32 relays and 2 register words have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 1 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 1 1 x 4 31 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 31 2 976 ms Each Ts 1 2 976 3 976 ms Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 2 1 632 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 3 976 x 2 1 632 1 10 584 ms Note e In the description stations that have been added refers to stations which are connected between station no 1 and the largest station number and for which the power supply has been turned on e Comparing examples 2 and 3 the transmission cycle time is longer if there is one station that has not been added to the link As a result the PC PLC link response time is longer e The SYS1 instruction can be used to minimize the transmission cycle time even if there are one or more stations that have not been added to the link 7 68 Reducing the transmission cycle time when there are stations that have not been added If there are stations that have not been added to the link the Tik time link addition processing time and with this the transmission cycle time will be longer max s1 s2 sn it Tso lk TIK Tie link addition command sending time Twt addition waiting time Tis link error stop command sending time
307. ponse time for the FP X by the SYS1 instruction if necessary Note6 Regarding the setting of unit numbers When the unit number setting switch is 0 the system register is effective When the unit number setting switch is other than 0 the unit number setting switch is effective and the unit number setting of the system register is ignored Max 31 units can be specified with the unit number setting switch When the setting is specified with the unit number setting switch the COM1 port and the COM2 port has the same unit number Note7 Connect the terminal and the terminal with a lead wire to make the termination resistance of the AFPG803 effective The termination resistance of the AFPG806 is specified by the dip switch in the communication cassette There is no termination resistance at the RS232C port Note8 The RS485 port of the AFPG806 is either 19200 bps or 115200 bps only Also the baud rate must be identically set by the system register and the dip switch in the communication cassette The baud rate for the PC PLC link mode is fixed at 115200 bps The baud rate for the RS232C port of the AFPG806 can be set by the system register only Note9 The MEWTOCOL master function MODBUS RTU master function and general purpose serial communication function at the TOOL port is available only for the FP2 32k type 7 2 1 Precaution When Using RS485 Port FPG COM3 AFPG803 FPG COM4 AFPG806 SYS1 instruction is availabl
308. port Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header No STX Note1 Connect the terminal and the E terminal with a lead wire to make the termination resistance of the AFPG803 effective The termination resistance of the AFPG806 is specified by the dip switch located in the communication cassette Note2 The baud rate of the AFPG806 must be identically set to 115200 bps by the system register and the dip switch located in the communication cassette 7 52 Setting of unit numbers By default the unit number for the communication port is set to 1 in the system registers In a PC PLC link that connects multiple PLCs on the same transmission line the unit number must be set in order to identify the different PLCs The unit number is specified either by using the unit number setting switch SYS1 instruction or the system register Note1 The priority order for station number settings is as follows 1 Unit number settings switch 2 SYS1 instruction 3 System registers Note2 Station numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively starting from 1 with no breaks between them If there is a missing station number the transmission time will be longer Notes If fewer than 16 units are linked the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest station number in system register no 47 Unit no 3 3 E e3 Max 16 units Unit numbers are the numbers to id
309. port are copied to DTO R9038 R10 m OD m F Reception done detection _ The internal relay R10 is turned on when the reception done contact R9038 turns on J R10 saa Sica Sam Sh TSA Wap a lm Ut A FioBKMV DT201 DT204 oro Retrieving received data The received data in the receive buffer l The contents of the four words A is read from the area in which it is s from DT201 to DT204 J stored DT201 and sent to DTO J are written to data registers DTO to DT3 R10 a a a eee ee en ee Fis9MTRN DT100 KO K1_ Preparing to receive the next data To prepare to receive the next data the Starting from DT100 F159 instructon resets the buffer writing point KO and turns off the reception done contact R9038 The data in the receive buffer is not cleared os o es es a s lt amt the contents of 0 bytes are sent from COM port K1 The program described above is executed in the following sequence 1 Data is received from the RS232C device to the receive buffer 2 The reception done contact R9038 R9048 is turned on 3 The received data is sent from the receive buffer to the area starting with data register DTO 4 The F159 MTRN instruction is executed with no data to reset the buffer writing point and to turn off the reception done contact R9038 R9048 The system is now ready to receive t
310. program execution time is too long Check the program Check 1 Check if instructions such as JMP or LOOP are programmed in such a way that a scan never finish 2 Check that interrupt instructions are executed in succession 10 4 10 2 3 ALL LEDs are OFF Procedure 1 Check wiring of power supply Procedure 2 Check if the power supplied to the FP control unit is in the range of the rating e Be sure to check the fluctuation in the voltage Procedure 3 Disconnect the power supply wiring to the other devices if the power supplied to the FP control unit is shared with them e f the LED on the control unit turn on at this moment increase the capacity of the power supply or prepare another power supply for other devices e Please contact your dealer for further questions 10 5 10 2 4 Diagnosing Output Malfunction Proceed from the check of the output side to the check of the input side Check of output condition 1 Output indicator LEDs are on Procedure 1 Check the wiring of the loads Procedure 2 Check if the power is properly supplied to the loads e f the power is properly supplied to the load there is probably an abnormality in the load Check the load again e f the power is not supplied to the load there is probably an abnormality in the output section Please contact your dealer Check of output condition 2 Output indicator LEDS are off Procedure 1 Monitor the output condition using a p
311. r Step ladder process turns on 1 DT90108 768 to 783 Step ladder process Monitor using binary display DT90109 784 to 799 Step ladder process DT90110 g00 to 815 lt Example gt i DT90111 Step ladder process 15 11 t 3 0 Bit No 816 to 831 prsoosof sd Step ladder process oon epee Lt ob A T0112 eee to an 655 651 647 643 640 Process No tep ladder process DT90113 es to 863 1 Executing 0 Not executing DT90114 Step ladder process 864 to 879 A programming tool software can be used to Step ladder process DT90122 992 to 999 higher byte is not used 14 27 A Available N A Not available Register Descriptions each Writ SE No ES ing DT90123 ONA N A DT90124 COM1 SEND RECV ae a details refer to Programming Manual instruction end code F145 and F146 DT90125 COM2 SEND RECV For details refer to Programming Manual instruction end code F145 and F146 DT90127 to DT90139 DT90140 The number of times the receiving operation is performed DT90141 The current interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90142 The minimum interval between two receiving operations value in the register x 2 5ms DT90143 The maximum interval between two receiving MEWNET WO operations value in the register x 2 5ms pT90144 PC PLC link 0 status The number of times the sending operation is performed DT90145 The current interval between two sending operations value in the register x 2
312. r interpolation Goes on when the F176 SPCH circular interpolation control flao instruction is executed R904F e e a A It is used to overwrite next data when the circular confirmation flag interpolation instruction is used in the continuation mode Note R9040 to R904F can be changed during 1 scan WR905 When using MEWNET WO Turns on when a transmission error occurs at PLC link Turns on when there is an error in the PLC link area settings MEWNET WO PLC link transmission error flag R905F 14 14 WR906 MEWNET W0O PC PLC link 0 transmission assurance me _____ on when Unit No 1 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 2 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 3 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 4 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 0 mode Turns on when Unit No 5 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 0 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC li
313. r will occur 3 Check if the divisor of a division instruction is 0 lt Example gt RO H F32 DTO DT100 DT200 In this case if the content of DT100 is O an operation error will occur 11 5 Instruction of Leading Edge Detection Method 11 5 1 Instructions of Leading Edge Detection Method Instructions using the leading edge detection operation DF leading edge differential instructions Count input for CT counter instructions Count input for F118 UDC up down counter instructions Shift input for SR shift register instructions Shift input for F119 LRSR left right shift register instructions NSTP next step instructions Differential execution type high level instruction P13 NO of WD Leading edge detection method e An instruction with a leading edge detection method operates only in the scan where its trigger execution condition is detected switching from off to on 1 Standard operation ON Trigger OFF Operation of ON instruction Seen Soe OFF Executed every scan 2 Leading edge detection operation Tri ON rigger OFF Operation of ON instruction OFF N only one time How to perform leading edge detection The condition of the previous execution and the condition of the current execution are compared and the instruction is executed only if the previous condition was off and the current condition is on In any other case the instruction is no
314. rcular forming methods one by specifying the pass positions Circular interpolation and the other by specifying a center position Pulses are output using circular interpolation control by specifying the various parameters Linear interpolation C32T2 C28P2 C32T2H C28P2H Note e The thermister input type for various units is included e The pulse output function can be used with the transistor output type only Setting the system register When using the pulse output function set the channels corresponding to system registers 400 and 401 to Do not use high speed counter 6 18 6 4 2 Types of Pulse Output Method and Operation Modes Clockwise counter clockwise output method Control is carried out using two Forward Reverse pulses a forward rotation pulse and a reverse rotation pulse CW pulse cwpuise_ yo PLE LF LA LAT Y3 CCW pulse Y1 e OFIFOUL Y4 Incremental counting Decremental counting Pulse direction output method forward OFF reverse ON Control is carried out using one pulse _ i Forward Reverse output to specify the speed and another to specify the direction of Pulse Pulse Puise Puise vo FLELELELEL FLELELELE rotation with on ott signals In this mode forward rotation is carried out oo o fr when the rotation direction signal is direction Sign Y4 OFF Incremental counting Decremental counting Pulse direction output method forward ON reverse O
315. re related as follows Data received from external i Cannot be device stored when Reception code is reception deleted by F159 done flag is on MTRN r 4 ON Reception done flag R9038 or OFF R9048 i ON Reception done flag is turned off by exe F159 MTRN cuting F159 MTRN instruction OFF execution Stored Receive buffer Number of reception bytes Sh Number of bytes Number of bytes f Number of bytes Write pointer received is cleared received is cleared received is cleared when the header is when F159 MTRN J when the header is received is executed j received Fi e The data is stored in the receive buffer in sequential order When the header is received the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address e Reception is disabled while the reception done flag R9038 or R9048 is on e Also When F159 MTRN is executed the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address e f there are two headers data following the second header overwrites the data in the receive buffer e The reception done flag R9038 or R9048 is turned off by the F159 MTRN instruction Therefore if F159 MTRN is executed at the same time the terminator is received the reception done flag will not be detected 7 45 Sendin
316. red to O when the power is turned on When the battery ran out of the power the data at the hold area will be indefinite Note3 The points for the timer and counter can be changed by the setting of system register 5 The number given in the table are the numbers when system register 5 is at its default setting Constant Floating point type F 12 15 FP 32k type Number of points and range of memory area available for use C32TH C32THTM C32T2H C32T2HTM C24R2H C24R2HTM C28P2H C28P2HTM External input X 1184 points XO to X73F Turns on or off based on external input Note alae eee 1184 points YO to Y73F Externally outputs on or off state Internal relay R 4096 points RO to R255F Sen turns on or off only within Link relay L 2048 points LO to R127F This relay is a shared relay used for PLC link This goes on when the timer reaches the Timer T 1024 points TO to specified time It corresponds to the timer T1007 C1008 to C1023 Noes number Counter C This goes on when the counter increments It corresponds to the counter number Special internal relay Relay which turns on or off based on specific 16 PAIS R3090 TRS conditions and is used as a flag External input Code for specifying 16 external input points as WX ERIC OSE Oe one word 16 bits of data External output Code for specifying 16 external output points WY CA WORS ANTO TOANT
317. remental counting Pulse and direction reverse on Decremental counting Pulse and direction forward on Incrementa counting Pulse and direction reverse off Decremental counting 2 Freqency Hz lt K constant gt Frequency range 0 1 5Hzto9 8kHz K1 to K9800 unit Hz Max error near 9 8 kHz approx 0 9 kHz Set K1 to specify 1 5 Hz 1 48Hzto100kHz K48 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 3 kHz 2 191 Hz to 100 kHz K48 to K100000 unit Hz Max error near 100 kHz approx 0 8 kHz Set the frequency 1 which is initial speed to 30 KHz or less 3 Target value K 2147483648 to K2147483647 The value of the 32 bit data specified for the target value should be within the range indicated in the table below Specification of control code Range of allowable Operation mode Output method target values Incremental counting Specifies a positive value Incremental Decremental counting Specifies a negative value Incremental countin Specifies a value larger 9 than the current value Absolute Decremental counting Specifies a value smaller than the current value 4 When the frequency is set to 50Hz or higher the duty must be set to 1 4 25 6 40 6 4 9 Action of the Flag concerning Linear Interpolation and Circular Interpolation 3 Key Point Can be used with C32T2 C28P2 C32T2H and C28P2H only Table of flag Allocation Flag conditions The u
318. ring ASCII code H2A2A instead of the BCC 5 Terminator end code Messages must always end with a Cp ASCII code HOD 7 21 EA note e The method for writing text segments in the message varies depending on the type of command e f there is a large number of characters to be written they may be divided and sent as several commands If there is a large number of characters in the value that was loaded they may be divided and several responses sent p Key Point e With the FP an expansion header lt is supported to send single frames of up to 2048 characters as well as general Type of header No of characters that can be sent in 1 frame Max 118 characters lt Coo o g Max 2048 characters Response message The PLC that received the command in the example above sends the processing results to the computer Header Unit no of source PLC that processed the command decimal Text Processing results and communication error codes ar estored here Check code BCC Hexadecimal E Terminator C or R C R lt Two One _ digit digit Read value Processing results for contact area read contact is off Command name e g read contact area Response code indicates a normal processing result indicates that an error occurred 1 Header start code A ASCII code H25 or lt ASCII code H3C must be at the beginning of a message
319. rite during RUN is being attempted Nothing is written to the CPU 170 SIM over error Program area was exceeded during a program write process 174 Exclusive access A command that cannot be processed was executed at the same control error time as a command being processed External memory error No program error and No data error 167 14 73 14 5 MEWTOCOL COM Communication Commands Table of MEWTOCOL COM commands Reads the on and off status of contact Specifies only one point Specifies multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Turns contacts on and off Specifies only one point Se multiple contacts Specifies a range in word units Se Write data area WD Writes data to a data area EPRE Monitors a registered contact or data using the M M onitoring start code MC or MD l E h f ifi in a 16 Preset contact area fill command SC yee Perales Ole Specie TARGE IN AG point on and off pattern Wri h h f Preset data area fill command SD rites the same contents to the data area of a specified range Read system register RR Reads the contents of a system register Write system register Specifies the contents of a system register R h ificati f th Read the status of PLC RT eads the specifications ol the programmable controller and error codes if an error occurs Remote control RM Switches the operation mode of the programmable controller Abort JAB _ Aborts communication
320. rm the compensation for 30 seconds when RO is turned ON If the 30 second compensation is required use this program R9010 c F6 DGT DT 90054 H 12 DT 101 F6 DGT DT 90054 H 10 DT 100 R9010 R900B R100 F62 WIN DT 100 H O H 29 4 R900B R101 F62 WIN DT 100 H 30 H 589 H RO R100 LK o H F6 DGT H 0 H 10 DT 110 F6 DGT DT 101 H 210 DT 110 FO MV DT 110 DT 90054 FO MV H 8000 DT 90058 RO R101 L pF H H F157 CADD DT 90054 H 100 DT 110 F6 DGT H 0 H 10 DT 110 FO MV DT 110 DT 90054 FO MV DT 111 DT 90055 F0 MV DT 112 DT 90056 FO MV H 8000 DT 90058 2 19 2 20 Chapter 3 Expansion 3 1 Type of Expansion Unit The FP expansion unit including intelligent units and the FPO FPOR expansion unit expansion I O unit and intelligent unit can be used with FP The FPO FPOR expansion units are connected on the right side of the control unit just as they were with the FPO The FP expansion units are connected to the left side of the control unit Expansion on left side of control unit FP gt expansion unit Expansion possible up to 4 units Expansion on right side of control unit q FPO FPOR expansion unit Expansion possible up to 3 units Control unit ae Note e The FP expansion unit cannot be connected to FPG C32T FPG C32TTM FPG C32TH or FPG C32THTM Only the FPO FPOR expansion unit can be c
321. rminal station 7 31 AFPG806 Connection diagram FP E side 5 pin terminal Pin name Signar name Abbre _ frransmisson nero RD Received Data RD To external device with RS485 port To external device with R5485 port In case of using the AFPG806 connect two cables each to the terminal and terminal Use the wires of the same cross sectional area which should be 0 5 to 0 75 mm Setting of terminal station The terminal station is specified with the dip switch located in the communication cassette FP 2 PP 2 red mr yey i il imi il IB mn iit IB in T M m E LUL ee line Transmission line penile line To conversion adapter sonne Re of computer connection 1 32 7 4 4 MEWTOCOL Master Sample Program Available For 32k Type Only Use the F145 SEND Data send or F146 RECV Data receive instruction to use the MEWTOCOL master function Sample program Sets the communication port to COM1 the remote unit No to 01 and No of processing words to 2 in the DT100 and DT101 Clear the WRO to send the write command first J Clear the write data DT50 and DT51 Set the read data DT60 and DT61 R9013 H Fo mv H2 DT100 J Fo MV H1001 DT J Note 1 Fo Mv HO WRO J F1DMV HO DT50 F1 DMV HFFFFFFFF DT60 J R1 is the transmission condition of write command transmission condition and 31F 2 is
322. roducts discontinued as of May 2008 Number of I O points PartNo Product No Input 16 points Transistor output 16 FPG C32T AFPG2543 points NPN Input 16 points Transistor output 16 FPG C32T2 AFPG264 Input 16 points Transistor output 12 FPG C28P2 AFPG2653 points PNP Input 16 points Relay output 8 points FPG C24R2 AFPG2423 Input 16 points Transistor output 16 FPG C32TTM AFPG2543TM points NPN FP Control unit Input 16 points Transistor output 16 AFPG2643TM i FPG C32T2TM AFPG2643TM With thermister input points NPN ee eee function Input 16 points Transistor output 12 FPG C28P2TM_ AEPG2653TM points PNP Input 16 points Relay output 8 points FPG C24R2TM AFPG2423TM Note The FP expansion I O unit cannot be added to FPG C32T nor FPG C32TTM FP control unit 32k type Name Number of I O points PartNo Product No Input 16 points Transistor output 16 FPG C32TH AFPG2543H points NPN FPZ Control unit Input 16 points Transistor output 16 FPG C32T2H AFPG2643H High capacity type points NPN Program capacity 32k Input 16 points Transistor output 12 FPG C28P2H AFPG2653H points PNP Input 16 points Relay output 8 points FPG C24R2H AFPG2423H Input 16 points Transistor output 16 FPG FPS Control unit points NPN C32THTM Coe ontrol uni Input 16 points Transistor output 16 FPG La y Points NPN Cs212HTIM r eee With thermister input Input 16 points Transistor output 12 AFPG2653
323. rogramming tool e f the output monitored is turned on there is probably a duplicated output error Procedure 2 Forcing on the output using forcing input output function e f the output indicator LED is turned on go to input condition check e f the output indicator LED remains off there is probably an abnormality in the output unit Please contact your dealer Check of input condition 1 Input indicator LEDs are off Procedure 1 Check the wiring of the input devices Procedure 2 Check that the power is properly supplied to the input terminals e f the power is properly supplied to the input terminal there is probably an abnormality in the input unit Please contact your dealer e f the power is not supplied to the input terminal there is probably an abnormality in the input device or input power supply Check the input device and input power supply Check of input condition 2 Input indicator LEDs are on Procedure Monitor the input condition using a programming tool e f the input monitored is off there is probably an abnormality with the input unit Please contact your dealer e f the input monitored is on check the leakage current at the input devices e g two wire type sensor and check the program again Check 1 Check for the duplicated use of output and for the output using the high level instruction 2 Check the program flow when a control instruction such as MCR or JMP is used 10 6 10 2 5 A Protec
324. rror occurs Tso master station scan time Tic 10 x Ttx Sending time per byte Ttx 1 baud rate x 1000 x 11 ms Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Twt Initial value 400 ms can be changed using SYS1 system register instruction Tis 7 x Ttx sending time per byte Ttx 1 baud rate x 1000 x 11 ms Approx 0 096 ms at 115 2 kbps Tso Master station scan time Calculation example 1 When all stations have been added to a 16 unit link the largest station number is 16 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLCs is 1 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 4 8 x4 71 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 71 6 82 ms Each Ts 1 6 82 7 82ms_ Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 16 4 32 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 7 82 x 16 4 32 1 130 44 ms 7 66 Calculation example 2 When all stations have been added to a 16 unit link the largest station number is 16 relays and registers have been evenly allocated and the scan time for each PLC is 5 ms Ttx 0 096 Each Pem 23 4 8 x4 71 bytes Tpc Ttx x Pem 0 096 x 71 6 82 ms Each Ts 5 6 82 11 82ms_ Tit 0 096 x 13 2 x 16 4 32 ms Given the above conditions the maximum value for the transmission time T of one cycle will be T max 11 82 x 16 4 32 5 198 44 ms 7 67 Calculation example 3 When all but one station have been added to a 16 unit link the largest stat
325. rror occurs Change in the detection timing of the battery error It is detected 2 seconds after the power is on Interrupt program can be started when the high speed counter target value matches Scan time display in 100us unit 10us ring counter DT90020 General purpose communication function with TOOL port MODBUS RTU master slave communication function COM1 COM2 MEW TOCOL COM master communication function COM1 COM2 32k step program capacity Enhancement of comment capacity Enhancement of security functions If failed to input a correct 4 digit password for 3 times in Succession the operation cannot be continued 8 digit password 32k type V3 00 Prohibition of program readout Forced cancel of security Reading of security information Reverse setting function of PC link 32k type only R9005 and R9006 is always announced when the battery error occurs Change in the detection timing of the battery error It is detected 2 seconds after the power is on Real number basic compare instructions 18 types STF S1 S2 ANF S1 S2 ORF S1 S2 STF lt gt S1 S2 ANF lt gt S1 S2 ORF lt gt S1 S2 STF gt S1 S2 ANF gt S1 S2 ORF gt S1 S2 STF gt S1 S2 ANF gt S1 S2 ORF gt S1 S2 STF lt S1 S2 ANF lt S1 S2 ORF lt S1 S2 STF lt S1 S2 ANF lt S1 S2 ORF lt S1 S2 vii Usable model Usable functions lt Special instructions gt F230 TMSEC F231 SECTM F354 FSCAL lt Serial data conversion gt F250 BTOA Binary ASCII conv
326. s 5 17 Wiring method 1 Remove a portion of the wire s insulation 7 mm 2 Insert the wire into the terminal block until it contacts the back of the block socket and then tighten the screw clockwise to fix the wire in place Tightening torque 0 22 N m to 0 25 N m 2 3 kgf cm to 2 5 kgf cm Note e When removing the wire s insulation be careful not to scratch the core wire e Do not twist the wires to connect them e Do not solder the wires to connect them The solder may break due to vibration e After wiring make sure stress is not applied to the wire e In the terminal block socket construction if the wire closes upon counter clockwise rotation the connection is faulty Disconnect the wire check the terminal hole and then re connect the wire Clockwise Counter clockwise 5 18 5 6 Safety Measures 5 6 1 Safety Measures Precautions regarding system design In certain applications malfunction may occur for the following reasons e Power on timing differences between the PLC system and input output or mechanical power apparatus e Response time lag when a momentary power drop occurs e Abnormality in the PLC unit external power supply or other devices In order to prevent a malfunction resulting in system shutdown choose the adequate safety measures listed in the following Interlock circuit When a motor clockwise counter clockwise operation is controlled provide an interlock circuit ex
327. s and then select COM1 port tab Dialog box of PLC system register setting Hold Hen hald 1 HoldNon hold Action em Err High Spend Counter lnteerupt input Toot Port OOM Port cose Port DF Time Lik Hodil Unt ln h Toned Nodl2 Comm Mode M 2m MakmEnbed aae Nod Communication F i Hod15 Geudale ai Che Be anes wt i eo mie Pr y low Hpvecdes F mia Hep gobi fi No 410 for COM1 port Unit number setting Select the COM port operation mode Click on Y and select a unit number between 1 and 16 Note1 Station numbers should be set sequentially and consecutively starting from 1 with no breaks between them If there is a missing station number the transmission time will be longer Note2 If fewer than 16 units are linked the transmission time can be shortened by setting the largest station number in system register no 47 Setting with SYS instruction Setting the unit number setting switch to 0 makes the SYS instruction settings valid 7 54 Link area allocation e The link relays and link registers to be used in the PC PLC link are allocated in the link area of the CPU unit Link area allocations are specified by setting the system registers of the CPU unit IEF er The PC PLC link 1 is available for the FP 32k type only Set the system register 46 to Reverse to use the PC PLC link 1 System registers 40 Range of link relays used forPC P
328. s are set to the same unit number Using system registers enables to set each unit number individually d3 Communication cassette option This is the optional cassette type adapter used when communication is carried out Any one of the following cassette types may be installed 1 channel RS232C type 2 channel RS232C type 1 channel RS485 type 1 channel RS485 and 1 channel RS232C type in combination 2 4 Expansion hook This hook is used to secure expansion units The hook on the right side is also used for installation on flat type mounting plate AFP0804 5 Right side connector for FPO expansion This is used to connect an expansion unit to the internal circuit of the control unit The connector is located under the seal DIN hook The FPS unit enables attachment at a touch to a DIN rail The lever is also used for installation on slim 30 type mounting plate AFP0811 D Battery cover This is uncovered to mount the backup battery sold separately The backup of the calendar timer function or data register is possible with the backup battery Thermister input line The end of part No and product No is TM type only It is used to connect the thermister to read the change in the resistance value of the thermister as analog input values 2 5 2 2 Input and Output Specifications 2 2 1 Input Specifications Input Specifications for all types Insulation method Rated input voltage 24V DC For XO X1
329. s been completed Without near home input With near home input Home input ON Near home Home mpesa spend input ON input ON Max speed Max speed Initial speed Initial speed Home input is effective at any time Home input ON during deceleration Near home Speed Input ON Home Max speed input ON Yy Initial speed OHz Type Il home return In this mode the home input is effective only after deceleration started by near home input has been completed Speed Near home input ON Home Max speed input ON Initial speed OHz Pu Home input is effective only after deceleration has been completed e Reference The Pulse output control instruction FO is used for the near home input lt 6 4 4 Pulse output control instructions FO F1 gt 6 32 Sample program Home return operation using CHO Minus direction When XA turns on a pulse is output from CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CHO and the return to home begins When XO turns on deceleration begins and when X2 turns on home return is completed After the return to home is completed the elapsed value areas DT90044 and DT90045 are cleared to 0 OV 24 V DC FPE Tf Home return start 5c F E vo Pulse ouipul CW Ba A x2 _ Home input Pulse output CCW a Qs Near home input Motor driver side side Nlotor LA hi i Li Wi AAI Y L1 AN 7 a n a
330. s executed Number of bytes received 5 e For general purpose serial communication half duplex transmission must be used e Reception is disabled when the reception done flag R9038 or R9048 is on e When F159 MTRN is executed the number of bytes received is cleared and the address write pointer in the receive buffer is reset to the initial address e Also when F159 MTRN is executed the error flag R9037 or R9047 the reception done flag R9038 or R9048 and the transmission done flag R9039 or R9049 goes off e Duplex transmission is disabled while F159 MTRN is being executed The transmission done flag R9039 or R9049 must be observed e Reception continues even if the error flag R9037 turns on To resume reception execute the F159 MTRN instruction which turns off the error flag IEF Note e Be aware that the reception done flag R9038 or R9048 changes even while a scan is in progress e g if the reception done flag is used multiple times as an input condition there is a possibility of different statuses existing within the same scan To prevent multiple read access to the special internal relay you should generate a copy of it at the beginning of the program gy Key Point e The contact numbers in parentheses refer to COM2 port 7 44 Header STX Terminator ETX Receiving data The reception done flag the transmission done flag and the F159 MTRN instruction a
331. s ports is 9600 bps Change the value to match the external device connected to the COM port Click on M and select one of the values from 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 bps No 416 for COM1 port No 418 for COM2 port Starting address for data received No 417 for COM1 port No 419 for COM2 port Buffer capacity setting for data received To use general purpose serial communication the receive buffer must be specified By default the entire data register area is defined as the receive buffer To change this area specify the starting address using system register no 416 no 418 for COM2 port and the volume number of words using no 417 no 419 for COM2 port The receive buffer layout is shown below Receive buffer Starting area specified The number of in system register no _ received bytes 416 no 418 is stored here The number of words is Received data specified in system regis storage area ter no 417 no 419 The system register in parenthesesrefer to COM port 2 1 37 7 5 2 Communication with External Devices Programming example of general purpose serial communication The F159 MTRN instruction is used to send and receive data via the specified COM port F159 MTRN is only used with the FP It is an updated version of F144 TRNS and allows multiple communication ports to be accommodated F144 TRNS is not available with the FP F159 MTRN instruction Data is sent an
332. s to receive commands from the computer link execute the process and send back the results Any special ladder program is not necessary to use this function Set the communication conditions in the system registers It enables the 1 1 or 1 N communication with a master computer or PLC e The program for the computer side must be written in BASIC or C language according to the MEW TOCOL COM MEWTOCOL COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC operation Master Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave T N O O O Ps Loo E General purpose serial communication e With general purpose serial communication data can be sent back and forth between an image processing device connected to the COM port and an external device such as a bar code reader e Reading and writing of data is done using a ladder program in the FPx while reading and writing of data from an external device connected to the COM port is handled through the FP data registers Image checker Data register DT Data transmission using F159 MTRN LS gt CT Data received in receive buffer Data Is sent to and received from external devices thruogh FPS the data registers PC PLC link e In a PC PLC link data is shared with all PLCs connected via MEWNET using dedicated internal relays called link relays L and data registers called link registers LD e f the link relay contact for one PLC goes on the same
333. se of 115200 bps 200us Note Lineeye SI 35 is recommended to be used as a conversion adapter Setting system registers Setting of COM1 port No Name No 410 COM1 port unit number 1 to 99 Set the desired unit number 32 units stations can be specified No 412 COM1 port selection of communication mode Computer link No 413 Communication format for COM1 port Data length 7 bits 8 bits Parity check None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist No 415 Baud rate setting for COM1 port 2400 to 115200 bps Note1 The communication format and baud rate communication speed should be set to match the connected computer Note2 The RS485 port of the AFPG806 is either 19200 bps or 115200 bps only Also the baud rate must be identically set by the system register and the dip switch in the communication cassette Note3 Setting the unit number setting switch to 0 makes the system register settings valid Note4 Connect the terminal and the E terminal with a lead wire to make the termination resistance of the AFPG803 effective The termination resistance of the AFPG806 is specified by the dip switch located in the communication cassette 7 28 Setting of unit numbers By default the unit number for each communication port is set to 1 in the system register settings There is no need to change this for 1 1 communication but if 1 N comm
334. sed on the contents specified by the character constant Change the setting value of the system register for the PLC link function FPO FPOR mode FP2SH FP10SH Available Not available Not available partially 1 With FP X Ver2 0 or later and FP Ver 3 10 or later the baud rate can be selected from 300 600 or 1200 bps 2 With FP amp 32k type the 8 digit password can be selected 3 With FP 32k type and FP X Ver1 10 or later it can be used 14 37 l mates Data Data compare instructions instructions 16 bit Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 data bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 compare Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 Start bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 gt S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 gt S2 or S1 S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 Begins a logic operation by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 lt S2 or S1 S2 16 bit Connects a Form A normally open contact serially by comparing two 16 bit data in the comparative condition S1 S2 Connects a Form A normally open contact AND lt eee serially by comparing two 16 bit data i
335. sensor Relay output type NPN open collector output type Vec pe T Output i Sensor eS ES Olnput terminal pp y Es ES K A A j i Power supply for sensor Power supply for input Power supply for input Voltage output type Two wire output type Sensor Inputterminall Ep y Sensor Internal T pe b E circuit Power supply for input Power supply for input Precaution when using LED equipped reed switch When a LED is connected in series to an input contact such as LED equipped reed switch make LED equipped sure that the on voltage applied to the PLC input dace terminal is greater than 21 6V DC In particular take care when connecting a number of switches in series If the input of PLC does not turn off because of leakage current from the two wire type sensor ohotoelectric sensor or proximity sensor the use of a bleeder resistor is recommended as shown below Two wire type sensor Sensor s leakage current mA l R Blender resietar KQO l The formula is based on an input impedance of 5 6kQ The input impedance varies depending on of bleeder resistor R so that the voltage between the COM the input terminal number terminal and the input terminal will be less than 2 4 W The input impedance is 56k The off voltage of the input is 2 4 V therefore select the value 5 6R Ix J Therefore 56 R 13 44 R oo kil 5 6 2 4 The watta
336. ses of the flag in the program T rin ion of pul a ae a anne D Pi Se OLpUI Use this to prohibit the simultaneous instructions that include a circular R903A ae ees execution of other high speed counter interpolation instruction and then maintains Control flag instructions and pulse output that state during pulse output from CHO l l hong This flag is the same for instructions F166 to lait MOONA EO ANON F176 T rin ion of pul _ aa Hn Pe K pean Use this to prohibit the simultaneous instructions that include a circular R903C ced SRRI execution of other high speed counter interpolation instruction and then maintains Control flag instructions and pulse output that state during pulse output from CH2 l l i f CH2 This flag is the same for instructions F166 to pacar ane Teeny a F176 Turns on when circular interpolation Use this to prohibit the simultaneous instruction F176 starts up and maintains execution of other high speed counter that state until the target value is reached instructions and to verify completion of When the target value has not been a circular interpolation action When reached even if the circular interpolation this flag is on other positioning instruction execution condition is off that instructions F171 to F176 cannot be state is maintained started R904F When conducting control with the Confirmation Turns on for one scan when the circular continuous mode for performing flag for
337. sistance of the AFPG803 effective The termination resistance of the AFPG806 is specified by the dip switch located in the communication cassette 7 49 7 6 Communication Function 3 PC PLC link 7 6 1 PC PLC link Overview e The PC PLC link is an economic way of linking PLCs using a twisted pair cable e Data is shared between the PLCs using link relays L and link registers LD e The statuses of the link relays and link registers of one PLC are automatically fed back to the other PLCs on the same network e PC PLC link is not the default setting Therefore the setting of system register no 412 must be changed to PC PLC link in order to use this function e Unit numbers and link areas are allocated using the system registers FP gt FP gt FP gt FPE Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 Unit no 4 Send area aA Receive Send area arsa aici Receive area Receive area RS485 The link relays and link registers of the PLCs contain areas for sending and areas for receiving data These areas are used to share data among the PLCs 7 50 Operation of PC PLC link e Turning on a link relay contact in one PLC turns on the same link relay in all other PLCs on the same network e Likewise if the contents of a link register in one PLC are changed the values of the same link register are changed in all PLCs on the same network Link relay Link relay LO for unit no 1 is turned on The stat
338. sition Target position Y axis P2 to P4 DT1008 to 1009 Target position X axis S1 to S3 DT1010 to 1011 Target position Y axis S3 to S3 Work area DT1012 to 1017 Operation result Parameters calculated due to instruction storage area execution are stored DT90044 to Elapsed value Current position X axis Special DT 90045 area CHO p DT90200 to Elapsed value amp rent position Y axis 0 90201 area CH2 p 6 55 Program XB RS0GA RSOSC RSO4E R1 RO In case of RSO3A RSOSC and R904E are OFF if XB tums ON positioning started Data preset DF Posiboning start Conia Conte Conve Positioning Positioning 29 fag fag done i RO lo feo running Positioning running RO 0 f Positioning running Shift register preset 1 F1 MV H1 WR Pasay Elapsed value area preset Fi DMV KO DT 90044 J Elapsed value area CHO Fi DMV KO OT 90200 Elapsed value area CH2 B06 a maa Data setting from P1 to P2 Data ey i the control from P1 to 1 F1 DMV H 10010 DT 1000 Control code Control code Continue mode from CH2 CWV to CHO CW direction F1 DMV 1000 usc speed Pass position setting method Absolute F1 DMV K1000 DT 1004 P2 X axis Target position cho Fi DMV KO DT 1006 P2 Y axis Target position ch2 F1 DMV K500_ DT 1008 S1 X axis Pass position chO Fi DMV K250 DT 1010 Rit S1 Y axis Pass position ch2 w y
339. so the program is easier than the general purpose communication function The 1 1 or 1 N communication is available between our devices equipped with the computer link function and the MEWTOCOL COM Our devices e g PLC IPD temperature control unit eco power meter For the MEWTOCOL master function communication is possible with the 32k tyoe COM1 and COM2 ports only Do not execute the F145 SEND nor F146 RECV instructions when the unit is used as a Slave unit FPX gt gt 1 ac Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave f Master Dopada a KT temperature KT temperature control unit control unit MEWTOCOL slave function e This function is to receive commands from the computer link execute the process and send back the results Any special ladder program is not necessary to use this function Set the communication conditions in the system registers It enables the 1 1 or 1 N communication with a master computer or PLC e The program for the computer side must be written in BASIC or C language according to the MEW TOCOL COM MEWTOCOL COM contains the commands used to monitor and control PLC operation Master AA A Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave je m a a fa iN i z Outline of operation when using computer link MEWTOCOL slave Command and response e Instructions issued by the computer to the PLC are called commands Messages sent back to the computer from the PLC are called responses
340. ssword PLE Protect Unprotect Help Input a password to be set m Click Settings Enter in hex E 3 ia N The protect of PLE was released Note The protection cannot be released if the access is not allowed Executing the force cancel Programs and security information are all deleted e Oeee neat PLC Home Settings Close Operation Mode Access Protect C Unprotect _ Heb Password Enter in hex FPWIN GR Click Yes Q The password and whole program will be erased Sure Click Yes FPWIN GR C Impossible to execute force cancel PLC is in RUN mode 3 Z2 Change the PLC mode from RUN to PROG Sure This operation may take a long time depending on the baud rate performance of a PC or password data All programs and security information were deleted N Completed normally 8 9 8 3 Upload Protection FP 32k Type Only This function is to prohibit reading programs and system registers by setting to disable program uploading If setting to prohibit program uploading note that the ladder programs and system registers will be disabled to be uploaded after that However editing the files that are controlled with a PC can be carried out online using the programming tool Note that the programs will be broken if the programs are not absolutely matched When using this function store ladder programs as files without fa
341. t s 00 8 bits Pally EEE Odd Stop Bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header 2008 STX not exist To change the communication format to match an external device connected to the COM port enter the settings for the various items No 415 Baud rate communication speed setting The default setting for the communication speed for the various ports is 9600 bps Change the value to match the external device connected to the COM port Click on M and select one of the values from 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 bps Restrictions e The two ports of the communication cassette can be used independently They can be set to computer link mode or general purpose serial communication e There is no restriction when multiple ports are used 1 29 7 4 2 1 1 Communication Computer link System register settings Settings for COM1 port AFPG801 AFPG802 No Name Set Value No 410 COM1 port unit number No 412 COM1 port selection of communication mode Computer link Communication format for COM1 port Data length 7 bits 8 bits Parity check None Odd Even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bit Terminator CR Header STX not exist No 415 Baud rate setting for COM1 port 2400 to 115200 bps Settings for COM2 port AFPG802 AFPG806 ie Set Value No 411 COM2 port unit number a No 412 COM2 port selection of commu
342. t counter Single phase 2 phase Independence Inde Interpo Single ee dence 6 6 A Available Channel being used Max counting speed frequency kHz a Maer Pulse output High speed pulse output counter Single phase 2 phase Independence Independence Interpo Single eet paeh pie om ome afe TT pet 2 45 oe et Lea Circular Circular Circular Circular Note1 If two channels are not executed simultaneously each axis may be used up to 100 kHz Note2 These are the values when PC link and fixed interval interrupt function are not used Note3 When using CHO pulse output do not use the hard reset X2 at CHO and CH1 of HSC When using CH2 pulse output do not use the hard reset X5 at CH2 and CH3 of HSC Restrictions on I O allocations e The inputs and outputs allocated to the various functions listed in the table in the previous section 6 2 1 cannot be allocated to more than one function e Except for the examples noted below inputs and outputs that have been allocated to the various functions cannot be allocated as normal inputs and outputs Example 1 If no reset input is used in the high speed counter function X2 and X5 can be as normal inputs Example 2 If no output is used to clear the differential counter in the pulse output function Y2 and Y5 can be used as normal outputs Restrictions on the execution of related instructions F166 to F176 e f an instruction related to the
343. t Error Message Appears When a password function is used Procedure Enter a password in the Set PLC Password menu in FPWIN GR and turn on the Access radio button Using FPWIN GR 1 Select Set PLC Password under Tool on the menu bar 2 The PLC password setting dialog box shown below is displayed Turn on the radio button next to Access enter a password and click on the Settings button Set PLC password dialog box set PLO Fassword Urititlei T Operation Mode Access See MATT Force Cancel C Protect C Unprotect H Password Enter in hes 10 2 6 PROG Mode does not Change to RUN Condition A syntax error or a self diagnosed error that caused operation to stop has occurred Procedure 1 Check if the ERROR ALARM LED is flashing Reference If the ERROR ALARM LED is flashing check lt 10 2 1 If ERROR ALARM LED is flashing gt Procedure 2 Execute a total check function to determine the location of the syntax error Using FPWIN GR Select Debug on the menu bar and select Totally check program Click on the Execute button in the total check dialog box 10 7 10 2 7 A Transmission Error has Occurred through RS485 Procedure 1 Check to make sure the transmission cables have been securely connected between the two terminals and two terminals of the units and that the final unit has been correctly connected
344. t an interrupt request A hardware problem or error due to Stops noise is possible gt Turn off the power and check the noise conditions Interrupt error 1 There is no interrupt program for an interrupt hich occurred Interr 5 SCTU Stops Check the number of the interrupt program error 2 and change it to agree with the interrupt request Multi CPU This error occurs when a FP3 FP10SH is CPU2 h S used as CPU2 for a multi CPU system unmatc tops Refer to Multi CPU system Manual An abnormal unit is installed FP FROR FPOR mode FP X FP2 FP2SH and FP10SH Check the contents of special data register DT90036 and locate the abnormal unit Then S turn off the power and replace the unit with a tops new one FP3 Check the contents of special data register DT9036 and locate the abnormal unit Then turn off the power and replace the unit with a new one MEWNET F A unit which cannot be installed on the slave station of the MEWNET F link system is Stops installed on the slave station illegal unit Remove the illegal unit from the slave station MEWNET F The number of slots or I O points used for remore MEWNET F remote I O system exceeds the St limitation eRe Re configure the system so that the limitation number of slots and I O points is within the specified range MEWNET F I O overlap or I O setting that is over the I O St range is detected in the allocated I O and mapping
345. t as the result of the battery shutoff The setting of the system registers Nos 6 to 14 are effective only when the backup battery is installed Without the battery use at the default settings If changing the settings the Hold Non hold operation becomes unstable 9 22 5 7 3 Replacement of Backup Battery The procedure for replacing the backup battery is as follows Procedure 1 Supply power to the control unit for more than one minute Charge the built in capacitor to retain the contents of the memory during the replacement of the battery 1 Turn off the power supply Remove the battery cover using a tool such as a screwdriver 4 Remove the used battery 5 Install a new battery within two minutes after turning off the power of the control unit Connect the connector and place the battery between two tabs 6 Install the expansion cover aor Note If the power is not sufficiently supplied or it takes too much time to replace the battery retained memory data may be lost 9 23 Replacement procedure for high capacity battery folder for FP2 AFPG807 and commercial battery CR123A 1 Supply power to the control unit for more than one minute Charge the built in capacitor to retain the contents of the memory during the replacement of the battery 2 Turn off the power 3 Remove the used battery 4 Install a new battery within two minutes after turning off the power of the control unit Ea No
346. t executed Precautions when using an instruction which performs leading edge detection e When RUN begins for example when the system is powered on the off on change of the execution condition trigger is not detected The instruction is not executed Execution of the instruction will take place as explained on the next page e When used with one of the instructions indicated in instructions 1 to 6 below which change the order of execution of instructions the operation of the instruction may change depending on input timing Take care regarding this point Be careful when using leading edge detection type instructions with control instructions such as 1 MC and MCE instructions 2 JP and LBL instructions 3 LOOP and LBL instructions 4 CNDE instruction 5 Step ladder instructions 6 Subroutine instructions 11 5 2 Operation and Precautions When RUN Starts Operation of first scan after RUN begins e The leading edge detection instruction is not executed when the mode has been switched to the RUN mode or when the power supply is booted in the RUN mode if the trigger execution condition is already on RUN Power on Trigger Operation of instruction __ Not executed Executed e If you need to execute an instruction when the trigger execution condition is on prior to switching to RUN mode make a program as below using R9014 initial pulse off relay R9014 is a special internal relay which is off durin
347. t number between 1 and 31 can be set 3 OFF o e Set the unit number setting switch to 0 to make 01 OFF 1 the system register valid 02 OFF 2 04 OFF 4 e The same unit number is given to the COM1 port a and COM2 port when using the unit number setting switch Use the system register setting to set the unit number individually for the COM1 port and COM2 port 11 OFF B 13 OFF D 14 OFF E Setting unit numbers with the system register A unit number between 1 and 99 can be set with the system register Setting the unit number setting switch to 0 makes the system register settings valid To set unit numbers with the FRPWIN GR programming software Select Options in the menu bar and then select PLC Configuration Double click COM Port There are separate settings for COM1 and COM2 Dialog box of PLC system register setting PLG Configuration Untitlel Hold Non hold 1 Hold Non hold2 Action on Error Time Link High Speed Counter Interrupt Input Tool Port COMI Port COM2 Port No 410 Unit No fi x Cancel No 412 Comm Mode a Modem Enabled P m No 413 Communication Fo No 415 Baudrate Char Bit eBits m Semen scoobps Initialize Parity Odd eader Help Stop Bit ho NOIE Staring addiess tor data received ot Teh o senal Gate comunicatori made Nosiy Eue capacit setma tar date recenved or B 7 T
348. t range Voltage 0 to 5 V 10 to 10 V FP0 A80 AFP0404 ARCTIF321 converter unit 100 to 100 mV Resolution 1 4000 Current 0 to 20 mA Resolution 1 4000 FPO K J T R thermocouples resolution 0 1 C FPO TC4 AFP0420 ARCT1F366 Thermocouple unit K J T R thermocouples resolution 0 1 C FPO TC8 AFP0421 FPO RTD Resistance Pt100 Pt1000 Ni1000 temperature Resolution 0 1 C 0 01 C Switch type FPO RTD6 AFP0430 ARCT1F445 detector unit lt Input specifications gt No of channels 2 channels Input range Voltage 0 to 5V 10 to 10V Resolution 1 4000 FPO Analog I O Current 0 to 20 mA Resolution 1 4000 FPO A21 AFP0480 ARCT1F390 unit lt Output specifications gt No of channels 1 channel Output range Voltage 10 to 10V Resolution 1 4000 Current 0 to 20 mA Resolution 1 4000 lt Output specifications gt No of channels 4 channels FPO A04V AFP04121 FPO D A Output range Voltage output type 10 to 10V converter unit Resolution 1 4000 ARCT1F382 Current output type 4 to 20 mA Resolution FPO A041 AFP04123 1 4000 1 2 5 FPX Communication Cassette Name isT Description PartNo ProductNo FP Communication This communication cassette is a 1 channel unit cassette 1 channel with a five wire RS232C port RS CS control is FPG COM1 AFPG801 RS232C type possible FP Communication This communication cassette is a 2 channel unit cassette 2 channel with a three wire
349. t the leading edge of the trigger are programmed to be triggered by one contact e g FO MV and PO PMV are programmed using the same trigger continuously Correct the program so that the high level instructions executed in every scan and only at the leading edge are triggered separately There is an incorrect operand in an instruction which requires a specific combination of operands for example the operands must all be of a certain type Enter the correct combination of operands Program may be damaged gt Try to send the program again When inputting with the programming tool software a deletion addition or change of order of an instruction ED LBL SUB RET INT IRET SSTP and STPE that cannot perform a rewrite during RUN is being attempted Nothing is written to the CPU A Available Table of Self Diagnostic Error Opera Error ee T tion Description and steps to take N code A status a 3 CPU error Stops Probably a hardware abnormality A AIA Please contact your dealer error RAM RAM Probably an abnormality in the internal RAM Stops EA conte a ee Pee ee error4 RAM Master memory The models of master memories are different A model Stops Use the master memories created with the i unmatch same model error FP e FP0 FPOR FP and FP1 C14 C16 Probably a hardware abnormality Please contact your dealer FP X When the master memory cassette is mounted the master memory
350. t value can be written with FO MV instruction to reset the high speed counter disable counting continue or clear high speed counter instruction Control code ang 15 43210 High speed counter Channel setting DT90052 and pulse output ETE control flag PLS 0 2 CHO CH PLS Home near input D Invalikd 1 Valid HEC High speed counter instuction O Continue 1 Clear PLS Pulse output Q Continue 1 Stop SC Hardware reset Q Enable 1 Disable SC PLS Court 0 Enable Disable HSC PLS Software reset Q Not Yes Note Refer to the Count for reset input in Count 6 3 2 Input Mode and Count Hour and minute data of the Real Time Clock Clock Calendar are stored here This data is Real Time Clock read only data It cannot be overwritten DT90053 Clock Calendar Higher byte Lower byte monitor hour minute L ee eee a a Hour data Minute data HOO to H23 HOO to H59 Real Time Clock The year month day hour minute second DT90054 Clock Calendar and day of the week data for the Real Time setting Clock Clock Calendar is stored minute second The built in Real Time Clock Clock Calendar Real Time Clock will operate correctly through the year 2099 DT90055 Clock Calendar and supports leap years The Real Time Clock setting day hour Clock Calendar can be set by writing a value Real Time using a programming tool software or a DT90056 Clock Clock Calendar program that uses the FO MV instruction see setti
351. tallation and Wiring 5 1 Installation 5 1 1 Installation Environment and Space Operating environment Use the unit within the range of the general specifications when installing Ambient temperatures 0 55 C Ambient humidity 30 to 85 RH at 25 C non condensing Keep the height below 2000m For use in pollution Degree 2 environment Do not use it in the following environments Direct sunlight Sudden temperature changes causing condensation Inflammable or corrosive gas Excessive airborne dust metal particles or saline matter Benzine paint thinner alcohol or other organic solvents or strong alkaline solutions such as ammonia or caustic soda Direct vibration shock or direct drop of water Influence from power transmission lines high voltage equipment power cables power equipment radio transmitters or any other equipment that would generate high switching surges 100mm or more Static electricity Do not touch connector pins directly to prevent static electricity from causing damage Always rid yourself of any static electricity before handling this product Measures regarding heat discharge e Always install the unit orientated with the tool port facing outward on the bottom in order to prevent the generation of heat CORRECT e Do not install the FP control unit as shown below INCORRECT a oF Upside down Upside down Installations such that Input and output
352. te If the power is not sufficiently supplied or it takes too much time to replace the battery retained memory data may be lost Precaution when using FP high capacity battery folder AFPG807 Do not touch the terminals of the folder and connector pins directly to prevent electrostatic discharge failure Always rid yourself of any static electricity before handling this product Make sure that the parts such as the lead wires and connector parts are not stressed when and after installing it Use M8 flat head screws or a double faced tape for mounting the folder The connector to connect with the FP2 does not have a lock mechanism Fix the lead wire to prevent the connector from dropping off Installation illustration Install the battery cover pulling out a lead wire through the gap between the control unit and the battery cover 100 20 5 24 5 7 4 Lifetime and Time for Replacement of Backup Battery Battery lifetime ve Suggested Type of backup battery Battery lifetime replacement interval When using a backup battery for FP AFPG804 220 days or more When using a commercial battery CR123A and FP high capacity battery folder AFPG807 Note1 The battery lifetime is the value when no power at all is supplied Note2 Note that the lifetime in actual use may be shorter than the typical lifetime depending on the use conditions Note3 The battery is used for the battery detection circuit even whe
353. terminator is added automatically e When STX exist is specified for the header start code in system register 413 or 414 do not add the header to the transmission data The header is added automatically e When using the 1 channel RS232C type communication cassette transmission does not take place until CS Clear to Send turns on If you are not going to connect to the other device connect to RS Request to Send e The maximum number of transmission bytes n is 2048 e The contact numbers in parentheses refer to COM2 port 7 40 Specify K 8 Receiving data from external devices Data register DT Data input from the COM port is stored in the Transmitted data receive buffer specified by the system register and the reception done flag goes on If the reception done flag is off data can be received Data reception Device with RS232C port at any time Data table for reception receive buffer This is the state when the above program is executed or2oo RB The received number or e DT200 to DT204 are used as the receive m TE e aa buffer System register settings are as follows 201 B DT202 D H43 C Received data is stored in _ System register 417 K5 order from the lower ordes DT203 H46 F H45 E byte DT204 H48 H H47 G Receive buffer when reception is completed Sample program for receiving data Eight byte data received in the receive buffer through COM1
354. ternally Emergency stop circuit Provide an emergency stop circuit to the PLC externally to turn off the power supply of the output device Start up sequence The PLC should be operated after all of the outside devices are energized To keep this sequence the following measures are recommended e Turn on the PLC with the mode selector set to the PROG mode and then switch to the RUN mode e Program the PLC so as to disregard the inputs and outputs until the outside devices are energized Note In case of stopping the operation of the PLC also have the input output devices turned off after the PLC has stopped operating Grounding When installing the PLC next to devices that generate high voltages from switching such as inverters do not ground them together Use an exclusive ground for each device 5 6 2 Momentary Power Failures Operation of momentary power failures If the duration of the power failure is less than 3 ms the FP continues to operate If the power is off for 3 ms or longer operation changes depending on the combination of units the power supply voltage and other factors In some cases operation may be the same as that for a power supply reset 5 6 3 Protection of Power Supply and Output Sections Power supply An insulated power supply with an internal protective circuit should be used The power supply for the control unit operation is a non insulated circuit so if an incorrect voltage is directly applied
355. the reception done flag off to clear the number of received bytes to 0 To receive data continuously without sending data clear the number of transmitted bytes to 0 set n to KO and then execute the F159 MTRN instruction 7 38 Sending data to external devices Communication with external devices is handled through the data registers Data to be output is stored in the data register used as the send buffer DT and when the F159 MTRN instruction is executed the data is output from the COM port Data Data register DT Data transmission using writing F159 MTRN FPE Device with RS232C port Data table for transmission send buffer DT100 When transmission begins K8 is set 0 is set when transmission completed y H41 Ver 3 10 or later DTi HAZE anne When transmission ends KO DT102 H44 D H43 C DT103 H46 F H45 E DT104 H48 H H47 G Data table before transmission gt Data is transmitted in order from the low order byte Sample program for sending data The following program transmits the characters ABCDEFGH Hex to an external device using COM1 port RO R10 oe __L R10 rss ASC M ABCDEFGH ouuu DT101 er R10 ST eee ke ee ee tet ee te Data transmission command The internal relay R10 is tumed on when the transmission condition RO tums on e e en e Data conversion The characters ABCDEF GH are converted to a
356. the currently running instruction F176 cannot be started up when the target value has not been reached e When restarting use pulse output control instruction FO below to reset the pulse output instruction This operation resets the control flag for circular interpolation R904E DF F0 MV Hs DT90052 FO MV HO DT90052 CHO clear FO MV H2008 DT30052 CH clear FO MV H2000 DT90052 About composite speed setting e The maximum composite speed setting is 20 kHz Use the range of the formula given below as a guide when setting the composite speed Fv Hz lt S r pulse x 10 t ms Fv Composite speed Hz R Radius pulse t Scan time ms Example Radius r 1000 pulse Scan time 5ms Fv lt 1000 p x 10 5 ms 2000 Hz Note e The instruction calculates the component speed at each scan Therefore accuracy may be degraded if the scan time exceeds 10 ms If this should happen execute circular interpolation instruction F176 using the periodical interrupt function with an interrupt time of around 0 5 ms 6 42 Restrictions on positioning data setting e Designate settings for the target position pass position and center position so they are within the following range Allowable range 8 388 608 to 8 388 608 e When using in combination with other positioning instructions like F171 designate so the target value is within the above range even in those instructions 6 43 Sample program for
357. the set value of system register If you are going to use a value which is already set the value which appears when read there is no need write it again Using programming tool software Produce 1 Set the control unit in the PROG mode 2 Option gt PLC Configuration 3 When the function for which setting are to be entered is selected in the PLC Configuration dialog box the value and setting status for the selected system register are displayed To change the value and setting status write in the new value and or select the setting status 4 To register these settings choose OK Precautions for system register setting System register settings are effective from the time they are set However input settings tool port COM port and modem connection settings become effective when the mode is changed from PROG to RUN With regard to the modem connection setting when the power is turned off and on or when the mode is changed from PROG to RUN the controller sends a command to the modem which enables it for reception When the initialized operation is performed all set system register values parameters will be initialized 14 3 14 1 1 Table of System Registers for FP Default ape Descriptions value Starting number setting for E eoume SNOT 1008 oto taze These setings are Hold type area starting number ree are ic setting for timer and counter eee en optional backup 12k 90 battery is installed 7 Hold area see num
358. the transmission condition of read command RoO044 RO R1 Note 2 RO R2 HA H Compares the write data DT50 and DT51 with the read data DT60 and DT61 before sending the write command and updates the write data if they are matched q 39 R1 H Fe1DCMP DT50 _DT60 R1 R900B 49 1 F36 D 1 DT50 T Sends a command to write the data DT50 and DT51 of the local unit to the OTO and SSF DT1 in the unit number 01 from the COM1 port 1 _ F145 SEND DT 100 _DT50 DTO ko FO MV Al WRO 7 L Sends a command to read the data DTO and DT1 in the unit number 01 from the COM 1 TOF port and stores the result in the data DT60 and DT61 of the local unit 2 F146 RECV DT 100 DTO KO DT60 Fo Mv HO WRO 7 Note1 It is H2001 for COM2 port Note2 It is RIO4A for COM2 port sue Reference For the information on the F145 SEND and F146 RECV instructions lt Programming Manual ARCT1F313E gt 7 33 Flow chart Data initialization R9044 Note ON DT50 and DT50 is equivalent to DT60 and DT61 Increments DT50 and DT51 Execute F145 Sends a data Sends a data Execute F146 SEND instruction write command read command RECV instruction Tums RO off Note It is R904A for COM2 port The above program executes the operation 1 to 3 repeatedly 1 Updates the write data if the write data DT50 and DT51 and the read data DT60 and DT61 are match
359. to H23 HOO to H59 Available Not available Minute data Second data l DT90054 HOO to H59 HOO to H59 Available Available Day data Hour data DT90055 H01 to H31 HOO to H23 Available Available Year data Month data l l DT90056 H00 to H99 H01 to H12 Available Available Day of the week data DT90057 O o Avaliable Waleo 2 6 2 Setting of Clock Calendar Function There are two ways to set the clock calendar function as described below Setting using FPWIN GR 1 Press the CTRL and F2 keys at the same time to switch to the Online screen 2 Select Set PLC Date and Time under Tool on the menu bar Set PLC Date and Time dialog box The above steps display the Set PLC Date and Time EA E dialog box shown at the left Input the date and time and PC Hm click on the OK button Oe ee Tie Fhmn A tke i Setting and changing using program 1 The values written to the special data registers DT90054 to DT90057 which are allocated as the clock calender setting area are sent 2 A value of H8000 is written to DT90058 Note The value can be sent using the differential instruction DF or by changing H8000 to HOOOO 2 17 Example showing the date and time being written Set the time to 12 00 00 on the 5th day when the XO turns on XO ey a HDF H Fo mv Ho DT 90054 Inputs 0 minutes and 0 seconds Fo mv H512 DT 90055 f Inputs 12th hour 5th day J Fo MV H800
360. tput diagram 6000 Hz 8000 pulses 1000 Hz 0 Hz 300 ms 300 ms 6 28 Absolute position control operation When X1 is turned on pulses are output from CW output YO or CCW output Y1 of the specified channel CHO If the current value at that point is larger than 22000 the pulses are output from Y1 and if the value is smaller than 22000 the pulses are output from YO FPE WE Pulse output CW Motor driver 10 000 22 000 Regardless of the current value its movement is towards position 22 000 Program X8 R903A R32 R30 HDF R30 R30 R31 OF R31 H F1 omv Himo DT100 F1 Dmv K200 DT102 F1 DMV K4000 DT104 Fi DMV K250 DT106 F1 DMV K22000 DT108 F1 DMV KO OT110 F171 SPDH DT 100 Ko Pules are output from CHO OV 24 V DC side ee 30 000 eT es E ee ee G G Positioning data table DT100 control code 11110 ae Initial speed 900 Hz DT104 Max speed 4000 Hz are Acceleration time 250 ms DT108 Target value l Movement amount 22000 pulses lt Le Pulse stop Control code Hiiido Duty 144 2596 48 Hz to 100 kH Absolute CW and CCW f Pulse output instruction table shaped control The data table headed by DO I 100 is used and pulses are output from CHO Pulse output diagram 4000 Hz 6 29 6 4 6 Positioning Control Instruction F171 Home Return Common to Transistor
361. transmission speed of the RS485 port COM1 of AFPG806 must be identically set by the system register and the dip switch in the communication cassette Data length bit 8 bits format setting oe Stop bit 1 bit Communication Data length isat bit 8 bits Communication format setting a check Stop bit 1 bit 14 8 Default eee Descriptions value Unit No setting 1 to 99 Communication iok ee link P E mode setting Computer link General purpose serial communication MODBUS RTU Selection of modem connection Disabled Enabled Disabled Enter the settings for the various items Data length bit 7 bits 8 bits Parity check none odd even Stop bit 1 bit 2 bits The following setting is valid only when the communication mode specified by system register 412 has been set to General purpose serial communication Terminator CR CR LF None Header STX not exist STX exist 2400 bps 4800 bps Communication 9600 bps speed Baud rate 9600 bps 19200 bps setting 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps Starting address for received buffer of general serial data NaS OSATO communication mode Buffer capacity setting for data received of general 2048 0 to 2048 serial data communication mode Note The communication format in a PLC link is fixed at the following settings the data length is 8 bits odd parity stop bit is 1 The communication speed baud rate is fixed at 115200 bps The tra
362. ts l Tki ow kao orie i ioe te nt 10000 pulses CVE en amount a ea F1 DMV KO DT 110 Control code H1100 Duty 1 4 25 48 Hz to100 KHz Incremental CW and CCV F171 SPDH DT 100 KO f Pulse output instruction i table shaped control ates as eden SU and pulses are output from CHO R903A R10 TO R12 e i pF F Positioning done pulse 1 second ees oa a a EE SS SS ee R12 F Setting K10 and using it as a 1 s timer d i ee s e e e a a e p e a Pulse output diagram 5000 Hz 10000 pulses 6 27 Incremental Position Control Operation Minus Direction When X9 turns on the pulse is output from CCW output YO of the specified channel CHO O V 24 V DC Start input Pulse output CW JET YO Pulse output CCW TUL A Motor driver side 8000 pulses Program x9 R903A R22 R20 spat a ems ees en ee oF Positioning operation running R20 ns R20 R21 E Hor yl Positioning operation stat R21 Positioning data table Er omv Hno orio J omv kio orio J DT104 a kee omai to cee et Sr near eos ovement amount LEDAN eae eee F1 DMV ko DT110 F171 SPDH DT 100 KO f Pulse output instruction 1 table shaped control The data table headed by DT100 is used and pulses are output from CHO ee R903A R20 TO R22 ae O A A O Hr R22 TMX 0 K10 O1s type timer Setting K10 and using it as a 1 s timer Pulse ou
363. turn off the control unit before the input output power supply If the input output power supply is turned off before the control unit or if the control unit is not shut off momentarily the controller detects change of input level and might conduct an unexpected operation Before turning on the power When turning on the power for the first time be sure to take the precautions given below When performing installation check to make sure that there are no scraps of wiring particularly conductive fragments adhering to the unit Verify that the power supply wiring I O wiring and power supply voltage are all correct Sufficiently tighten the installation screws and terminal screws Set the mode selector to PROG Mode Before entering a program Be sure to perform a program clear operation before entering a program For information on the operating procedure refer to the manuals of tool software Tool software FPWIN Pro FPWIN GR Request concerning program storage To prevent the accidental loss of programs the user should consider the following measures Drafting of documents To avoid accidentally losing programs destroying files or overwriting the contents of a file documents should be printed out and then saved Specifying the password carefully The password setting is designed to avoid programs being accidentally overwritten If the password is forgotten however it will be impossible to overwrite the program even if
364. ud rate Note3 Note8 to be set by system register Trans mission General purpose serial communication code Communication format to be set by system register Note4 No of connected units 7 10 Parity Note5 6 D 2 units 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps Computer link ASCII JIS7 JIS8 ASCII JIS7 JIS8 Binary Max 99 units Max 32 units when C NET adapter is connected Note1 When connecting a commercially available device that has an RS485 interface please confirm operation using the actual device In some cases the number of units transmission distance and baud rate vary depending on the connected device Note2 The values for the transmission distance baud rate and number of units should be within the values noted in the graph below For baud rate 115 2 kbps 99 For baud rate T 57 6 kbps Num ber of units stations 40 0 700 1000 1200 Transmission distance m When using a baud rate of 2400 bps to 38400 bps you can set up to a maximum of 99 units stations and maximum transmission distance of 1200 m Note3 Only 9600 bps or 19200 bps can be specified when the C NET adapter is connected with the RS485 interface Note4 The start code and end code can be used only in the general purpose serial communication mode Note5 The converter SI 35 manufactured by Lineeye Co Ltd is recommendable for the RS485 at the computer side Adjust the res
365. uffer Data is sent and received E E through the data registers When data has been sent from FP via the R8485 communication of AFPG806 start sending data to FP side after the time mentioned below passed at the receiver In case of 19200 bit s 1 ms In case of 115200 bit s 200us Suge Reference lt 7 2 1 Precaution When Using RS485 Port gt System register settings e In the default settings the COM port is set to computer link mode Settings for COM1 port No Name Set Value No 412 COM1 port selection of General purpose serial communication communication mode No 413 Communication format for COM1 Data length 7 bits 8 bits port Parity check None Odd Even Stop bit nnn 1 bit 2 bits Terminator CR CR LF None ETX Header No STX STX No 415 Baud rate setting for COM1 port 2400 to 115200 bps No 416 Starting address for receive buffer DTO to DT32764 Initial value DTO for COM1 port No 417 Receive buffer capacity 0 to 2048 words Initial value 2048 words for COM1 port Note1 The communication format and baud rate should be set to match the connected devices Note2 The RS485 port of the AFPG806 is either 19200 bps or 115200 bps only Also the baud rate communication speed must be identically set by the system register and the dip switch in the communication cassette Note3 Connect the terminal and the E terminal with a lead wire to make the termination re
366. unicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 6 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 7 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 8 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 9 is communicating properly in PC PLC link mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link mode Turns on when Unit No 10 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 11 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 12 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped when an error occurs or when not in the PC PLC link 1 mode Turns on when Unit No 13 is communicating properly in PC PLC link 1 mode Turns off when operation is stopped wh
367. unication is used to connect multiple PLCs to the transmission line e g in a C NET the unit number must be specified so that the destination of the command can be identified The unit number is specified either by using the unit number setting switch or the system register Unit No Computer Commercially available conversion adapter RS232C a i n RS485 m ae ee Shh Se The command is sent specifying the destination with the unit number The PLC to which the response is sent is identified with the unit number When the unit number setting switch is 0 the system register is valid When the unit number setting switch is other than 0 the unit number setting switch is valid and the unit number setting of the system register is ignored In this case the same number is given to the port 1 and port 2 cS Note e Unit numbers set using the unit number setting switch are valid only for the communication port of the communication cassette Tool port unit numbers should be set using the system register 1 29 Setting unit numbers with the setting switch The unit number setting switch is located underneath the cover on the left side of the FP control unit By setting the selector switch and the dial a unit number between 1 and 31 can be set Unit no station no setting switch Selection switch Dial switch ON Table of switch settings and related unit numbers e A uni
368. unit is inthe PROG mode PC PLC link transmission error relay R9050 This relay goes on if a problem is detected during transmission Unitno 11213 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Conditions ON When a transmission error has occurred in the PLC link or when there is an error in the for on off setting for the PLC link area OFF When the unit is inthe PROG mode Le Key Point Monitoring the PC PLC link status In FPWIN GR the PC PLC link status items such as the transmission cycle time and the number of times that errors have occurred can be monitored by selecting the PC PLC link switch on the FPWIN GR Status Monitor screen Cd note Remote programming of the linked PLCs is not possible 7 61 7 6 4 Connection Example of PC PLC link When using three PLCs The following example demonstrates how the PLC can be connected to two other FPX PLCs using a PC PLC link connection In the example shown here link relays are use When X1 of control unit no 1 turns on Y1 of unit no 2 turns on When X2 of unit no 1 turns on Y1 of unit no 3 turns on m relay LO turns on FPE R5485 FPE FFE Unit no 1 Unit no 2 Unit no 3 System register settings When an aa a aan ea link the communication format and baud rate are fixed Set Value Ne Name format for COM1 Data length 8 bits port Parity check Odd Stop bit 1 bit Terminator CR Header No
369. unter clockwise output are supported 1 channel Max 100kKHz 2 channel Max 60kHz FP gt Motor a Pulse output JUUL Motor F F M driver A i A NR A a w i odie a Pulse output Motor nonin driver Heater control based on PWM output function supported The pulse output at any duty ratio can be picked up with special instruction When pulse width value increases Ju UL When pulse width Value decreases Heater Strong Heater Weak Security functions have been enhanced 1 Upload protection Enables not to upload programs 2 8 digit alohameric password 3 4 digit numeric password Easy temperature control instruction has been added It enables to perform the operation easily like a temperature control device Single line PID instruction has been added Three port general purpose serial communication The tool port also supports the general purpose serial communication Modbus RTU master unit and slave units Communication with a temperature control device inverter or measuring instruments can be performed with simple programs using the FP as a master unit Communication with the existing network can be performed using the FP as slave units MEWTOCOL master unit Programs for the MEWTOCOL communication master unit can be easily created Rewrite function during RUN Programs can be changed during RUN up to 512k steps 1 2 Unit Types 1 2 1 FP Control Units 12k type P
370. us change is fed back to the programs of the other units and YO of the other units is set to TRUE FP No 2 Link register too m No 3 Link register too T No 4 Link register oo iw No 1 Link register k Loo 100 Link register A constant of 100 is written to link register LDO of unit no 1 The contents of LDO in the other units are also changed to a constant of 100 7 51 7 6 2 Setting Communication Parameters Setting of communication mode In the default settings the COM port is set to computer link mode Set the communication mode using the FPWIN GR programming tool Select PLC Configuration under Options and then select COM1 port tab The PC PLC link is available for COM1 port only Dialog box of PLC system register setting PLG Configuration Untitlel Hold Non hold 1 Hold Non hold2 Action on Error Time Link High Speed Counter Interrupt Input Tool Port COMI Port COM2 Port No 410 Unit No fi Cancel No 412 Comm Mode Modem enabled Po Pead PLC Wools Eomnmnanmcat fq O r 1 T daws Baudate a Initialize Help No 412 Communication Mode Select the COM port operation mode Click on v and select PC Link gy Key Point e When using a PC PLC link the communication format and baud rate are fixed Set Value Communication format for COM1 Data length 8 bits
371. us on neous on i neous on 46 5255 42 47 55 4648 55 Ambient Temperature C Ambient Temperature C Ambient Temperature C Circuit diagram XO X1 X3 X4 X2 X5 to XF Xn Xn COM COM For X2 X5 to X7 R1 5 6kQ R2 1kQ For X8 to XF R1 6 8kQ R2 8200 2 2 2 2 Output Specifications Transistor output specifications C32 NPN C28 PNP Insulation method Optical coupler Output type Open collector Rated load voltage 5 to 24V DC 24V DC Operating load voltage range 4 75 to 26 4V DC 21 6 to 26 4V DC eer ene For YO Y1 Y3 Y4 0 5A For Y2 Y5 to YF 0 1A For Y2 Y5 to YB 0 3A ssie einen For YO Y1 Y3 Y4 1 5A For Y2 Y5 to YF 0 5A For Y2 Y5 to YB 0 7A Output points per common 12 points common Off state leakage current 100A or less On state voltage drop 0 5V or less For YO Y1 Y3 Y4 at 15mA or less 2us or less Response time For Y2 Y5 or later 0 2ms or less For YO Y1 Y3 Y4 at 15mA or less 8us or less For Y2 Y5 or later 0 5ms or less External power Voltage 21 6 to 26 4V DC supply for driving internal circuit Current 70mA or less Surge absorber Zener diode Operating mode indicator LED display Phase fault protection Phase fault protection thermal protection for Y2 Y5 or later Limitations on number of simultaneous output on points Keep the number of output points per common which are simultaneously on within the following range as determined by the ambient temperature C32 C28
372. ut 8 points XO X1 X3 X4 5us X2 X5 to No of interrupt programs X7 100us periodical interrupt 1 point 0 5ms to 30s Self diagnosis function Such as watchdog program syntax check Available year month day hour minute second and day of Calendar timer week However this can only be used when a battery has been installed Backup by F12 P13 Flash ROM Data register 82765 words Notes backup Automatic backup Counter 16 points 1008 to 1023 internal relay 128 points when power is cut off R2480 to R255F data register 55 words 32710 to 32764 Memory that is set as hold area at system register However only when an optional battery has been installed 220 days or more Actual usage value approx 840 days 25 C Battery life Periodic replacement interval 1 year Value applies when no power is supplied at all All kinds of comments including I O comments remarks and block comments can be stored 828kbyte 2 points Resolution 10 bits KO to K1000 C32TH C32T2H C24R2H C28P2H only 2 points Resolution 10 bits KO to K1000 C32THTM C382T2HTM C24R2HTM C28P2HTM only Max 16 units Link relay 1024 points Link register 128 words PLC link function Link area allocation can be switched between the first half and the second half Program edition during RUN constant scan forced on off password floating point operation and PID processing N
373. utput fromCHo _ and pulses are output from CHO _ HDF AH Fo mv H2008 DT 90052 Overrun process l L Pulse output stop pulse output stop clear Fo Mv H2000 DT 90052 Pulse output diagram TO ee side side C OFF JOG command 300Hz i Ty Y Pulse n M Motor i e Reference The pulse output control instruction F0 is used for the pulse output stop lt 6 4 4 Pulse output control instruction F0 gt 6 38 6 4 8 Positioning Control Instruction F174 Data Table Contro e Positioning is performed according to the specified data table RO R10 F1 DMV DMV DMV DMV DMV DMV DMV DMV DMV DMV ay XX A KX A A IL K 1200 DT400 1000 DT402 1000 DT404 2500 DT406 2000 DT408 5000 DT410 5000 DT412 1000 DT414 2000 DT416 0 DT418 Control code H1200 Frequency 1 1000 Hz Targe value 1 1000 pulses Frequency 2 2500 Hz Target value 2 2000 pulses Frequency 3 5000 Hz Target value 3 5000 pulses Frequency 4 1000 Hz Target value 4 2000 pulses Pulse output stop When the execution condition R10 goes on pulses are output from YO ata frequency of 1000 Hz and positioning begins At the point when 1000 pulses have been counted the frequency switches to 2500 Hz Positioning is then carried out sequentially in accordance with the values of the data table until it stops at the d
374. vailable Not available Not available partially 1 This instruction is available for FP e Ver 1 21 or later FPO V2 1 or later 14 57 Ope a _ Ha rand Floating point type data to 16 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal point down to integer Floating point type data to 32 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal point down to integer Floating point type data to 16 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal point off to integer Floating point type data to 32 bit integer con version rounding the first decimal point off to integer Floating point type data round ding the first decimal point down Floating point type data round ding the first decimal point off Floating point type data sign changes Floating point type data absolute F337 Floating point P337 type data degree radian F338 Floating point P338 type data radian gt degree Floating point type real number data le instructions FIX S D Converts real number data specified PFIX by S 1 S to the 16 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point down and the converted data is stored in D DFIX S D Converts real number data specified PDFIX by S 1 S to the 32 bit integer data with sign rounding the first decimal point down and the converted data is stored in D 1 D ROFF S D Converts real number data specified PROFF by S 1 S t
375. wire twisted wire Number of wires Size Cross sectional area AWG 28 to 16 0 08mm to 1 25 mm AWG 28 to 18 0 08mm to 0 75 mm Use the above wires shielded It is recommended to ground the shielded part Pole terminals Cross sectional area mm With insulating Without insulating sleeve sleeve AWG 24 Al 0 25 6 BU A 0 25 7 AWG 22 Al 0 34 6 TQ A 0 34 7 AWG 20 Al 0 5 6 WH A 0 5 6 Phoenix Sara AWG 18 Al 0 75 6 GY A 0 75 6 100 AWG 18 A160 0 5x2 AWG 20 for2 Al TWIN 2x pcs 0 5 8 WH Pressure welding tool for pole terminals Phoenix Contact product ID Model No Product No Phoenix Contact CRIMPFOX 6 1212034 7 15 Screwdriver for terminal block To tighten the terminals of the communication connector use a screwdriver by Phoenix Contact product no 1205037 blade size 0 4 x 2 5 model no SZS 0 4 x 2 5 The tightening torque should be 0 22 to 0 25 Nm 2 3 kgfcm to 2 5 kgfcm Wiring method 1 Remove 7 mm of the wire s insulation 2 Insert wire into terminal hole until it stops Tighten screw clockwise to fix wire in place Tightening torque 0 22 Nm to 0 25 Nm 2 3 kgfcm to 2 5 kgfcm Notes for wiring e When removing the wire s insulation be careful not to scratch the core wire e Do not twist the wires to connect them e Do not solder the wires to connect them The solder may break due to vibration e After wiring make sure stress is not applied to t
376. y will be shown Select Set that PLC cannot be uploaded Upload settings Untitle i E xX eee Click Execute Set that PLC cannot be uploaded __ ws i Release the upload protection by compulsion Help 8 10 8 4 Setting Function for FP Memory Loader The following three functions of the FP memory loader AFP8670 AFP86 71 can be set through the FP The setting will be effective when it is transferred to another FP after the upload to the FP memory loader from the set FP Setting conditions 32k type FP x V3 2 or later FP memory loader V2 0 or later FPWIN GR V2 8 or later 8 digit password is set 8 4 1 Download Protection Setting to Previous Versions Allow the download to older than Version 3 2 This is a function to disable the download from the FP V3 2 or later to the FP older than V3 2 for enhanced security When setting the download to be enabled the download can be performed regardless of the version of FP however the limited distribution and upload protection settings cannot be used 8 4 2 Limited Distribution Function Allow the download in case of same password When downloading a program from the memory loader the program can be downloaded only when the program stored in the memory loader matches the password set for the PLC with this function enabled FP memory loader T Oy Program Password 01234567 E Limited distribution function ON Ma
377. z or higher the duty must be set to 1 4 25 6 4 11 Pulse Output Instruction F176 Circular Interpolation Only for C32T2 C28P2 C32T2H and C28P2H e The circular interpolation controls positioning with two axes according to the specified data table R12 F1 DMV H10 DT600 Fi DMV K500 ODT602 F1 DMV K8660 DT604 F1 DMV K9396 DT608 F1 DMV K 3420 DT610 F176 SPCH DT600 KO Assume that the execution coditions for this instruction always hold When the execution l F1 DMV K 5000 DT606 l l conditions are off pulse output stops Fositioning data table lt Pass position setting method gt sna Control code DT602 DT603 Target value DT605 X axis CHO Target value DT607 Y axis CH2 X axis CHO DT615 center position DT616 Y axis CH2 DT617 center position 10000 pulses O pulse pulse lt Center position setting method gt ene Control code DT602 H 110 pTtgo3 Composite speed 500 Hz DT604 Target value DT605 X axis CHO DT606 Target value DT607 Y axis CH2 DT608 X axis CHO DT609 center position DT610 Y axis CH2 DT611 center position DT612 pT6i3 Radius 8660 pulses 5000 pulses 0 pulse 0 pulse 10000 pulse l Operation result Pulses are output from the X axis CHO and the Y axis CH2 at a composite speed of 500 Hz and the two axes are c
378. zf Home return start aCe E Pulse output CW JUUL Home input Putse output CCW Y4 a Near home input Motor driver side side ee j E NVA LAAI 1 xxO J OCJ Near home sensor Home sensor Program XB R903C R52 R50 DF Positioning operation running 1 a OES RA R50 R50 R51 m DF Positioning operation start e oe o ces o ees o ees o oe R51 Positioning data table LF om uno orzo J Fi ow x20 orz J DT204 ria ten ree g Acceleration time 150 ms eo eee OT209 clear output Fi omv ko 0T 208 Control code A120 Duty 1 4 25 Hz to 100 k Home return CW F171 SPDH DT 200 K2 F 4 fPulse output instruction table shaped control The data table headed by DT200 is used The data table headed by DT200 is used and pulses are output from CH2 _ J Pulses are output from CHO O 7 R903C R TO R52 OT 1 s type timer Setting K10 and using itas a 1 s timer _ x HoF Fo mv H2010 DT 90052 Fo mv 2000 DT 90052 Pulse output diagram Near home sensor AB ON Aa ON Home sensor xO ON 1000 Hz 6 34 6 4 7 Pulse Output Instruction F172 JOG operation e This instruction is used for JOG operation by obtaining a pulse from the desired output when the execution condition trigger turns on XB F1 DMV H1110 DT300_ J While XB is in the on state a pulse of 300 Hz is output from YO

FP-Sigma User`s Manual, ARCT1F333E11

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents